Site Inspection
Training Course
Hazardous Site Control Division
LJ. S. Environmental Protection Agency
Washington, D.C.
-------
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL IN SITE INSPECTIONS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The complex tasks confronting a project like the CERCLA Site In-
spection Program require the establishment of management controls to
ensure that project activities are efficiently conducted. These con-
trols should require management to plan work methods, verify that re-
quired work methods are followed, develop employee training programs,
and provide an assurance that critical activities are correctly
conducted.
Decisions concerning the apparent or actual hazards posed by a
specific site to the surrounding environment and the HRS ranking of
such sites must be based on valid analytical data. Such decisions
will be no better than the data on which they are based. Therefore,
it is imperative that the data be of high quality. To obtain requis-
ite levels of precision and accuracy with minimum expenditures of re-
sources, it is necessary to develop a comprehensive and well-docu-
mented QA program. Activities concerning sampling site selection; the
frequency of sampling; the number of samples to be collected; the pro-
cedures involved in the collection, preservation, and transport of
samples; the calibration and maintenance of instruments; and the pro-
cessing, verification, and reporting of the data must incorporate a QA
program. If careful attention is not paid to each of these items, it
is highly probable that invalid data will be produced. Such data
waste resources, lead to bad management decisions, and hinder
enforcement actions.
The QA program developed for this program should provide guidance
in the quality procedures related to project activities. Because of
the heterogeneous nature of many hazardous waste materials, these
guidelines cannot cover every possible situation that may be encoun-
tered in the field. Consequently, an awareness of common mistakes and
areas where QA may be seriously jeopardized during field sampling is
necessary if data items are to be considered valid.
-------
2.0 FIELD SITUATION
Field sampling, whether for SI/HRS or other purposes, requires
the collection of numerous data elements generated under less than
ideal conditions. This necessitates carrying various measuring and
sampling devices into the field to generate and record the necessary
information. The quality of data generated is directly related to the
care given these devices coupled with the experience and expertise of
the individuals using them. This section will address the required
quality control elements, some of the more common problems encountered
during field operations, areas of the investigation affected, and
possible solutions to the problems.
2.2 DATA ACQUISITION
The collection of field data such as pH, conductivity, tempera-
ture, static water level and ambient air characteristics is critical
to SI investigations. Static water levels in wells, coupled with the
total depth of the wells, provides the data necessary to calculate the
volume of water required to be purged from the wells prior to samp-
ling, to assure that representative formation water is being sampled.
Conductivity, pH and temperature provide the data necessary to iden-
tify contaminant plumes as well as physio-chemical states of contami-
nants such as heavy metals.
Ambient air data from organic vapor analyzers, air sampling de-
vices, combustible gas meters, oxygen meters, etc., provide the data
documenting off-site air pathway migration. This data may be used
later in hazard evaluations, risk assessment, etc.
Common problems encountered during the collection of these data
elements include:
-------
2.3 FIELD EQUIPMENT
Properly maintained and calibrated field equipment is essential
to the collection of valid field data elements and representative
samples during site inspections. Ideally, this equipment will be
maintained by a designated individual or group within the office.
They would be responsible for maintaining the calibration, maintenance
and availability of the equipment. Additionally, they should assure
that field teams are knowledgable in the proper use, calibration and
limitations of the equipment.
2.3.1 SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
Sampling equipment, including pumps, bailers, buckets, funnels,
etc., should be made of reasonably inert materials such as stainless
steel or teflon. PVC is not recommended except for use as single site
dedicated or disposable equipment as in soil scoops. This equipment
is usually decontaminated (as discussed later) following each SI and
requires minor maintenance.
Care must be taken in use of the right piece of sampling equip-
ment for the particular sampling job.
2.3.2 SCIENTIFIC EQUIPMENT
This group of equipment provides a significant amount of actual
field data and associated quality control problems. Included in this
group are pH meters, water conductivity meters, thermometers, organic
vapor analyzers, air sampling equipment, geophysical equipment and
water level indicators (M scopes). Since this equipment is more
complex than the sampling equipment, the need for quality control to
assure valid data is much greater. Proper care and maintenance is
essential. In addition, proper calibration and operational experience
is required to assure valid data.
-------
Each instrument in this group comes with an instruction manual
detailing the procedures and theory of operation, calibration proce-
dures and frequency and maintenance requirements. Quality control
measures for these instruments include performance of required main-
tenance, operational checks and established calibration schedules.
These items should be recorded in a logbook for each piece of equip-
ment.
The major problems encountered with this equipment are:
o Failure to calibrate equipment prior to use.
o Inexperience in operating the equipment.
o Inability to assure proper functioning of equipment.
o Improper cleaning and maintenance of the equipment.
An obvious solution to these problems is to provide training to
the individuals using the equipment. Since this is not always pos-
sible, another solution is to maintain a comprehensive manual contain-
ing the manufacturer's instruction manuals for all the equipment.
Each team could then review the appropriate equipment instructions
prior to use.
To ensure proper calibration, each instrument should be tagged
with a label indicating when calibration is required. In the case of
simple insturments such as pH, conductivity, and combustible gas
meters, these would be calibrated before each use. Appropriate
calibration standards should be stored with the instruments. In this
way, the necessary calibration materials are taken to the field with
the instruments. The calibration data, together with the field data
are then recorded in the logbook.
In some cases, access to the operations manual also allows
inexperienced individuals to successfully operate the instruments. It
is recommended that an experienced individual oversee the novice. The
experienced individual can then assure that compensation or correc-
tions for differences in temperature in pH and conductivity measure-
ments are properly addressed.
-------
To insure that instruments are operating properly, several solu-
tions are available. These include:
o Proper calibration as above.
o Having a supply of appropriate batteries for the units.
o Having properly charged batteries where replacement is
impractical.
o Using a solvent-based marker to check organic vapor analyzers
and combustible gas detectors.
o Breathing on an oxygen monitor to produce a meter response.
Additionally, some instruments use Ni-Cad or Gel-Cell rechargable
batteries.
The Ni-Cad units need to be cycled from fully charged to deep
discharge monthly to insure stable charging characteristics and
maximum battery life. The Gel-Cell batteries, however, should never
be deep discharged as they will never hold a full charge again. This
will significantly reduce field use and can lead to erratic data.
Gel-Cells should be kept on charge when not in use.
2.4 SAMPLING
The actual sample collection, preservation and tagging provides
numerous opportunities for error and data invalidation. This phase of
the SI involves the greatest number of people actually handling the
samples. The areas of concern within the sampling phase include:
o collection of samples by the team sampling members,
o sample preservation,
o sample tagging, and
o decontamination.
-------
2.4.1 SAMPLE COLLECTION
Quality control requirements in this area include: sample
containers, sample collection and transfer, capping and number of
samples collected.
The sample containers used should be spotlessly cleaned or new,
unused bottles. Cleaning methods should be documented through a
bottle lot control number system or certified in writing, by the
person cleaning the sample containers. This quality control
information should be recorded in the field logbook and addressed in
the sampling plan.
Failure to use the proper type and properly cleaned sample
containers results in numerous quality control problems. For
instance:
o Improperly cleaned one liter polyethylene bottles for metals
can be contaminated with metal residues during manufacture or
if not properly revised with decontaminated metals-free water
and acid (nitric) prior to sampling.
o Improper drying of organic sample bottles at 120°C for one
hour or more can lead to erroneous findings of phthalates
which occur during manufacturing or cleaning solvent residuals
introduce during bottle preparation.
o Insufficient sample volumes will result in less sensitive
detection limits or total loss of the affected data element.
o The sampling of several sample points at one time by one team
can result in confusing which metals bottle or VOA goes with
which sample point. This can occur downrange or at the field
command post.
As previously mentioned, the use of properly cleaned containers
will eliminate some of these problems. A check with the analytical
laboratory performing the analyses will assure that proper types of
containers and volumes are established prior to the actual sampling
-------
(see Exhibit 1). These requirements should be included in the
sampling plan and field logbook so that these requirements are not
forgotten. The actual sampling should be performed at each location
and completed totally before moving on to the next sample point. If
this is not efficient, temporary pre-labelling of the sample bottles
with masking tape bearing a unique sample identification number for
each sampling point may be used.
Finally, care must be exercised in the actual sample collection
and transfer. Items to be aware of include:
o Rinse buckets, funnels, scoops, etc. used to collect and
transfer the sample with a portion of the actual sample which
is then discarded.
o Transfer samples carefully to avoid entrainraent of air which
strip materials, oxidize metals or otherwise change the
content of the sample. This is especially true for Volatile
Organics (VOA) and metals in ground water.
o Exercise extreme care with sample container caps. Regardless
of how well the container has been cleaned and prepared,
dropping the lid, losing the teflon liner or reversing the VOA
cap septum will invalidate the sample.
2.4.2 SAMPLE PRESERVATION
With the exception of medium and high hazard samples, all the
samples collected during an SI will require preservation of some type.
These samples will also have a finite "holiday" time prior to receipt
at the analytical lab.
The most common quality control problems in this area are
mislabelling bottles, failure to add the appropriate preservative and
exceeding the holding time. These problems can be easily avoided
through a little care and organization. Included are:
-------
o Verifying, with the lab, the appropriate preservation and
holding time for each parameter sampled (see Exhibit 2).
o Tabulate these requirements in the sampling plan and field
logbook.
o Preserve and tag samples one at a time rather than trying to
process them en masse.
o Pre-plan and document shipping times for collected samples to
assure they arrive at the lab within the specified holding
times.
o Pre-plan and double check that appropriate preservatives in
sufficient quantities are conveyed to the field.
2.4.3 SAMPLE TAGGING
Obviously, samples must be identified as to location, date and
time of collection, analytical pararaeter(s) requested, samplers per-
forming collection, type of sample and preservative added if any. To
facilitate organized sampling efforts, unique site designations and
sample types should be developed. These might include:
o A two or three letter code designating the site. An example
is Anytown Landfill being designated as AL.
o Types of samples can be identified in a similar manner by:
GW - Ground water — SW - Surface water — LG - Lagoon
SE or SED - Sediment — ST - Stream — LK - Lake
SS - Surface Soil — SC - Soil core sample
o Each sample location can then be uniquely numbered and identi-
fied. For example: AL-GW-2 might represent the ground water
sample from Monitoring well B-203 at Anytown Landfill.
o Pre-numbered sample tags providing sufficient space to record
the data discussed above are essential to tracking the various
parameters collected at each sampling location.
The most common QC problems in this area include: incomplete
sample tags; failure to provide the coding information in the sampling
plan and field logbook; mistagging samples, omitting parameters for
analysis and omitting added preservatives. Again, a modicum of care
and preplanning will eliminate many of these problems.
-------
o Failure to accurately record the data at the time of collec-
tion.
o Failure to accurately record the location where the readings
were taken.
o Human errors such as transposed numbers, math errors, mis-
placed or omitted decimal points.
These errors or problems can easily compound themselves during SI
write-ups and MRS rankings. Results of such errors can include
inability to reproduce sample results, resample specific problem areas
and inaccurately ranking a site either too high or too low.
Solutions to these problems include:
o Designating a team member as the documentation coordinator.
As such, this person will be responsible for recording all
field data in a bound logbook. Recorded data would be checked
for accuracy by the individual generating the data by reading
back or reviewing the data entries and initialing the data.
o Sample locations should be staked, flagged or otherwise
uniquely identified. Measurements from permanent features
(center line of road, numbered utility pole, etc.) to the
sample point could be made and entered into the logbook.
Designations on a quad map, accurate site map or site sketch
with distance measurements of sampling locations is another
option assuring reasonable reproducibility.
o Human errors can be reduced by the use of calculators, written
logbook records of mathematical formulae used and quality
control checks by a second member of the team.
2.1 FIELD LOGBOOK
This item is, perhaps, the single most important quality control
element in a site inspection. This document is the written record of
all field data, observations, field equipment calibrations, samples
and chain of custody. The potential for future legal actions based on
-------
this SI requires that the field logbook be a site-specific document
which is a bound (not loose leaf) book such as a ledger, composition
book, diary, etc. The pages should be sequentially numbered, either
printed or hand numbered, the important point being that pages cannot
easily be removed or fall out.
The field log should be maintained by one team member. This may
be the Project Officer, team leader or documentation team member.
This individual should make relevant entries. The entries should be
made in waterproof ink. Mistakes should not be erased or scratched
out but should be lined out with a single line through the error, the
corrected material inserted above, below or behind the error, and the
error should be initialed by the person making the correction.
Information should be made in a logical manner. This might be
having sections for general observations, sample stations with provi-
sions for field data and sample locations observations, site sketches,
chain of custody, etc. Another organization scheme is the diary
approach. This would result in a chronological recording of all the
above information by time and date. Whatever method is selected it
should be followed consistently. Provide a table of contents identi-
fying major information locations. Each page or day should be signed
and dated by the person making the entry(ies).
The most common, problems associated with the field logbook are:
o Failure to begin the log at the onset of the project.
o Procrastination in recording on-site observations and data.
o Failure to sign and date entries.
o Having numerous individuals making entries.
The only viable solutions to these problems is to select dedi-
cated, responsible individuals to manage the field logbooks and
designate a second individual to review, from a quality control stand
point, the field logs to assure completeness.
-------
Having a second person check over the sample tags following
attachment to the sample bottles can eliminate potentially serious
data omissions. Sample tags should be filled out immediately prior to
attachment to the sample bottle. While time consuming, it is the best
method to avoid sample confusion and mistagging of samples. Addition-
ally, the sample coding, pairing the sample with the sample locations
should be tabulated in the sampling plan for ready reference in the
field operations. This information, together with the field data
should be recorded in the field logbook.
2.4.4 DECONTAMINATION
Once a sample location has been sampled, the equipment used in
the sample collection must be cleaned or decontaminated before moving
to the next location. Failure to properly clean this equipment will
result in cross-contamination of samples and subsequent loss of valid
data. The only exception to this requirement are cases where:
o sufficient equipment is available to use clean equipment at
each sample location,
o contamination is so great that disposable equipment is re-
quired, or
o where equipment is dedicated to each specific sample location.
The scope of SI work generally precludes the last case due to
high costs associated with dedicated equipment. Hence, we are left
with decontamination and/or disposable equipment which is used once,
then thrown away.
Decontamination, while labor intensive, is probably the most cost
effective for long range planning. Decontamination also allows the
equipment to be utilized on a number of projects. Decontamination
entails washing the equipment with soap and water or a specific decon
solution (see Exhibit 3), rinsing with tap water, rinsing with
deionized (DI) water, solvent rinse (acetone or methanol if sampling
for organics) and a final triple rinse with deionized water.
-------
Decontamination does introduce some quality control problems based on
the type of agents used. The most common problems are:
o Solvent carry-over, and
o Inadequate removal of previous sample media, especially
viscous oil, tars, wood preservatives, etc.
Both of these problems can be handled successfully in the field.
Procedures required to assure adequate quality control include:
o Selection of equipment which is easily washed as a unit or can
be easily disassembled for cleaning,
o Scrupulous cleaning in soap and water and/or decon solutions
using heavy-duty brushes,
o Using copious amounts of water and DI water during rinses,
o Allowing sufficient time for solvents (if used) to evaporate
before rinsing with DI water. If the solvent has not evapor-
ated and becomes mixed with the final DI rinses, the solvent
becomes extremely difficult to remove and usually contaminates
the next sample,
o Preparation of a blank sample at the end of each day. This
sample should be handled exactly as any other sample. This
blank will provide a quality control check on field decon
procedures.
2.5 RECOGNIZING LOSS OF QC
This is the most important factor in field quality control. Each
of the above elements must be checked and verified as completed. Loss
of quality control can be identified by:
o Incomplete field logs,
o Gaps or absence of field data elements,
o Incomplete sample tags,
o Lab results where blanks containing contaminants, dissolved
metals exceed total metals, etc.,
-------
o Calibaration information is not recorded and
o Log entries are not signed.
While the list could go on and on, these are common, readily
apparent signs of loss of quality control. Corrective actions must be
instituted immediately upon1 discovery to assure correction of these
problems so that future activities will have adequate QC. The most
common reasons for these problems are inadequate pre-planning, lack of
attention to details, and poor field organization.
-------
EXHIBIT 1
-------
EXHIBIT 2
-------
EXHIBIT 3
-------
PREPARATION OF DECONTAMINATION SOLUTIONS
Decontamination solutions should be designed to react with and neutralize
specific contaminants found at a hazardous waste site. However, since
the contaminants on a particular site will be unknown 1n the majority of
cases, 1t 1s necessary to use a decontamination solution that 1s effec-
tive for a variety of contaminants. Several of these general purpose
decontamination solutions (some Ingredients are available at hardware or
swimming pool supply stores) are listed below:
DECON SOLUTION A - A solution containing 5X sodium carbonate (Na£
COj) and 5% trisodium phosphate (Na3 P04).
DECON SOLUTION B - A solution containing 10X calcium hypochlorlte
(CaC1202).
DECON SOLUTION C - A solution containing 5X trlsodlum phosphate (Na3
PC>4). This solution can also be used as a general purpose rinse.
DECON SOLUTION D - A dilute solution of hydrochloric acid (HC1).
See Table 1 for recommended uses of these solutions.
-------
8
-------
DRAFT
CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CP-1
1.1 DEFINITION OF A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CP-1
1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CP-1
2.0 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CP-1
2.1 PHYSICAL STATE CP-1
2.2 DENSITY OF GASES AND LIQUIDS CP-2
2.2.1 VAPOR DENSITY CP-3
2.2.2 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CP-4
3.0 FLAMMABIUTY CP-5
3.1 CHEMISTRY OF FIRE CP-5
3.1.1 FIRE PYRAMID CP-6
3.1.2 CONCENTRATION CP-7
3.1.3 FLASH POINT CP-7
3.1.4 FLAMMABLE SOLIDS CP-8
3.2 FIREFIGHTING AND FIRE PREVENTION CP-8
3.2.1 CLASSES OF FIRE CP-8
3.2.2 USES AND LIMITATIONS OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CP-9
3.2.3 SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION CP-10
4.0 CORROSIVITY CP-11
4.1 CHARACTERISTICS OF CORROSIVITY CP-11
4.2 CHARACTERISTICS OF ACIDS CP-11
4.3 UNIQUE HAZARDS OF SELECTED ACIDS CP-12
4.4 CHARACTERISTICS OF ALKALIS (METAL HYDROXIDES) CP-16
4.5 CHARACTERISTICS OF HALOGENS CP-17
4.6 CHARACTERISTICS OF ACID ANHYDRIDES CP-17
5.0 REACTIVITY CP-17
5.1 REACTIVITY OF SOME COMMON ELEMENTS CP-17
5.2 WATER-REACTIVE MATERIALS CP-18
5.2.1 ALKALI METALS: POTASSIUM, SODIUM, LITHIUM CP-19
5.2.2 OTHER WATER-REACTIVE METALS: MAGNESIUM, ALUMINUM, CP-19
ZIRCONIUM, TITANIUM, ZINC
5.2.3 WATER-REACTIVE INORGANIC CHLORIDES CP-19
5.2.4 OTHER WATER REACTIVES CP-20
5.3 OXIDIZING MATERIALS CP-20
6.0 HAZARD MODIFIERS CP-21
7.0 REFERENCES AND INFORMATION RESOURCES CP-24
CP-ii
-------
DRAFT
CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
EXHIBITS
NUMBER PAGE
CP-1 REPRESENTATIVE DEHYDRATION REACTIONS OF CP-14
CONCENTRATED SULFURIC ACID
CP-2 HAZARDOUS REACTIONS INVOLVING CONCENTRATED CP-15
SULFURIC ACID
CP-iii
-------
DRAFT
1.0 INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
1.1 Definition Of A Hazardous Material
A hazardous material is a naturally occurring or synthesized material that because
of its physical or chemical properties can cause the deterioration of other
materials or can be injurious to living things.
1.2 Classification Of Hazardous Materials
Hazardous materials fall into four classes:
1. Flammable or explosive
2. Corrosive
3. Reactive
4. Toxic or poisonous
2.0 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
2.1 Physical State
The physical state of a material (gas, liquid, or solid) has a definite relationship to
the potential danger posed by that material. A material that is dangerous in one
state can be relatively innocuous in another.
1. Gas
a. More hazardous than liquids or solids.
b. Flammable gases ignite easily.
c. Toxic gases can easily gain access to the body by inhalation.
CP-1
-------
DRAFT
d. Gases in the environment are more difficult to contain than solids or
liquids, but they are more easily dispersed.
2. Liquid
a. More ha2ardous than solids.
b. Flammable liquids ignite easily only when vaporized.
c. Toxic liquids can be absorbed by the skin if splashed or spilled; they
can be inhaled only when vaporized.
d. Liquids can sink, float, or dissolve in water.
e. Liquids can be very hot (boiling water, 212 F) or very cold (boiling
liquid nitrogen, 230 F), and thus they can cause burning or freezing.
f. Liquids in the environment can be collected, contained, or absorbed if
insoluble; they can be dispersed or diluted if soluble.
3. Solid
a. Less hazardous than gases or liquids unless powdered.
b. Flammable solids ignite when the ignition temperature is reached.
c. Toxic solids have the greatest difficulty in gaining access to the body.
d. Solids in the environment can be easily collected and contained.
2.2 Density Of Gases and Liquids
The density of a gas in relation to the density of air is termed the vapor density. It
is calculated as follows:
CP-2
-------
DRAFT
., . Weight of substance
Vapor dens,tv . Wejght Qf an equa| vo|ume of ajr
The relative density of a liquid is termed the specific gravity. It is calculated as
follows:
c -f- _ -t Weight of liquid
bpecmc gravity = Weight of an equa| V0|ume of water
The vapor density or specific gravity is an important piece of information when
dealing with environmental pollutants. It will affect the way the material travels
through the environment, the kinds of hazards it poses, and the safety precautions
that must be taken to afford protection against the material's hazardous effects.
Refer to The Merck Index or similar technical references for vapor density or
specific gravity of the material in question.
2.2.1 Vapor Density
2.2.1.1 Hazards of Materials Lighter Than Air
If the vapor density is less than 1, the material is lighter than air and will rise and
dissipate in the air if unconfined. The material could collect in high spots such as
ceilings if confined. One example is hydrogen.
Demonstration 1: Vapor Density
To demonstrate the effects of lighter-than-air gases and vapors.
CP-3
-------
DRAFT
2.2.1.2 Hazards of Materials Heavier Than Air
If the vapor density is greater than T, the material is heavier than air and will sink.
The material will linger near the ground and collect in low spots. Examples are
carbon dioxide (can displace oxygen), chlorine (toxic), gasoline vapors (explosive),
and trichloroethylene (can displace air).
Demonstration 2: Vapor Density
Purpose:
To demonstrate the effects of heavier-than-air gases and vapors.
2.2.2 Specific Gravity
2.2.2.1 Hazards of Materials Lighter Than (but Insoluble in) Water
If specific gravity is less than 1, the material will float on water.
If the material enters the environment, it will sink in porous materials such as soil
or sand until it encounters water (i.e., a groundwater aquifer), where it will then
float.
Demonstration 3: Specific Gravity
Purpose:
To demonstrate the properties of a material that is lighter than, but insoluble in
water.
CP-4
-------
DRAFT
2.2.2.2 Hazards of Materials Heavier Than Water
If the specific gravity is greater than one, the material will sink in water. This is
true of materials like carbon disulfide, virtually all chlorinated solvents,
chlorinated pesticides and herbicides, and polychlorinated biphenyls.
If the material enters the environment, it will sink in porous material such as soil
or sand, then sink unaffected by water in an aquifer until it reaches a nonporous
surface.
Demonstration 4: Specific Gravity
Purpose:
To demonstrate the properties of a material that is heavier than but insoluble in
water.
3.0 FLAMMABIUTY
3.1 Chemistry Of Fire
In order for a fire to occur a number of well-defined chemical and physical factors
must be present. If any one is missing, combustion cannot take place. These
factors are designated as the "fire pyramid."
CP-5
-------
DRAFT
3.1.1 Fire Pyramid
The fire pyramid is illustrated below.
The symbol demonstrates that fire needs four things to maintain combustion:
1. Fuel (any combustible material)
2. An oxidizer, which need not necessarily be oxygen
3. A source of ignition
4. Reaction intermediates
Take away one leg of the pyramid (one of the necessary factors) and the fire either
will not start or will stop burning.
CP-6
-------
DRAFT
3.1.2 Concentration
Flammable gases and vapors of flammable liquids will ignite in air when exposed to
an ignition source.
However, each substance has a concentration above and below which it will not
burn. The minimum concentration below which a flammable gas or liquid vapor
will not burn, even when exposed to an ignition source, is called the lower explosive
(or flammability) limit (LEL).
The maximum concentration above which a substance will not burn is called the
upper explosive (or flammability) limit.
Continuous monitoring with LEL instrumentation is essential in an environment of
flammable gases or liquid vapors.
3.1.3 Flash Point
Flammable liquids do not burn as a liquid; they give off vapors that only ignite
when a combustible mixture in air has been attained. A flammable liquid may not
give off enough vapors at its ambient temperature to ignite. Some liquids
volatilize at very low temperatures. Other liquids must be heated before a
flammable concentration of vapors can be produced. The minimum temperature
that a liquid must reach to produce an ignitable concentration of vapors is called
the flash point.
Liquids having a flash point below 80 F are considered by the US Department of
Transportation (DOT) to be flammable liquids and must be placarded as such.
Liquids having a flash point greater than 80 F but below 200 F are considered by
the DOT to be combustible and must be placarded as such.
CP-7
-------
DRAFT
3.1.4 Flammable Solids
A flammable solid is one that will ignite through friction or spontaneously by
chemical reaction with moisture or air. The temperature at which a solid begins to
burn is called the ignition or kindling temperature.
An example is white phosphorus, which has an ignition temperature of 86°F. When
placed in an environment in which the temperature exceeds 86°F (such as your
skin) and exposed to air, white phosphorous will ignite and continue to burn.
3.2 Firefighting and Fire Prevention
Firefighting and fire prevention are important considerations in dealing with
hazardous chemicals. The use of improper methods to extinguish a fire could
increase the potential fire hazards.
3.2.1 Classes of Fire
The major consideration in extinguishing any fire is the class of fire (i.e., the type
of fuel or other contributing factors).
Class A—Wood, paper, and cloth (Symbol: /A\ ).
Water can be used to extinguish a Class A fire. Dry powder will also work.
Class B—Flammable liquids and gases (Symbol: | 8 | ).
Water CANNOT be used to extinguish a Class B fire. Water is either
ineffective or will spread the burning liquid and make the fire worse.
Carbon dioxide, dry powder, and, in some cases, foam must be used.
CP-8
-------
DRAFT
Class C—- Fires involving live electrical equipment (Symbol: (CJ ).
Water CANNOT be used to extinguish a Class C fire. Water is either
ineffective or can act as an electric conductor, making the live electrical
fire worse or endangering the life of the firefighter by risking
electrocution. Carbon dioxide or dry powder must be used.
Class D—Fires involving flammable metals (Symbol:'
Water CANNOT be used to extinguish a Class D fire. Water is generally
ineffective or, by reacting with the burning metal, makes the fire worse
by producing the hydrogen gas which ignites. Carbon dioxide and dry
powder are also generally ineffective, as they too react with the burning
metal. Dry salt, graphite, and dry sand are generally used to fight Class
D fires.
3.2.2 Uses and Limitations of Fire Extinguishers
There are three basic types of fire extinguishers in common use today, the carbon
dioxide, the dry powder models, and halon.
3.2.2.1 Carbon Dioxide
This model employs a directed flow of carbon dioxide, which replaces the oxygen in
the fire triangle, thereby extinguishing the fire. It has the advantage of being
rapid and not leaving any residue. However, the lack of residue prevents a carbon
dioxide extinguisher from exerting a long-term effect on the hot embers. There is
nothing to prevent reignition.
3.2.2.2 Dry Powder
The dry powder also eliminates the oxygen supply to the fire. In this case it
eliminates the reaction intermediates. It does leave a messy residue. The residue,
CP-9
-------
DRAFT
however, effectively continues to suffocate the fuel source, thereby lowering the
possibility of reignition.
3.2.2.3 Halon
Halon is a chlorofluoro carbon, chemically very similar to some freon refrigerants.
Although expensive, it combines the best properties of both carbon dioxide and dry
powder. It suffocates the fire, eliminates reaction intermediates, remaining in the
area to prevent re-ignition from smoldering embers, but leaves no residue.
Demonstration 5: Fire Extinction
Purpose:
To demonstrate the use and limitations of a variety of fire extinguishing materials
and techniques.
3.2.3 Spontaneous Combustion
Some combustible materials may undergo autocombustion in the presence of strong
oxidizers.
Demonstration 6: Spontaneous Combustion
Purpose:
To demonstrate the fact that some common oxidizing agents may cause some
common materials to ignite without a source of ignition.
CP-10
-------
DRAFT
4.0 CORROSIVITY
4.1 Characteristics Of Corrosivity
A corrosive material is one that has the ability to
1. Cause deterioration or alteration of metal surfaces.
2. Cause visible destruction or alteration of skin tissue at the point of
contact.
Corrosive materials include acids, alkalis, elemental halogens, and materials that
form acids or alkalis upon hydrolysis.
4.2 Characteristics Of Acids
Acids undergo certain common reactions:
1. React with metals more chemically active than hydrogen to form a salt
and hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is flammable.
HCI + Zn •* ZnCL + H t
(hydrochloric acid + zinc metal •* zinc chloride + hydrogen)
2. React with alkalis to form a salt and water.
Neutralization:
HCI + NaOH -» NaCI + HO
(hydrochloric acid + sodium hydroxide •* sodium chloride + water)
CP-11
-------
DRAFT
3. React with metallic oxides to form a salt and water.
Rust remover:
HCI + Fe203 -- FeClg + H20
(hydrochloric acid + ferric oxide •* ferric chloride + water)
4. React with carbonates to form a salt, water, and carbon dioxide. This is a
handy technique for cleaning up an acid spill.
HCI + Na2C03 - NaCI + H20 + C02 t
(hydrochloric acid + sodium carbonate (or sodium bicarbonate) -*• sodium
chloride + water + carbon dioxide)
Demonstration 8: Corrosivity
Purpose:
To illustrate the general properties of acids.
4.3 Unique Hazards Of Selected Acids
Most individuals respect an acid's ability to produce burns, some of which can be
severe and result in permanent damage. However, acids can be dangerous even if
they don't come in direct contact with an individual. Some examples of this are
1. Sulfuric acid
a. Has vigorous affinity for water.
b. Reacts violently with chlorates, perchlorates, and permanganates.
CP-12
-------
DRAFT
c. Has an exceptionally high boiling point (640 F).
d. Is a strong oxidizing acid.
(Representative dehydration reactions and other hazardous reactions
involving sulfuric acid are listed in Exhibits CP-1 and CP-2,
respectively.)
Demonstration 9: Sulfuric Acid, Dehydrating Effect
Purpose:
To demonstrate the dehydration effects of concentrated sulfuric acid.
2. Nitric acid
a. On produces toxic oxides of nitrogen contact with metals instead of
hydrogen.
b. Is a powerful oxidizer.
c. Causes skin burns on contact.
Demonstration 10: Nitric Acid
Purpose:
To illustrate some unique properties of nitric acid.
3. Hydrofluoric acid
a. Exhibits general properties of acids.
b. Dissolves glass.
CP-13
-------
Reagent
Reaction
Comments
Sugar
(C12H22°11>
C12"22°n
Reaction runs smoothly, hut very
exothermic
O
-o
Cellulose
(wood products)
Concentrated
perchloric acid
Formic acid
Oxalic acid
Ethyl alcohol
(C2H5OH)
KMnO
(C6H10°5>x
2HCIO4 - C\2<07 + H2O
HCOOH -* HO + CO
H2C2°4 ^ H2° + C0 + C02
(T - 150C)
(T = 125 C)
2HMnO
2HMnO4 -» Mn20? * HO
2Mn2O? - 4MnO2 + 3O
Reaction runs smoothly, except for
finely divided materials; very
exothermic
Violent explosion
Reaction runs smoothly, but CO toxic
Reaction runs smoothly, but CO toxic
Reaction runs smoothly, but product
flammable
Reaction runs smoothly, but product
flammable
Violent explosion
d 2
O -1
z o
in TJ
O -
Tl
" 2
o £5
Z 3
O fn
m m
Z m
I
D rS
tn
O
m
30 O
51
o o
O 2
"2Cr2°7 k 2Cf°3 + "2°
Reaction runs smoothly, but very
exothermic
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT CP-2
HAZARDOUS REACTIONS INVOLVING
CONCENTRATED SULFURIC ACID
Reactant
Chemical reaction
Hazardous feature
NaBr
2NaBr
Reaction runs relatively
smoothly, but S0_ and
Br2 toxic
Nal
2Nal
Reaction runs relatively
smoothly, but S0_ and
vapors of L toxic
NaCN
2NaCN
2NaHS04 + CO
Reaction runs relatively
smoothly, but CO
toxic
NaSCN NaSCN + 2H S04 + H_0 * COS +
NaHSO. + NH.HSO,
4 44
Violent explosion; COS
(carbonylsulfide)
extremely toxic and
flammable
NaCI03 3NaCI03 + 3H2S0
HCI04 + 2C!02
* 3NaHS0
Violent explosion; CIO,
unstable and toxic
HI
SHI
Reaction runs relatively
smoothly, but H2S
toxic
CP-15
-------
DRAFT
4.4 Characteristics Of Alkalis (Metal Hydroxides)
Alkalis, although chemically the opposite of acids, produce strikingly similar end
results upon skin contact. Alkalis have the following characteristics:
1. React with acids to produce salt and water.
NaOH + H2S04 ->• Na2$04 + H20
(sodium hydroxide + sulfuric acid > sodium sulfate + water)
2. React with metals (principally aluminum, zinc, and lead) to form salt and
hydrogen.
KOH + Al •* AI(OH)3 + H2 t
(potassium hydroxide + aluminum •* aluminum hydroxide + hydrogen)
3. React with metal salts to form metallic hydroxides
Ca(OH)2 + CuCI2 -» CaCI2 + Cu(OH)2 *
(calcium hydroxide + copper chloride -»• calcium chloride + copper
hydroxide)
t
4. Destroys skin through saponification.
Sodium hydroxide + animal fat (stearic acid) •* yellow soap + water
CP-16
-------
DRAFT
4.5 Characteristics of Halogens
The halogen family consists of fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, and astatine.
These elements exhibit the following properties:
1. Corrosive and poisonous
2. Emit toxic fumes when heated
3. React violently with reducing agents
4. Vapors produce high eye, skin, and respiratory irritation and burning
4.6 Characteristic of Acid Anhydrides
An acid anhydride is an acid with one or more molecules of water removed; for
example, 863 is the anhydride of sulfuric acid (H2S04). Acid anhydrides have the
following characteristics:
1. Corrosive and poisonous
2. Emit toxic fumes when heated
3. React with water to form acids; reaction generates heat
4. Violent reaction usual with most good oxidizers
5.0 REACTIVITY
5.1 Reactivity Of Some Common Elements
Many common elements will react quite violently with other chemicals or when
exposed to certain physical conditions.
1. Oxygen
a. As a gas,
It will greatly increase the flammable potential of other materials.
CP-17
-------
DRAFT
b. As a liquid,
It is cryogenic and can actually freeze living tissue to a point where
the tissue will shatter.
Demonstration 11: Reactivity of Oxygen
Purpose:
To illustrate the reactivity of oxygen rich atmospheres.
2. Halogens
a. As a gas
b. As a liquid
Demonstration 12: Reactivity of Chlorine
Purpose:
To show the ease with which chlorine gas may be generated and to demonstrate its
reactivity.
5.2 Water-reactive Materials
Some materials can react chemically or physically with water.
Water can combine with burning metals to create a fire of greater magnitude.
Water, even moisture in the air, can cause some metals and other substances to
ignite. Substances that spontaneously ignite are called "pyrophoric."
CP-18
-------
DRAFT
The most serious hazard is encountered when water participates in a chemical
reaction. This reaction is called "hydrolysis." Hydrolysis products can be
corrosive, toxic, and flammable.
5.2.1 Alkali Metals: Potassium, Sodium, Lithium
The following demonstrative illustrative this phenomenon:
Demonstration 13: Water Reactives—Sodium
Purpose:
To illustrate the reaction of sodium metal on contact with water.
5.2.2 Other Water-Reactive Metals: Magnesium, Aluminum,
Zirconium, Titanium, Zinc
Other materials such as magnesium, aluminum, zirconium, titanium, and zinc are
also quite reactive in the presence of water.
5.2.3 Water-Reactive Inorganic Chlorides
General characteristics of this class of compounds include the formation of
hydrochloric acid upon hydrolysis. This makes them quite dangerous, since even
perspiration on one's hand can create an acid if one touches these chemicals.
Additionally, if a sealed drum of the material is opened on a rainy or very humid
day, toxic and corrosive hydrochloric acid vapors could be released. The class
includes
1. Aluminum chloride
2. Antimony pentachloride
3. Boron trichloride
4, Phosphorus oxychloride
CP-19
-------
DRAFT
5, Phosphorus pentachloride
6. Phosphorus trichloride
7. Silicon tetrachloride
8. Stannic tetrachloride
9. Titanium tetrachloride
10. Thionyl chloride
Demonstration 14: Water Reactives—Inorganic Chlorides
Purpose:
To illustrate the vigorous generation of hydrogen chloride vapors and hydrochloric
acid when inorganic chlorides come in contact with water.
5.2.4 Other Water Reactives
A variety of other chemicals can react with water to produce toxic by-products or
unstable compounds:
1. Acetyl chloride (and bromide)
2. Phosphorus pentasulfide
3. Chlorosulfonic acid
4. Acetic anhydride
5. Phosphoric anhydride (phosphorus pentoxide)
5.3 Oxidizing Materials
These materials can cause ignition, combustion, or detonation of organic materials,
powdered metals, and other reducing agents. They are used as chlorinating and
bleaching agents, fertilizers, pyrotechnic mixtures, and rocket fuels. Some
common oxidizing agents are:
1. Hypochlorites, chlorates, and perchlorates
CP-20
-------
DRAFT
Demonstration 15: Oxidizers—Chlorates, Perchlorates
Purpose:
To illustrate the effects of oxidizing agents on ordinary organic materials.
2. Nitrates
3. Peroxides
Demonstration 16: Oxidizers — Peroxides
Purpose:
To illustrate the effects of peroxides with ordinary organic materials.
6.0 HAZARD MODIFIERS
Different site activities will alter the degree of risk of exposure to hazardous
materials on a site.
Planned activities
• Recon. Make observations from off site. Minimum risk.
• Initial investigation. Observations and ambient monitoring on site.
• Remedial investigation. Detailed site assessment with minimum
disturbance of material.
• Removal activities. Greatest risk due to disturbance of material.
CP-21
-------
DRAFT
Site information
• Known hazards. Records search, ambient monitoring, chemical analysis
results.
• Unknown hazards. Incomplete information, material inaccessable until
disturbed.
Ambient temperature
• Hot. Contaminants most volatile. Sweating skin more suseptable to
dermal permeation. Greatest risk of heat induced illness. Chemical
hazard tradeoff to level of protection.
• Cold. Contaminants least volatile. Aqueous material may solidify to
form ice. Greatest risk of cold induced injuries. Decontamination with
aqueous solutions most difficult. Beware of using flammable liquid fires
to heat equipment or areas.
Precipitation
• Can mobilize or cause reaction of hazardous materials.
• Physical properties. May change with temperature and precipitation.
- Gas or liquid vapor. Rises or sinks depending on vapor density. Most
difficult to contain. Disperses readily if contained. Highest risk if
contained in vessel or building.
- Liquid. Will sink or float on water depending on specific gravity if -
Insoluble. May dissolve in water or solvents. May react with water or
other materials.
CP-22
-------
DRAFT
- Solid. Easiest to contain. Least degree of risk for exposure. May
mobilize or react on exposure to liquids or gasses.
Chemical properties
• Toxicity. Consider routes of exposure (inhalation, dermal, oral,
subcutaneous), relative toxicity, acute or chronic effects.
• Reactivity. Ability to produce toxic, corrosive, flammable, or explosive
by-products on exposure to other materials including air and water.
• Corrosivity. Ability to alter or destroy metal surfaces or skin tissue at
point of contact.
• Flammability. Ability to produce flammable vapors or gasses upon
reaction or volatilization.
Location of Material
Field
Underground. Limited risk of exposure unless disturbed or exposed by
excavation.
On ground. Can be mobilized or volatilized. Contact and respiratory
exposure risk.
Groundwater. Greatest risk of exposure by ingestion, or contact when
drilling. Material is contained but mobile.
Surface water. Risk of exposure through contact. Volatile hazards if
on surface.
CP-23
-------
DRAFT
• Building (Higher risks of exposure in most cases)
- Condition of building. Consider structural integrety and ventilation.
- Location in building. Consider means of access and egress.
Remember hazards of confined vapors and gasses in basements and
ceilings.
Type of material containment
• Tank. Consider structural integrety, tank open and vented or closed,
possibly under pressure. Tank contents; solid, liquid, gas, or vapor.
• Drum. Structural integrity. Accessability of contents. Physical and
chemical properties of contents. Contents under pressure.
• Lagoon. Multiple hazards and risks.
• Other
7.0 REFERENCES AND INFORMATION RESOURCES
Text references
• Chemistry of Hazardous Materials
• Merck Index
• NIOSH hazardous materials manual
• NIOSH hazardous materials pocket guide
• NIOSH TLV guidelines
• DOT Transportation emergency manual
• OtherOther references and resources
CP-24
-------
DRAFT
• CHEMTREC
• OHMTADS
• NRC
« EPA Regional Offices
• TOXLINE Computer data base
• HAZARDLINE Computer data base
CP-25
-------
-------
DRAFT
SITE OPERATIONS
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 TRAINING SO-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION SO-1
1.1.1 CONTINUING TRAINING SO-2
1.1.2 REFRESHER TRAINING SO-2
1.1.3 SITE-SPECIFIC TRAINING SO-3
2.0 HAZARD EVALUATION SO-3
2.1 SITE CONDITION SO-3
2.2 WASTE TOXICITY AND HAZARD SO-*
2.3 DERMAL PROTECTION SO-6
2.1 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION SO-7
3.0 SITE SAFETY PLAN SO-12
3.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS SO-12
4.0 SITE OPERATIONS SO-13
4.1 TEAM SIZE SO-13
4.1.1 MINIMUM PROTECTION REQUIRED SO-14
4.1.2 AIR-PURIFYING RESPIRATORS/CHEMICAL-
PROTECTIVE COVERALLS SO-14
4.1.3 SUPPLIED-AIR RESPIRATORS/CHEMICAL-PROTECTIVE SUITS SO-14
4.2 TEAM ORGANIZATION SO-14
4.2.1 TEAM LEADER FUNCTION SO-15
4.2.2 SITE SAFETY FUNCTION SO-15
4.2.3 DECONTAMINATION FUNCTION SO-15
4.2.4 RESCUE FUNCTION SO-16
4.2.5 SAMPLERS/FIELD PERSONNEL SO-16
4.3 OPERATIONS SO-16
4.4 DEMOBILIZATION SO-17
4.5 WORK ZONES SO-17
4.5.1 INTRODUCTION SO-17
4.5.2 CONTROL AT THE SITE SO-17
4.5.3 DELINEATION OF WORK ZONES SO-1S
4.5.4 MODIFICATIONS SO-22
4.5.5 AREA DIMENSIONS SO-22
4.5.6 MONITORING AND SAMPLING SO-23
4.5.7 PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION AND MOBILITY SO-23
5.0 WORK PRACTICES SO-25
5.1 PERSONNEL PRACTICES SO-25
5.2 OPERATIONAL PRACTICES SO-27
SO-i
-------
DRAFT
SITE OPERATIONS
CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
SECTION PAGE
6.0 DECONTAMINATION SO-31
6.1 INTRODUCTION SO-31
6.2 PRELIMINARY CONCERNS SO-32
6.2.1 INITIAL PLANNING SO-32
6.2.2 CONTAMINATION REDUCTION CORRIDOR SO-33
6.3 EXTENT OF DECONTAMINATION REQUIRED SO-35
6.3.1 MODIFICATIONS OF INITIAL PLAN SO-35
6.3.2 EFFECTIVENESS OF DECONTAMINATION SO-37
6.3.3 EQUIPMENT SO-37
6.3.* DECONTAMINATION SOLUTION SO-38
6.3.5 ESTABLISHMENT OF PROCEDURES SO-38
6.4 DECONTAMINATION DURING MEDICAL EMERGENCIES SO-38
6.4.1 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS SO-38
6.4.2 PHYSICAL IN3URY SO-39
6.4.3 HEAT STRESS SO-40
6.4.4 CHEMICAL EXPOSURE SO-40
6.5 PROTECTION FOR DECONTAMINATION WORKERS SO-41
6.6 DECONTAMINATION OF EQUIPMENT SO-41
6.6.1 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS SO-41
6.6.2 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES SO-42
6.6.3 PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT SO-43
6.6.4 PERSISTENT CONTAMINATION SO-43
6.6.5 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED MATERIALS SO-43
7.0 FIRST AID
7.1 ASSESSING THE SITUATION SO-44
7.2 VITAL SIGNS SO-45
7.2.1 PULMONARY RESUSCITATION SO-45
7.2.2 CARDIAC COMPRESSION SO-46
7.3 WOUND CARE SO-48
7.3.1 SURFACE WOUNDS SO-48
7.3.2 DEEP WOUNDS AND SERIOUS BURNS SO-49
7.4 BANDAGING SO-49
7.5 REFERENCES SO-49
8.0 EMERGENCY PLANNING SO-51
ATTACHMENT A
ATTACHMENT B
SO-ii
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBITS
NUMBER PAGE
SO-I DIAGRAM OF SITE WORK ZONES SO-22
SO-2 TYPICAL PA/SI DECON LAYOUT SO-34
SO-iii
-------
DRAFT
1.0 TRAINING
1.1 Introduction
Personnel training is performed to ensure employees are
• Aware of the hazards of their jobs and are able to perform their work in
a manner where risk to personal health and safety is reduced to the
greatest extent feasible
• Aware that maximum concern for the health and safety of other
workers, the public, and the environment is given
• Aware of and comply with all laws, rules, and regulations
• Knowledgeable in the tasks they must perform so they react responsibly
and are able to correctly respond to emergency situations
Identifying problems which signal a need for formal training requires careful
investigation of the problem causes. Many times, changes in equipment type or
design, operating procedures, or physical layout are more appropriate solutions.
Symptoms of training problems can include
• High accident rates
• High frequency for particular accident types
• High personnel turnover
• Personnel complaints
• Productivity drop
• Expanded work scope or load
Appearance of any of the above will trigger an investigation into the cause and its
solution.
50-1
-------
DRAFT
Personnel training necessary for personnel involved in remedial response activities
includes several areas:
• Introductory to explain the work needed to fulfill program objectives,
describe the management and reporting system to be used, and provide
technical information and skills needed to perform the work.
• Continuing to introduce new ideas and equipment and to respond to
unexpected situations, and for new employees.
• Refresher to reinforce previous knowledge and skills and to correct
undesired behavior.
• Site specific to cover special problems, procedures, and equipment.
The following subsections describe how the need for training will be identified and
the material covered in each of the three training areas previously described.
1.1.1 Continuing Training
Continuing training is provided to employees through periodic meetings at each
office or specialized courses. Meetings are coordinated and scheduled by the MHS
and provide an opportunity for reviewing problem areas, new ideas, new technol-
ogy, and case histories. Employees are expected to attend as required by their
work needs, they provide an excellent forum for soliciting and developing employee
safety awareness and promoting morale.
1.1.2 Refresher Training
Refresher training is provided to reinforce correct behavior and correct improper
behavior. Refresher training will be provided by periodic refresher courses.
Periodic refresher courses will be scheduled and provided by the MHS. Subjects
will include those covered during the Introductory Training as well as other subject
needs identified during the contract period. Refresher training will be provided as
required to meet regulatory and operational needs.
SO-2
-------
DRAFT
1.1.3 Site-Specific Training
Site-specific training needs are spelled out in each site safety plan. SMs are
responsible for ensuring all site investigation personnel have received the necessary
training. Those who have not must be trained and certified by the MHS prior to
working on the subject site.
2.0 HAZARD EVALUATION
Once the hazards have been identified, they must be ranked in order to determine
action needed to eliminate or minimize the dangers. Hazard evaluation can be
divided into two categories:
• Hazards due to the physical condition of the site
• Hazards due to the toxicity of wastes encountered
2.1 Site Condition
Hazards due to the physical condition and operations on the site will nearly always
be the easiest to discover and eliminate. Examples of these hazards and the
solutions include:
« Open pits guarding with barricades or by filling in
• Unstable material stacks overhead guarding of equipment, protective
clothing for spills, cribbing, or restacking
« Lagoons, ponds, streams protective footwear and clothes, rescue
devices (lifeline).
• Cold, snow, ice - antislip footwear, warm clothing, scheduling of work
and rest periods, extra planning and manpower, and hot meals
3 Heat, humidity extra supervision to ensure protective materials are
worn, scheduling of work and rest periods, and extra planning and
manpower
SO-3
-------
DRAFT
• Contaminated environment - site air, soil, and water analysis for
hazardous materials with use of protective gear for hazardous materials
found
• Confined spaces - air analysis for hazardous materials, oxygen content,
and combustible gas concentrations with use of protective gear for
hazardous materials found, and use of rescue devices and standby
personnel
• Spills - planning, operation procedures use, protective equipment, and
clean up.
« Struck by object - hard hats, safety shoes, body guards, and machine
guards
• Striking against object machine guards, handrails, and proper footwear
and walking surfaces
* Caught in or between - machine guards, training in equipment use, and
movement alarms
Elimination of most of these physical risks is accomplished by appropriate
engineering controls or use of the protective equipment issued to each employee.
Use of powered mechanical equipment is limited to those people specifically
trained and appropriately licensed and only at the direction of the SM.
2.2 Waste Toxicity and Hazard
Hazards due to wastes encountered depend upon their toxicity and the probability
of personnel exposure. Since the toxicity of the materials is uncontrollable, the
probability of exposure must be minimized. Categories of personnel protection
required depend on the degree of hazard and probability of exposure by a route of
entry into the body.
-------
DRAFT
Toxicity is related to the amount of material needed to produce an effect on the
health or behavior related to the person exposed. Toxicity can be scaled using
several rating systems including TLVs, PELs, and the dose (LD50 for nquids or
solids) or concentration (LCjrj for gases) needed to kill one-half of a group of test
animals.
The degree of hazard integrates toxicity and probability of exposure. For example,
walking by a sealed drum of highly toxic material several times is less hazardous
than drinking a lethal dose of a relatively harmless material. Exposure to toxic
materials can occur by inhalation, absorption, ingestion, and injection.
Inhalation is the most probable method of exposure to toxic materials at hazardous
waste sites. Protection ranges from pressure demand, self-contained breathing
apparatus (PD-SCBA) to air-purifying dust respirators. Skin and eye absorption is
next most probable because of material handling or contact with contaminated
protective equipment. Use of suitable protective garments, eye and face protec-
tion, and personal hygiene is required. Ingestion can occur when sanitation and
personal hygiene are neglected or when food or drink are contaminated by toxic
materials. Cleaning of all equipment and personnel, segregation and proper
disposal of contaminated materials, and banishment of food and beverages from the
waste site are required here. Injection of toxic materials is possible when protec-
tive coverings and the body are pierced by a contaminated material. Examples
include cuts from contaminated sharp metal, broken glass, and nails. Care must be
taken to eliminate or guard against this exposure. All injuries must be treated by a
person trained in first aid and reported to the SM to allow evaluation of possible
exposure, determination of additional treatment, and to help reduce similar future
exposures.
2.3 Dermal Protection
Prior to on-site arrival, adequate personal protective equipment must be selected
by the team leader for conducting field inspections and operations. For adequate
protection against possible exposure to hazardous materials, the team leader must
have available protective clothing, respiratory protection, and first aid equipment.
In selecting this equipment, the following basic decision process should be used:
SO-5
-------
DRAFT
-------
DRAFT
It should be recognized that no one type of encapuiated suit or protective clothing
will be adequate for all possible uses because of the permeability factors of the
materials used. Several suits are available on the market today. These different
suits are made of nitrile rubber, neoprene rubber, PVC-coated nylon, polyurethane-
coated nylon, CPE, and butyl rubber.
Both disposable clothing and reuseable clothing are available. Each has advantages
and disadvantages. Presently available disposable clothing is more easily torn than
reuseable clothing and disposable shoe covers are of limited value on rough ground
or in walking through snagging objects. Reuseable clothing is tougher but must be
decontaminated after use.
2.tt Respiratory Protection
OSHA's General Industry Standards, 29 CFR 1910.134, state that respirators shall
be selected on the basis of the hazards to which workers are exposed and that ANSI
Z88.2 shall be used for guidance in their selection. OSHA also requires that
approved or accepted respirators may be used when available based upon 30 CFR
11, 14, and 14a. Selection of respiratory equipment for use in hazardous waste
disposal site operations must be guided by considerations of risk to life and health,
the nature of the equipment available, and relative comfort and ease with which
work may be performed while protected.
Selection of the proper type of respirators for use in on-site activities shall be
based upon the following criteria:
• The type of respiratory hazards, including physical properties, physiolo-
gical effects on the body, concentrations of toxic material or airborne
radioactivity level, established permissable time-weighted average for
toxic materials and oxygen levels
• The location of the hazardous area in relation to the nearest area having
acceptable respirable air
*r
9 The period of time for which respiratory protection must be provided
SO-7
-------
DRAFT
• The anticipated work loads of field personnel
• The physical characteristics and functional capabilities and limitations
of the various types of respirators
In order to select the appropriate minimum level of respiratory protection,
quantitative data on air quality must be available. In many instances during the
initial entry into hazardous waste sites, potential respiratory hazards have not been
quantified. It must then be assumed that the unknown atmosphere is immediately
dangerous to life and health and oxygen deficient. In many cases, other agencies
will have previously entered the hazardous waste site, and the level of respiratory
protection may be modified in light of previous experience.
OSHA, in the latter situation, requires that positive pressure self-contained
breathing apparatus must be used, per 29 CFR 1910.134 and ANSI Z-88.2 (Revised).
Therefore, when personnel enter a hazardous waste site with unknown air contami-
nation, they must use PD-SCBA. Only National Institute of Occupational Safety
and Health/Mine Safety and Health Administration-approved, PD-SCBA are
acceptable.
There are cases where the site entry team will visit a hazardous waste site when
the concentration of oxygen and contaminants are known, based upon adequate
sampling and analysis procedures. In these situations, the OSHA regulations and
ANSI Z-88.2 (Revised) guidelines prescribe specifically allowable respiratory
protection as follows:
• Atmospheres which are oxygen deficient (less than 19.5 percent 62)
In these atmospheres, OSHA requires that respirators which provide an independent
sources of respirable air must be used; i. e., PD-SCBAs.
• Atmospheres which are "Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health"
(IDLH)
-------
DRAFT
In atmospheres encountered that contain adequate oxygen but are immediately
dangerous to life and health as defined in ANSI Z-88.2 because of the presence of
toxic contaminants, only respirators which provide an independent source of
respirable air under positive pressure may be used. If adequate sample analyses
demonstrate that IDLH conditions exist at a site, the entry team should withdraw
from the area and notify EPA, state and local authorities.
• Atmospheres which are not immediately dangerous to life and health.
If atmospheres contain adequate oxygen (above 19.5 percent) and contain only
contaminants with good warning properties (taste, smell, irritation) and are not
immediately dangerous to life and health because of the presence of toxic
contaminants, air-purifying respirators can be used.
Air-purifying respirators operate by drawing air through canister or cartridge filter
medias designed to remove particulates, vapors and gases, radionuclides or
combinations of particulate/gas/vapor. Only approved NIOSH/MSHA cartridges
can be used in these respirators and only filters specifically provided for an
individual manufacturer's air-purifying respirator. NIOSH/MSHA approved air-
purifying respirators are manufactured in several mask models. Advantages and
disadvantages deal primarily with degree of fit, comfort, and the need for eye
protection.
In atmospheres where air-purifying respirators are used and the possibility of
increased concentration of toxic substances exists, OSHA requires that an
emergency escape mask be provided for all field personnel. Thus, when air-
purifying respirators are used for entry into hazardous waste sites, NIOSH/MSHA
approved emergency escape masks may also need to be carried.
OSHA also requires that each person using an air-purifying respirator undergo a fit
test using the particular device selected. Because of the wide variety of facial
characteristics of field personnel and the wide array of respirator manufacturers,
no mask shall be issued to field personnel until a proper fit test of the individual to
the specific device is made. Field personnel must feel comfortable with the
SO-9
-------
DRAFT
device. A qualitative fit test should be conducted using isoamyl acetate first and
then irritant smoke (stannic chloride) while wearing the selected model.
Only NIOSH/MSHA approved cartridges for the selected mask and model can be
used. The canister types include particulate filters, vapor or gas removing filters,
radionuclide filters, combination particulate/gas/vapor and radionuclide filters, and
high efficiency filters.
Remember that when the encountered contaminants do not possess good warning
properties, only PD-SCBAs shall be used.
• Phase - may be hard to handle due to the physical state of material
a Vapor pressure may be fire hazards, explosion hazard, or suffocation
hazard by displacing air
* Vapor density - may be fire hazard and suffocation hazard if material
displaces oxygen
9 Solubility in various materials may dissolve protective equipment or
container
* Melting point - may become in.liquid during handling, causing a spill or
exposure
• Boiling point may boil at ambient temperatures releasing toxic gas
vapor
• Reactivity may generate heat or toxic gases
« Radioactivity may injure upon exposure
9 Flash point may be fire and explosive hazard
SO-10
-------
DRAFT
Not all of these properties will be important for each waste encountered. The
point is to recognize which properties are important for each waste encountered
and then to control the hazards associated with those properties. Most commonly,
concern is given to a material's fire and explosion potential and its reactivity.
Flammable liquids are classified by flash point (fp). Flash point is the temperature
at which a sufficient amount of vapor is produced by a burnable liquid so that an
ignition source (spark or flame) will cause a fire to start. Liquids are classified as
either flammable (fp < 37.8°C) or combustible (fp > 37.8°C). Some materials (liquid
or solid) will also spontaneously start burning at elevated temperatures. These are
called auto-ignitable materials. Fires are controlled and extinguished by elimi-
nating any one of the four requirements needed for fire: heat, fuel, reaction, or
oxygen. Fire extinguishers eliminate either the heat (water) or the reaction (dry
chemical). One reminder is to be aware of the reactivity of the extinguishing
material used on fire, especially when using water to extinguish the fire. Many
materials react with water causing a more serious problem. Water may also
dissolve the hazardous material creating a toxic effluent which is more hazardous
than the fire and associated air pollution.
Reactivity of waste materials is also important when sampling or handling
materials. Care must be taken to be sure materials cannot react with sample or
analysis gear, personnel protective equipment, air, or body tissue.
3.0 SITE SAFETY PLAN
A site safety plan must be prepared by experienced personnel for each event
involving hazardous substances. For remedial action at abandoned hazardous waste
sites, safety plans can be developed simultaneously with general operation plans
and implemented when remedial actions begin. Emergency situations may require
verbal safety instructions and the use of standard operating safety procedures until
specific safety protocols can be written. For any incident, the plan must include
health and safety considerations for all activities required at the scene. The safety
plan must be periodically reviewed during extended field operations to keep it
current and technically correct.
SO-11
-------
DRAFT
All team members should be thoroughly trained in the preparation and use of safety
plans. The SM will assemble the known facts concerning the site and will prepare a
preliminary plan. The preliminary plan will be reviewed by health and safety staff.
The final site safety plan will be generated at this review.
3.1 Minimum Requirements
As a minimum, the site safety plan must—
1. Evaluate the risks associated with the incident and with each operation
conducted.
2. Identify key personnel and alternates responsible for both site safety and
response operations.
3. Address the levels of protective equipment to be worn by personnel
during various site operations.
4. Designate work areas (exclusion zone, contamination reduction zone, and
support zone), boundaries, size of zones, distance between zones, and
access control points into each zone.
5. Establish decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment.
6. Determine the number of personnel and equipment needed in the work
zones during initial entries and/or subsequent operations.
7. Establish site emergency procedures—for example, escape routes, signals
for evacuating work parties, emergency communications (internal and
external), and procedures for fire and/or explosions.
8. Implement a program and make arrangements with the nearest medical
facility (and medical life squad unit) for emergency medical care for
routine injuries and toxicological problems.
50-12
-------
DRAFT
9. Train personnel for any nonroutine site activities.
10. Consider weather and other conditions which may affect the health and
safety of personnel during site operations.
11. Implement control procedures to prevent access to the site by unautho-
rized personnel.
Included at the end of Tab 9 is Attachment A "Appendix M - Site Safety Plan Gui-
dance", which provides EPA's internal requirements for Health and Safety Plans.
4.0 SITE OPERATIONS
Operating at a hazardous waste site requires a coordinated move of equipment and
personnel during startup, a regular flow of supplies and supporting personnel during
operation, and demobilization of all operations after job is finished. Preplanning
for mobilizing people and equipment is essential to rapid, trouble-free site setup.
Maintaining equipment between operating periods is key to preventing problems
when equipment is needed.
A SM will be designated prior to work on any site project. The SM is responsible
for all aspects of work at the site and will report to the Project Manager. Several
items which require the SMs attention during project startup include:
9 Site assessment
* Work plan preparation
• Site personnel selection
* Necessary equipment to site
« Procuring site utilities
4.1 Team Size
The team size is determined by the amount and nature of the work required and by
the gear needed to protect against site hazards. Since the amount and nature of
the work for every project cannot be determined here, this section will dwell on
minimum team sizes based on hazard protection requirements.
SO-13
-------
DRAFT
4.1.1 Minimum Protection Required
Where no chemical hazards nor any extraordinary physical hazards exist, a team of
two people is required. All work activities are performed using the "buddy system"
and visual and verbal contract must be maintained. Minimal decontamination is
necessary with water washing of shoes and washing of hands and face most
common. Each team member helps the other remove protective gear, decontami-
nate and clean equipment. Initial PA/SI activities are often done at this team size.
4.1.2 Air-Purifying Respirator/Chemical-Protective Coveralls
Use of air-purifying respirators or chemical protective coveralls implies the
presence of a toxic chemical hazard. A team of two is still possible if the use of
this protective gear is only precaution. But, if analysis and TLV/PEL data shows
the definite need for this protection, a team of three is required. The third person
serves the safety/rescue/decontamination functions and has supplied-air respirators
(PD-SCBA) on stand-by. This team size is common at sites of known hazard and
during sampling of known contaminated areas.
4.1.3 Supplied-Air Respirator/Chemical-Protective Suits
Three persons are required for a these types of operations, including two persons
downrange and a third person, dressed at the same level of protection as the down-
range people, filling the functions of safety, decontamination and emergency
rescue. It is preferable to have a fourth person in the clean area to act as the
safety person while the third person serves as the decontamination/emergency
rescue person. A three-person team is sufficient only for the simplest of supplied-
air respirator operations.
4.2 Team Or Ran ization
The downrange work party always consists of a minimum of two people. One of the
two always functions as the team leader. The team leader may also have other
functions. The other team member serves as one or a combination of the following
SO-14
-------
DRAFT
functions. When a two-person team is used, it is important that the two peopie
chosen are of equivalent size and weight so one could evacuate the other in case of
an emergency.
*.2.1 Team Leader Function
The team leader maintains all administration responsibility for the site. The team
leader is responsible for all decisions concerning site activities and works with the
team safety officer to maintain safe working conditions.
*.2.2 Site Safety Function
The site safety officer usually remains at the decontamination area in order to
monitor all downrange operations. Downrange personnel are either in the safety
person's line of sight or other individuals are located between the safety person and
the downrange personnel in order to maintain an unbroken, person-to-person line of
sight. The specific responsibilities of the site safety officer are as follows:
1. Monitors the work time and physical condition of all personnel.
2. Makes all decisions concerning protective equipment and monitors all
activities to remove personnel from any unsafe work conditions or unsafe
work acts.
If the site safety officer goes downrange to observe work practices, he is replaced
at the decontamination area by the site leader, who assumes the safety officer's
responsibilities and emergency action authority.
4.2.3 Decontamination Function
This individual is responsible for organizing decontamination stations, assisting/
supervising all decontamination operators, disassembling the decontamination
stations, and disposing of all contaminated liquids and solids.
50-15
-------
DRAFT
*.2.4 Rescue Function
This person is outfitted at the highest level of protection being used by the field
team. The rescue person remains at the decontamination line and goes downrange
only to assist with emergency evacuations. On small teams, the rescue and
decontamination tasks can be handled by a single individual.
*f.2.5 Samplers/Field Personnel Function
These are the individuals who complete all downrange operations. On large teams,
the field personnel who are not currently downrange can assist with decontamina-
tion or command post operations.
*.3 Operations
Site operations will be conducted according to the approved work plan. SMs are
responsible for implementation of the work plan. Site operations depend on the
personnel working on the site, support from base personnel, and equipment
operation.
SMs are responsible for procuring and maintaining these requirements. Base
personnel provide the backup, expertise, supplies, and funds needed by site
personnel. Base support functions will be written into the work plan. SMs will
advise the Project Manager regarding additional support or materials needed after
site operations commence.
The SM must ensure that all employees have received their initial and site-specific
training, know the tasks to be performed, and are medically qualified to perform
the tasks. A record of personnel assigned to each site and their tasks must be kept
in the plans for each site investigation.
SMs must provide adequate verbal site operation reports to the Project Manager,
Management personnel will audit site operations, safety, quality assurance, and
progress on a periodic basis using both announced and surprise visits.
SO-16
-------
DRAFT
it.it Demobilization
SMs must give as much attention to leaving a site at end of project as to arriving
at a site. Time and effort to properly clean equipment, perform maintenance
necessary for storage, and leave the site neat and clean will be rewarded through
increased equipment reliability, extended equipment life, and community and client
or owner goodwill. Operating personnel must be advised of the importance of
demobilizing to counteract the natural tendency to slacken their enthusiasm and
productivity after the actual site work is finished.
*f.5 Work Zones
^.5.1 Introduction
The activities required during responses to environmental incidents involving
hazardous substances may contribute to the movement of materials (contaminants)
from the site to unaffected areas. Equipment used around the substances and
response personnel working around these substances, may become contaminated
and carry the material into clean areas. Material may become airborne because of
its volatility, or the disturbance of contaminated soil may cause it to become wind
blown. To minimize the transfer of hazardous substance(s) from the site, due to
site activities, contamination control procedures are needed. Two general methods
are used, establishing site work zones and removing contaminants from people and
equipment.
tt.5.2 Control at the Site
A site must be controlled to reduce the possibility of (1) exposure to any
contaminants present and (2) their transport by personnel or equipment from the
site. The possibility of exposure or translocation of substances can be reduced or
eliminated in a number of ways, including—
1. Setting up security and physical barriers to exclude unnecessary person-
nel from the general area.
SO-17
-------
DRAFT
2. Minimizing the number of personnel and equipment at the site consistent
with effective operations.
3. Establishing work zones within the site.
^. Establishing control points to regulate access to work zones.
5. Conducting operations in a manner to reduce the exposure of personnel
and equipment and to eliminate the potential for airborne dispersion.
6. Implementing appropriate decontamination procedures.
4.5.3 Delineation of Work Zones
One method of preventing or reducing the migration of contamination is to
delineate zones on the site where prescribed operations occur. Movement of
personnel and equipment between zones and onto the site itself is then limited by
access control points. By these means, contamination would be expected to be
contained within certain relatively small areas on the site and its potential for
spread minimized. Three contiguous zones (Exhibit SO-1) are often used.
Zone 1: Exclusion Zone
Zone 2: Contamination Reduction Zone
Zone 3: Support Zone
4.5.3.1 Zone 1; Exclusion Zone
The Exclusion Zone, the innermost of three concentric areas, is the zone where
contamination does or could occur. All people entering the Exclusion Zone must
wear prescribed levels of protection gear. An entry and exit checkpoint must be
established at the periphery of the Exclusion Zone to regulate the flow of personnel
and equipment into and out of the zone to /erify that the procedures established to
enter and exit are followed.
SO-13
-------
DRAFT
The outer boundary of Zone 1, the Hotline, is initially established by visually
surveying the immediate environs of the incident and determining where the
hazardous substances involved are located; where any drainage, leachate, or spilled
material is; and whether any discolorations are visible. Guidance in determining
the boundaries is also provided by data from the initial site survey indicating the
presence of organic or inorganic vapors/gases or particulates in the air, combusti-
ble gases, and radiation, or the results of water and soil sampling.
Additional factors that should be considered include the distances needed to
prevent fire or an explosion from affecting personnel outside the zone, the physical
area necessary to conduct site operations, and the potential for contaminants to be
blown from the area. Once the Hotline has been determined, it should be
physically secured, fenced, or well-defined by landmarks. During subsequent site
operations, the boundary may be modified and adjusted as more information
becomes available.
All personnel within the Exclusion Zone must wear the required level of protective
gear. Personnel protective equipment is designated on the basis of site-specific
conditions, including the type of work to be done and the hazards that might be
encountered. Different levels of protection in the Exclusion Zone might also be
designated by job assignment. The assignment, when appropriate, of different
levels of protection within the Exclusion Zone generally makes for a more flexible,
effective, and less costly operation, while still maintaining a high degree of safety.
4.5.3.2 Zone 2: Contamination Reduction Zone
Between the Exclusion Zone and the Support Zone is the Contamination Reduction
Zone, which provides a transition between contaminated and clean zones. Zone 2
serves as a buffer to further reduce the probability of the clean zone becoming
contaminated or being affected by other existing hazards. It provides additional
assurance that the physical transfer of contaminating substances on people,
equipment, or in the air is limited through a combination of decontamination,
distance between the Exclusion and Support Zones, air dilution, zone restrictions,
and work functions.
SO-19
-------
DRAFT
Initially, the Contamination Reduction Zone is considered to be a noncontaminated
area. At the boundary between the Exclusion and Contamination Reduction Zones,
decontamination stations are established for personnel and for heavy equipment.
Exit from the Exclusion Zone is through a decontamination station.
As operations proceed, the area around the decontamination station may become
contaminated, but to a much lesser degree than the Exclusion Zone. On a relative
basis, the amount of contaminants should decrease from the Hotline to the Support
Zone due to the distance involved and the decontamination procedures used.
The boundary between the Support Zone and the Contamination Reduction Zone,
called the Contamination Control Line, separates the possibly low contamination
area from the clean Support Zone. Access to the Contamination Reduction Zone
from the Support Zone is through a control point. Personnel entering there wear
the prescribed personnel protective equipment, if required, for working in the
Contamination Reduction Zone. Entering the Support Zone requires cleaning or
removal of any protective equipment worn in the Contamination Reduction Zone.
4.5.3.3 Zone 3; Support Zone
The Support Zone, the outermost part of the site, is considered to be a non-
contaminated or clean area. Support equipment (command post, equipment,
vehicles, etc.) is located in the zone; traffic is restricted to authorized response
personnel. Since normal work clothes are appropriate within this zone, potentially
contaminated personnel clothing, equipment, and samples are not permitted but are
left in the Contamination Reduction Zone until they are decontaminated.
SO-20
-------
EXHIBIT SO-1
Diagram of Site Work Zones
DRAFT
Exclusion
Zone
Hoi Line
N
Access Control
Points
Contamination
Reduction
Corridor
Contamination
Reduction Zone
\
\
— Wind Direction
Contamination
Control Une
Command
Post
Support
Zone
SO-21
-------
DRAFT
4.5.4 Modifications
The use of a three-zone system, access control points, and exacting decontamina-
tion procedures provides a reasonable assurance against the translocation of
contaminating substances. This site control system is based on a "worst-case"
situation. Less stringent site control and decontamination procedures may be used
if more definitive information is available on the types of substances involved and
the hazards they present. This information can be obtained through air monitoring,
instrument survey and sampling, and technical data concerning the characteristics
and behavior of the material present.
4.5.5 Area Dimensions
The distance between the Hotline, Contamination Control Line, and command post
and the size and shape of each zone have to be based on conditions specific to each
site. Considerable judgment is needed to ensure that the distances between zone
boundaries are large enough to allow room for the necessary operations, provide
adequate distances to prevent the spread of contaminants, and eliminate the
possibility of injury due to explosion or fire. Long-term operations would involve
developing reasonable methods to determine if material is being transferred
between zones and to assist in modifying site boundaries.
The following criteria should be considered in establishing area dimensions and
boundary distances:
1. Physical and topographical features of the site.
2. Weather conditions.
3. Field/laboratory measurements of air contaminants and environmental
samples.
4. Air dispersion calculations.
5. Potential for explosion and flying debris.
SO-22
-------
DRAFT
6. Physical, chemical, toxicological, and other characteristics of the
substances present.
7. Cleanup activities required.
8. Potential for fire.
9. Area needed to conduct operations.
10. Decontamination procedures.
11. Dimensions of contaminated area.
12. Potential for exposure.
4.5.6 Monitoring and Sampling
To verify that site control procedures are preventing the spread of contamination,
a monitoring and sampling program should be established. The Support Zone should
be periodically monitored for air contaminants using direct-reading instruments
and/or collecting air samples for particulate, gas, or vapor analysis. Analysis of
soil samples collected in the most heavily traveled area would indicate contami-
nants being carried from the Exclusion Zone by personnel, equipment, or wind.
Occasional swipe tests should be taken in trailers and other areas by personnel.
These same types of samples should be collected and air monitored in the
Contamination Reduction Zone. Increased concentrations in air or other environ-
mental media may indicate a breakdown in control over the Contamination
Reduction Corridor, ineffective decontamination procedures, or failure to restrict
site access.
4.5.7 Personnel Identification and Mobility
Identification of an individual dressed in protective clothing is difficult. The more
protective clothing worn, the more difficult it is to identify individual work party
50-23
-------
DRAFT
members. Positive identification of entry party members is essential for control
and safety. Individuals can be identified by:
1. Marking with colored tape.
2. Writing name with felt tip marker on masking tape.
3. Writing name on hard hat.
-------
DRAFT
3. Wearing of protective equipment will require:
a. More time than is usually required to do a task.
b. More people than are usually required to do a task.
5.0 WORK PRACTICES
The work practices specified in this section must be used by all investigators.
5.1 Personnel Practices
• Protective Clothing - Protective clothing must be worn by all personnel
while working an areas of suspected or confirmed dermal hazard unless
sufficient data has been acquired to enable the SM to make an informed
judgment that protective clothing is not needed. In the absence of clear
indications that work can proceed safely without protective clothing,
required items include chemical-resistant pants, jacket, boots, gloves,
and hardhat or head cover, and may include a fully encapsulating
chemical protective suite. SMs must also consider the potential hazards
of wearing protective clothing since protective clothing is cumbersome,
hastens the onset of fatigue, increases heat stress, and increases the
time the personnel must spend in the high-risk area.
* Heat Stress Employees must compensate for the increased heat stress
caused by wearing protective clothing in hot weather in order to prevent
the onset of heat-induced illnesses. Employees must maintain an
appropriate work-rest regimen and water and salt balances.
« Eye Protection - Devices to provide appropriate eye protection must be
worn on any task where the danger of eye injury exists and should meet
ANSI Z87.1, "Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face
Protection."
50-25
-------
DRAFT
• Forbidden Practices - The following practices are expressly forbidden
during field operations:
Eating, drinking, chewing gum or tobacco, smoking, or any practice
that increases that probability of hand-to-mouth transfer and inges-
tion of material is prohibited in any area designated contaminated.
Ignition of flammable liquids within, on, or through improvised
heating devices (barrels, etc.) or space heaters.
Approach or entry into areas or spaces where toxic or explosive
concentrations of gases or dust may exist without proper equipment
available to enable safe entry.
Medicine and alcohol can potentiate the effects from exposure to
toxic chemicals. Prescribed drugs should not be taken by personnel
on response operations if there is a likelihood of such potentiation.
Conduct of on-site operations without off-site backup personnel.
Site Managers may exercise informed judgment regarding the need
for off-site backup at active sites, or in cases where sites have been
repeatedly entered or occupied without apparent harm. In any case
where doubt exists, backup personnel must be present.
• Personal Hygiene All personnel must wash the affected area immedi-
ately after obvious contact with a hazardous substance, report incident
to SM, and seek appropriate medical care or testing.
• Personnel and equipment in the contaminated area should be minimized,
consistent with effective site operations.
* Whenever decontamination procedures for outer garments are in effect,
the entire body should be thoroughly washed as soon as possible after the
protective garment is removed.
50-26
-------
DRAFT
• No excessive facial hair, which interferes with a satisfactory fit of the
mask-to-face seal, is allowed on personnel required to wear respiratory
protective equipment.
« Contact with contaminated surfaces or with surfaces suspected of being
contaminated should be avoided. Whenever possible, one should not walk
through puddles, mud, and other discolored surfaces; kneel on ground;
lean, sit, or place equipment on drums, containers, vehicles, or the
ground.
5.2 Operational Practices
• Information Review and Reconnaissance - The Safety Plan for a field
investigation must be based upon a thorough evaluation of existing data
and review of follow-up reports from previous investigations. The
information search may indicate possible chemical hazards such as the
presence of incompatible chemicals, toxic gases, explosives, etc. Such
indications may provide insight to specific safety precautions needed.
Similarly, a perimeter inspection or aerial imagery, followed by an on-
site reconnaissance, may reveal safety hazards requiring special atten-
tion.
Investigators and response personnel will normally become better able to
specify appropriate safety precautions as they get progressively closer
to, and measure, hazardous materials in air, runoff, ground water, soil,
spilled material, barrels, etc.
» Protection Levels - Although the SM must determine the level of protec-
tion which is appropriate for each task, four specific protection levels
have been provided as benchmarks for the SM. The SM must select a
level based on available information.
SO-27
-------
DRAFT
t» Zones - Zones must be established, clearly delineated, and posted:
Decontamination Zone - During operations on a suspect or known
HWS, a zone must be established for decontamination of equipment
and personnel and access control just outside the area of suspected
contamination.
Contamination Zone(s) - The area(s) which contains, or is suspected
of containing, hazardous materials must be clearly delineated and
posted. The SM may establish more than one contamination zone
for areas of different levels of potential personnel hazard. Only
persons authorized by the SM may enter a contamination zone.
• Radioactivity and Explosivity - All HWSs must be checked for radio-
activity and explosivity during first entry onto the site. Normal back-
ground radioactivity is approximately 0.01 to 0.02 mR/hr. Detecting
levels of activity significantly greater than normal background is cause
for a careful survey of the entire site; if levels above two mR/hr are
encountered, the advice of a competent radiation health physicist should
be sought before continuing operations on the site. (EPA's Office of Air,
Noise, and Radiation has radiation specialists in each EPA office as well
as staff at HQ, EER-Montgomery, and ORD Las Vegas.
If explosivity readings less than 10 percent Lower Explosive Limit (LED
of methane are detected, continue surveys of the area. Ambient readings
approaching or exceeding 10 percent LEL are cause for immediately
withdrawing personnel and notifying the emergency, fire, and explosion
units. The SM must be consulted before continuing operations.
• Buddy System A minimum of two employees, in constant communica-
tion (either visual with flags or hand signals or voice via radio or normal
voice) with each other, are required to perform any work in contamina-
tion zones. Appropriate emergency planning and work communications
are needed to keep site personei in touch with each other.
SO-2S
-------
DRAFT
• Sampling Procedures - Sampling procedures must minimize the risk of
personnel exposure to hazardous materials during sampling, packaging,
shipping, and analysis; and minimize the risk of exposure of others to
spilled or residual waste materials. As a general rule, sampling equip-
ment used on an HWS should be disposable. Sampling instruments and
other nondisposable equipment should be kept clean with disposable
protective covers. Dippers, scoops, and similar devices for solid samples
should be placed in plastic bags for disposal or later decontamination.
Liquid samples from barrels or tanks should be withdrawn in inert tubing,
such as glass, and tubing should then be broken and abandoned within the
barrel or tank. If incineration or recycling of contents is contemplated,
the tubing may be diposed of in other suitable containers. Whenever
possible, equipment should be decontaminated prior to leaving the work
area. Equipment which cannot be decontaminated at the scene must be
double-bagged and transported to another area for eventual decontami-
nation. Where possible, verify completeness of decontamination with
sniffers, swipe tests, or other appropriate tests.
• Sample Handling - Samples of runoff, ambient air, or ground water may
be moved directly into laboratories and handled with normal safety
precautions, unless the SM determines that special handling is appropri-
ate. However, samples of liquids or solid materials removed from
containers or obviously contaminated spill areas must be assumed to be
hazardous materials and handled accordingly. Hazardous materials must
be packaged to withstand shocks, pressure changes, and any other
conditions which might cause leakage of contents incident to ordinary
handling during transportation. Shipments of hazardous materials must
be in accordance with DOT regulations.
• Respirator Program - A respirator use program must be provided for
investigators and personnel who enter areas where a potential for inhala-
tion exposure to a hazardous material is present. This program will meet
the requirements of the OSHA General Industry Standards for respiratory
protection as detailed in 29 CFR 1919.134. The respirators must be
certified in accordance with the requirements of the National Institute
SO-29
-------
DRAFT
for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under the provisions of 30
CFR 11. The selection and use of respirators must be approved by the
Site Safety Officer.
Cartridge or emergency escape respirators must be carried on-site when
the SM judges that, although the risk is very low, hazardous materials
may become present in the air during operations. The respirators must
be donned immediately upon experiencing any of the warning properties
described immediately above. The user must leave the site immediately
after donning an escape respirator or if the warning properties persist
after donning a cartridge respirator.
Leaving the Site - Procedures for leaving the suspect contaminated area
must be planned before entry. Provision must be made for: decontami-
nation and safe packaging of protective clothing; disposal or packaging
of disposable gear; handling of samples and preparation of samples for
shipment; transfer of equipment, gear, and samples from the contami-
nated area to the clean area; etc. Sequences will depend on several
variables—such as SCBA inside or outside of protective clothing--but
must be worked out in advance.
Monitoring Equipment - For immediate evaluation of potential health
hazards, use direct reading instruments such as portable combustible gas
and oxygen meters, photoionization meters, gas chromatographs, infra-
red spectrometers, radiation survey meters, and colorimetric detector
tubes. The SM must be aware of the limitation of these portable direct
reading instruments when characterizing the unknown chemicals at
unknown concentrations at work areas.
Decontamination - Procedures, equipment, and supplies for decontamina-
tion must be available on-site. The equipment and supplies must allow
employees to wash exposed areas of their bodies as well as equipment or
other items which have been in the contamination zone, and collect the
washwater and other contaminated materials for disposal. The equip-
ment must include at least an emergency eye wash and may include a
personnel shower.
SO-30
-------
DRAFT
6.0 DECONTAMINATION
6.1 Introduction
Personnel responding to hazardous-substance incidents may become contaminated
in a number of ways:
1. Contacting vapors, gases, mists, or particulates in the air
2. Being splashed by materials while sampling or opening containers
3. Walking through puddles of liquids or on contaminated soil
>4. Using contaminated instruments or equipment
Protective clothing and respirators help prevent the wearer from becoming
contaminated or inhaling contaminants, while good work practices help reduce the
contamination of protective clothing, instruments, and equipment.
Even with these safeguards, contamination may occur. Harmful materials can be
transferred into clean areas, exposing unprotected personnel. In removing con-
taminated clothing, personnel may come into contact with and/or inhale the
contaminants. To prevent such occurrences, contamination reduction and decon-
tamination procedures must be developed and implemented. Such procedures must
be in place before anyone enters a site and they must continue (modified as
necessary) throughout the period of site operation.
Decontamination involves physically removing contaminants and/or converting
them chemically into innocuous substances. How extensive decontamination must
be depends on a number of factors, the most important being the types of
contaminants involved. The more harmful the contaminant, the more extensive
and thorough decontamination must be. Less harmful contaminants may require
less decontamination. Combining decontamination, the correct doffing of protec-
tive equipment, and the zoning of site work areas minimizes cross-contamination
from protective clothing to wearer, equipment to personnel, and one area to
another. Only general guidance can be given on methods and techniques for
decontamination. The exact procedure is determined by evaluating factors specific
to the incident.
SO-31
-------
DRAFT
6.2 Preliminary Concerns
6.2.1 Initial Planning
The initial decontamination plan is based on the assumption that all personnel and
equipment leaving the Exclusion Zone (area of potential contamination) are grossly
contaminated. The plan includes a system for washing and rinsing, at least once,
all the protective equipment worn. The washing and rinsing are done in combina-
tion with a sequential doffing of equipment, starting with the most heavily
contaminated article and progressing to the the least contaminated article.
The spread of contaminants during the washing and doffing process is further
reduced by separating each decontamination step from the previous one. Ideally,
contamination should decrease as a person moves from one step to another along
the line.
While planning site operations, methods must be developed and used to prevent the
contamination of people and equipment. For example, using remote sampling
techniques, opening containers by nonmanual means, bagging monitoring instru-
ments, using drum grapplers, watering down dusty areas, and avoiding areas of
obvious contamination would reduce the probability of contamination and would
preclude a more elaborate decontamination procedure.
The initial decontamination plan is based on a worst-case situation (if no
information is available about the incident). Specific conditions at the site are
then evaluated, including:
1. Type of contaminant
2. Amount of contamination
3. Levels of protection required
4. Type of protective clothing worn
The initial plan is modified by eliminating unnecessary stations or it is otherwise
adapted to site conditions. For instance, the plan might require a complete wash
and rinse of protective garments. If disposable garments are worn, the wash and
SO-32
-------
DRAFT
rinse step could be omitted. Wearing disposable boot covers and gloves could
eliminate the washing and rinsing of gloves and disposable boots and reduce the
number of stations needed.
6.2.2 Contamination Reduction Corridor
An area within the Contamination Reduction Zone (Exhibit SO-2) is designated the
Contamination Reduction Corridor (CRC). The CRC controls access into and out
of the Exclusion Zone and confines personnel decontamination activities to a
limited area. The size of the corridor depends on the number of stations in the
decontamination procedure, the overall dimensions of work control zones, and the
amount of space available at the site. A corridor of 75 by 15 feet should be
adequate for full decontamination. Whenever possible, it should be a straight path.
The CRC boundaries should be conspicuously marked, with entry and exit
restricted. The far end is the hotline—the boundary between the Exclusion Zone
and the Contamination Reduction Zone. Personnel exiting the Exclusion Zone must
go through the CRC. Anyone in the CRC should be wearing the Level of
Protection designated for the decontamination crew. Another corridor may be
required for the entrance and exit of heavy equipment needing decontamination.
Within the CRC, distinct areas are set aside for the decontamination of personnel,
portable field equipment, removed clothing, etc. These areas should be marked and
restricted to those personnel wearing the appropriate Level of Protection. All
activities within the corridor are confined to decontamination.
Protective clothing, respirators, monitoring equipment, sampling supplies, and
other equipment are all maintained outside of the CRC. Personnel don their
protective equipment away from the CRC and enter the Exclusion Zone through a
separate access control point at the hotline.
SO-33
-------
EXHIBIT SO-2
TYPICAL PA/SI DECONTAMINATION LAYOUT
EXCLUSION ZONE
HOT LINE
CRC
1. Equipment and Drop.
2. Decontamination Solution Wash.
3. Rinse
4. Canister/Tank Change.
5. Outer Glove and Boot Remover.
6. Respiratory Protection Removal.
7. Dermal Protection Removal.
8. Field Wash.
SO-34
-------
DRAFT
6.3 Extent of Decontamination Required
6.3.1 Modifications of Initial Plan
The original decontamination plan must be adapted to conditions specific to each
incident. These conditions may require more or less personnel decontamination
than planned, depending on a number of factors.
6.3.1.1 Type of Contaminant
The extent of personnel decontamination depends on the effects the contaminants
have on the body. Contaminants do not exhibit the same degree of toxicity (or
other hazard). The more toxic a substance is, the more extensive or thorough
decontamination must be. Whenever it is known or suspected that personnel can
become contaminated with highly toxic or skin-destructive substances, a full
decontamination procedure should be followed. If less hazardous materials are
involved, the procedure can be downgraded.
6.3.1.2 Amount of Contamination
The amount of contamination on protective clothing is usually determined visually.
If the clothing is badly contaminated, a thorough decontamination is generally
required. Gross material remaining on the protective clothing for any extended
period of time may degrade or permeate it. This likelihood increases with higher
air concentrations and greater amounts of liquid contamination. Gross contamina-
tion also increases the probability of personnel contact. Swipe tests may help
determine the type and quantity of surface contaminants.
50-35
-------
DRAFT
6.3.1.3 Level of Protection
The Level of Protection and specific pieces of clothing worn determine on a
preliminary basis the layout of the decontamination line. Each Level of Protection
presents different problems with respect to the decontamination and doffing of the
equipment. For example, the decontamination of the harness straps and backpack
assembly of the self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) is difficult. A butyl
rubber apron worn over the harness makes decontamination easier. Clothing
variations and different Levels of Protection may require the addition or deletion
of stations used in the original decontamination procedure.
6.3.1.4 Work Function
The work that each person does determines the potential for contact with
hazardous materials. In turn, this dictates the layout of the decontamination line.
Observers, photographers, operators of air samplers, or others in the Exclusion
Zone performing tasks that will not bring them in contact with contaminants may
not need, for example, to have their garments washed and rinsed. Others in the
Exclusion Zone with a potential for direct contact with the hazardous material will
require more thorough decontamination. Different decontamination lines could be
set up for different job functions, or certain stations in a line could be omitted for
personnel performing certain tasks.
6.3.1.5 Location of Contamination
Contamination on the upper areas of protective clothing poses a greater risk to the
worker because volatile compounds could make breathing hazardous both for the
worker and for the decontamination personnel. There is also an increased
probability of contaminant contact with the skin when the worker is doffing the
upper part of the clothing.
50-36
-------
DRAFT
6.3.1.6 Reason for Leaving Site
The reason for leaving the Exclusion Zone also determines the need for and extent
of decontamination. A worker leaving the Exclusion Zone to pick up or drop off
tools or instruments and immediately returning may not require decontamination.
A worker leaving to get a new air cylinder or change a respirator or canisters,
however, may require some degree of decontamination. Individuals departing the
CRC at breaktime, lunchtime, or the end of the day must be thoroughly
decontaminated.
6.3.2 Effectiveness of Decontamination
There is no method of determining immediately how effective decontamination is
in removing contaminants. Discolorations, stains, corrosion, and residues on
objects may indicate that contaminants have not been removed. However,
observable effects only indicate surface contamination and not permeation (absorp-
tion) into clothing. Many contaminants are not easily observed.
One method for determining the effectiveness of surface decontamination is swipe
testing. Cloth or paper patches—swipes—are wiped over predetermined surfaces of
the suspect object and later analyzed in a laboratory. Both the inner and outer
surfaces of protective clothing should be swipe tested. Positive results for both
sets of swipes would indicate that surface contamination has not been removed and
substances have penetrated or permeated the garment. Swipe tests can also be
performed on skin or inside clothing. Laboratory analysis is required to determine
if protective garments have been permeated. Both swipe and permeation testing
provide after-the-fact information. Along with visual observations, results of
these tests can help in ascertaining the effectiveness of decontamination.
6.3.3 Equipment
Decontamination equipment, materials, and supplies are generally selected on the
basis of availability. The ease of equipment decontamination and disposability are
also considered. Most equipment and supplies can be easily procured. Soft-bristle
scrub brushes or long-handle brushes are used to remove contaminants. Buckets of
SO-37
-------
DRAFT
water or garden sprayers are used for rinsing. Large galvanized wash tubs, stock
tanks, or children's wading pools can also be used as containers for wash and rinse
solutions. Large plastic garbage cans or similar containers lined with plastic bags
are useful for the storage of contaminated clothing and equipment, and metal or
plastic cans or drums are convenient for the temporary storage of contaminated
liquids. Other gear includes paper or cloth towels for drying protective clothing
and equipment.
6.3.4 Decontamination Solution
Protective equipment, sampling tools, and other equipment are usually decontami-
nated by scrubbing with detergent water using a soft-bristle brush, followed by
rinsing with copious amounts of water. While this process may not be fully
effective in removing some contaminants (in some cases, the contaminants may
react with water), it is a relatively safe option compared to the use of a
decontaminating solution. The contaminant must be identified before a decon
chemical is used, and reactions of such a chemical with unidentified substances or
mixtures could be especially troublesome. A decontamination solution must be
selected in consultation with an experienced chemist.
6.3.5 Establishment of Procedures
Once decontamination procedures have been established, all personnel requiring
decontamination must be given precise instructions (and practice, if necessary).
Compliance with the procedures must be frequently checked. The time it takes for
decontamination must be ascertained. Personnel wearing self-contained breathing
apparatuses (SCBAs) must leave their work areas with sufficient air to walk to the
CRC and go through decontamination.
6.* Decontamination During Medical Emergencies
6.4.1 Basic Considerations
Part of the overall planning for incident response is managing medical emergen-
cies. The plan should provide for the following?
SO-38
-------
DRAFT
1. Full training of some response team members in first aid and cardiopul-
monary resuscitation.
2. Arrangements with the nearest medical facility for transportation and
treatment of the injured, and for the treatment of personnel suffering
from exposure to chemicals.
3. Consultation with a toxicologist.
4. Emergency eye washes, showers, and wash stations.
5. First aid kits, blankets, a stretcher, and a resuscitator.
In addition, the plan should have established methods for decontaminating person-
nel with medical problems and injuries. There is the possibility that decontamina-
tion may aggravate a health problem or cause more serious problems. If prompt
life-saving first aid and/or medical treatment is required, decontamination proce-
dures should be omitted. Whenever possible, response personnel should accompany
contaminated victims to the medical facility to advise on matters involving
decontamination.
6.4.2 Physical Injury
Physical injuries can range from a sprained ankle to a compound fracture, or from
a minor cut to massive bleeding. Depending on the seriousness of the injury,
treatment may be given at the site by trained response personnel. For more
serious injuries, additional assistance may be required at the site or the victim may
have to be treated at a medical facility.
Life-saving care should be instituted immediately without considering decontami-
nation. The outside garments can be removed (depending on the weather) if this
does not cause delays, interfere with treatment, or aggravate the problem.
Respiratory masks and backpack assemblies must always be removed. Fully
encapsulating suits or chemical-resistant clothing can be cut away. If the outer
contaminated garments cannot be safely removed, the individual should be wrapped
50-39
-------
DRAFT
in plastic, rubber, or blankets to help prevent contaminating medical personnel
and/or the inside of ambulances. Outside garments are then removed at the
medical facility. No attempt should be made to wash or rinse the victim unless it
is known that he has been contaminated with an extremely toxic or corrosive
material that could also cause severe injury or loss of life. For minor medical
problems or injuries, the normal decontamination procedure should be followed.
6.4.3 Heat Stress
Heat-related illnesses range from heat fatigue to heat stroke, the latter being the
most serious. Heat stroke requires prompt treatment to prevent irreversible brain
damage or death. Protective clothing may have to be cut off. Less serious forms
of heat stress require prompt attention or they may lead to a heat stroke. Unless
the victim is obviously contaminated, decontamination should be omitted or
minimized and treatment begun immediately.
6.*.* Chemical Exposure
Exposure to chemicals can be divided into two categories:
1. Direct contact through either touch (e.g., acid burns) or inhalation.
2. Indirect contact through gross contamination of clothing or equipment.
Injuries from contaminant inhalation can only be treated by qualified physicians. If
the contaminant is on the skin or in the eyes, immediate measures must be taken to
counteract its effect. First aid treatment usually involves flooding the affected
area with water; however, for a few chemicals, water may cause more severe
problems.
When protective clothing is grossly contaminated, contaminants may be transferred
to the wearer or to treatment personnel and may cause injuries. Unless severe
medical problems could be created by splashing of the contaminant, the protective
clothing should be washed off as rapidly as possible and carefully removed.
SO-40
-------
DRAFT
6.5 Protection for Decontamination Workers
The Level of Protection worn by decontamination workers is determined by the
protection worn by site investigators. Decon workers must be at least at the same
level. Evaluation criteria for selecting proper protection include:
1. Expected or visible contamination on workers.
2. Type of contaminant and associated respiratory and skin hazards.
3. Total vapor/gas concentrations in the CRC.
*f. Particulates and specific inorganic or organic vapors in the CRC.
5. Results of swipe tests.
6. The presence (or suspected presence) of highly toxic or skin-destructive
materials.
6.6 Decontamination of Equipment
6.6.1 Basic Considerations
All possible measures should be taken to prevent the contamination of sampling and
monitoring equipment. Sampling devices become contaminated, but monitoring
instruments, unless they are splashed, usually do not. Once instruments have been
contaminated, it is difficult to clean them without damaging them. Any delicate
instrument that cannot be decontaminated easily should be protected while it is
being used. It should be bagged, and the bag should be taped and secured around
the instrument. Openings are made in the bag for sample intake. Solutions picked
by chemist based on type of contamination.
SO-fl
-------
DRAFT
6.6.2 Decontamination Procedures
6.6.2.1 Sampling Devices
Sampling devices require special cleaning. The Site Safety personnel can provide
information on proper decontamination methods.
6.6.2.2 Tools
Wooden tools are difficult to decontaminate because they absorb chemicals. They
should be kept on the site and handled only by protected workers. At the end of
the response, such tools should be disposed of as hazardous waste. Other tools
should be decontaminated.
6.6.2.3 Respirators
Certain parts of contaminated respirators, such as the harness assembly and
leather or cloth components, are difficult to decontaminate. If grossly contami-
nated, they may have to be discarded. Rubber components can be soaked in soap
and water and scrubbed with a brush. Regulators must be maintained according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Persons responsible for decontaminating
respirators should be thoroughly trained in respirator maintenance.
6.6.2.4 Heavy Equipment
Bulldozers, trucks, backhoes, bulking chambers, and other heavy equipment are
difficult to decontaminate. The method generally used is to wash them with water
under high pressure and/or to scrub accessible parts with a detergent/water
solution under pressure. In some cases, shovels, scoops, and lifts have been
sandblasted or steam-cleaned. Particular care must be given to tires, scoops, and
other components in direct contact with contaminants. Swipe tests should be used
to determine effectiveness of the decontamination process.
SO-42
-------
DRAFT
6.6.3 Personnel Protective Equipment
In addition to being decontaminated, all respirators, protective clothing, and other
personal articles must be sanitized before they can be used again. The insides of
masks and clothing become soiled from exhalation, body oils, and perspiration. The
manufacturer's instructions should be followed in sanitizing the respirator mask. If
practicable, protective clothing should be machine washed after a thorough
decontamination; otherwise, it should be cleaned by hand.
6.6.* Persistent Contamination
In some instances, clothing and equipment will become contaminated with
substances that cannot be removed by normal decontamination procedures. A
solvent may be used to remove such contamination from equipment if it does not
destroy or degrade the protective material. If persistent contamination is
expected, disposable garments should be used. Testing for persistent contamina-
tion of protective clothing and appropriate decontamination must be done by
qualified laboratory personnel.
6.6.5 Disposal of Contaminated Materials
All materials and equipment used for decontamination must be disposed of
properly. Clothing, tools, buckets, brushes, and all other equipment that is
contaminated must be secured in drums or other containers and labeled. Clothing
not completely decontaminated on the site should be secured in plastic bags before
it is removed from the site.
Contaminated wash and rinse solutions can be kept temporarily in a step-in
container (for example, child's wading pool) or in a plastic-lined trench about 14 in.
deep. Such solutions are ultimately transferred to labeled drums and disposed of
with other substances on the site.
Attachment A describes basic decontamination procedures for workers wearing
Level A, B, or C protection.
SO-43
-------
DRAFT
7.0 FIRST AID
Employees are often required to work in locations far from medical aid and
communications. Injuries received must be treated by coworkers, passersby, or
even the injured employee. It is, therefore, important that all employees be
knowledgeable in first-aid procedures.
7.1 Assessing the Situation
Use the following steps to assess what emergency problems exist and what actions
are needed:
Use the following steps to assess what emergency problems exist and what actions
are needed:
1. Don't panic. You will be able to assess the situation more effectively.
Remember, psychological support is also important.
2. Look for an emergency medical identification tag on the victim's wrist,
ankle, or neck. Check his wallet for an identification card with further
instructions. Another alerting device could be a sticker on the wind-
shield of the victim's car.
3. Remember the ABC's of life support:
a. Airway open. Open and maintain the victim's airway.
b. Breathing restored. If the victim is not breathing, begin rescue
breathing techniques immediately.
c. Circulation maintained. If there is no pulse, start external cardiac
compression immediately.
>t. Check for bleeding. If bleeding is found, apply direct pressure, elevate
the injured limb ony if it does not cause further pain or injury, and apply
SO-W
-------
DRAFT
pressure on the blood-supplying artery. Use a tourniquet only as a last
resort for severe life-threatening hemorrhage when all other measures
fail.
5. Look for signs of shock and broken bones.
6. Get professional help quickly. Know emergency numbers such as 0 or
911. Telephone appropriate authorities (rescue squad, ambulance, police,
poison control center, or fire department) and describe the problem. Be
sure to give your name and location, as well as the number of persons
involved.
7. Loosen any clothing that may restrict the victim's breathing or interfere
with circulation.
8. Never give an unconscious person anything by mouth.
9. Do not move injured persons unless the situation is life threatening.
Keep the victim still, quiet, and warm (except in cases of heat
exhaustion and sunstroke). A victim with broken bones should not be
moved until a splint has been properly applied.
7.2 Vital Signs
Once the situation is stabilized, the victim's breathing and heartbeat must be
checked. Pulmonary resuscitation techniques are used to restore breathing, and
cardiac compression is used to restore the heartbeat.
7.2.1 Pulmonary Resuscitation
Symptons of breathing difficulties include shortness of breath, dizziness, chest
pain, rapid pulse, bluish-purple skin color, dilated pupils, and unconsciousness. The
following procedure should be used for persons who have stopped breathing:
SO-45
-------
DRAFT
1. Lay the victim on his back. Place one hand under the victim's neck and
lift, tilting the head back as far as possible with other hand to open the
airway. Avoid exaggerated head tilt in infants, small children, and
victims with neck and back injuries.
2. Look, listen, and feel for respiratory movement. If breathing is absent,
pinch the victim's nostrils closed, take a deep breath, and completely
cover the victim's mouth. Give four quick full breaths. If the chest does
not rise, check for airway obstruction.
3. Clear the airway using your fingers in a hooked fashion to remove any
solid or liquid obstructions. If the victim has a tracheostomy (permanent
opening in neck), start rescue breathing by placing your mouth over the
neck opening (stoma) rather than the mouth.
if. If a pulse is present, continue rescue breathing at a rate of 1 strong
breath every 5 seconds (i.e., 12 per minute) for adults or 1 shallow breath
every 3 seconds (i.e., 20 per minute) for small children.
5. If a pulse is not present, start external cardiopulmonary resuscitation
(CPR).
7.2.2 Cardiac Compression
Symptons of heartbeat problems include those for breathing difficulty. Heartbeat
can be checked by feeling for a pulse.
The normal adult heart rate is 60 to 80. Children are slightly faster and
excitement, exercise, or fever may increase the heartbeat. Pulse rates can be
determined as follows:
1. Place the tips of your index and middle fingers on your side of the
victim's neck next to the airway to feel for a pulse. Do not use your
thumb, as this will confuse the victim's pulse with your own.
SO-46
-------
DRAFT
2. Once a pulse has been located, count the number of beats in 15 seconds
and multiply by 4, or, if the pulse is very slow or irregular, count for an
entire 60 seconds.
A pulse rate may vary depending on the victim's condition. The normal
adult male pulse is 54 to 70 beats per minute; for a female it is 75 to 80.
A young child's pulse ranges between 80 to 180. In addition to the
number of beats, be sure to note whether the pulse is full, weak,
bounding, or irregular.
Lack of heartbeat or pulse requires starting CPR. There are two methods of giving
CPR depending on whether two people are available or only one.
7.2.2.1 One-Rescuer CPR
Apply 80 compressions per minute. Every 15 compressions should be followed by
two very quick breaths. Call for professional medical help as soon as possible.
Keep the victim warm and still. Signs of recovery include a return to normal
breathing, an improvement in skin color, and the movement of arms and legs.
For adults, once must exert enough pressure to depress the breastplate 1-1/2 to 2
inches. Every five compressions should be followed without pause by one rescue
breath. Children require the heel of only one hand to depress the breastplate 3/4
to 1-1/2 inch. Continue compressions at a rate of 100 per minute. Every five
compressions should be followed without a pause by one rescue breath.
7.2.2.2 Two-Person CPR
Partner A begins with first four mouth-to-mouth or mouth-to-nose rescue breaths.
Partner B kneels with shoulders directly over victim's breastplate and places the
heels of both hands one on top of the other with fingers interlocked over the lower
half of the sternum. The elbows should be straight.
Partners should trade positions if they become tired. The CPR should continue
until the partners are exhausted or relieved, or until a physician can evaluate the
victim's condition.
SO-47
-------
DRAFT
7.3 Wound Care
When possible, wash hands thoroughly with soap and water before administering
first aid. Even minor cuts and scrapes can become contaminated and infected.
Using the following good wound management techniques can prevent or reduce the
possibility of infection. Prepare a clean, uncluttered place to put articles required
to provide care. Under emergency conditions, when this is not possible, try not to
touch the wound unnecessarily, breathe on the wound, or cough over the wound.
Keep the wound and all first-aid materials as clean as possible. When operating
packages of sterile pads or dressings, handle only the edges. Do not touch the area
that comes in contact with the wound.
7.3.1 Surface Wounds
Cleanse the wound and the surrounding area gently with mild soap and water and
rinse. Blot the wound dry with a sterile pad or clean dressing. Treat the wound to
protect against contamination and cover it to soak up fluids and prevent further
contamination. Handle only the edges of sterile pads or dressings.
The following bandage types may be used:
1. Adhesive pads for large wounds, cuts, or scrapes. This is a convenient,
one-step bandage to cushion and protect.
2. Sterile pads for cuts, scrapes, or other minor wounds.
3. Nonstick sterile pads for bleeding and draining wounds, burns, and infec-
tions. These will not stick to the wound or disrupt the healing process.
*4. Rolled gauze for securing sterile pads. This is especially good for joints
and hard-to-bandage wounds.
5, Tape bandage secured with first-aid tape to help keep out dirt and germs.
SO-48
-------
DRAFT
7.3.2 Deep Wounds and Serious Burns
These types of wounds should be cleansed only by professional medical personnel.
The patient should be treated for bleeding and shock. One must be alert for signs
of infection such as a hot, painful reddening around the wound, swelling, chills, and
fever. Consult a physician immediately, and check for immunization against
tetanus within the past 5 years.
7.4 Bandaging
Emergency bandages can be devised from clean handkerchiefs, sheets, belts, socks,
or stockings. Bandages should be snug but not tight enough to interfere with
circulation. Always leave the victim's fingertips or toes exposed when a splint or
bandage is applied to the arms or legs. Loosen the bandage if swelling,
discoloration, or a cold, numb, or tingling sensation occurs in the fingers or toes.
Never apply a tight bandage to the victim's neck, as the circulation of blood to the
brain may be restricted or stopped.
7.5 REFERENCES
Cornish, H.H. and 1. Adefuin. 1967. "Potentiation of Carbon Tetrachloride
Toxicity by Aliphatic Alcohols." Arch. Environ. Health, Vol. 14, pp. 447-449.
Dixon, R.L. 1980. "Toxic Responses of the Reproductive System". In Casarett and
Doull's Toxicology, edited by 1. Doull, C.D. Klaassen, and M.O. Amdur, Macmillian,
New York, N.Y., pp. 332-356.
Goldstein, G.M. and 3. Doull. 1971. "Treatment of Nitrite Induced
\\ethemoglobinemia with Hypebaric Oxygen." Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med., Vol. 138,
pp. 137-139.
Gosselin, R.E., H.C. Hodge, R.P. Smith, and M.N. Gleason. 1976. Clinical
Toxicology of Commercial Products; Acute Poisoning, 4th ed., Williams and
\Vilkins Co., Baltimore, NAd.
SO-49
-------
DRAFT
Habison, R.D. and R.L. Dixon. 1978. "Proceedings of the Symposium on Target
Organ Toxicity: Gonads (Reproductive and Genetic Toxicity)." Environ. Hlth.
Perspect, Vol. 2
-------
DRAFT
8.0 EMERGENCY PLANNING
An emergency plan must be covering the most probable emergency situations must
be developed, personnel must be trained to perform the plan, and periodic drills
must be performed. Typically, an emergency plan will need to consider:
• Fire/explosion
» Injury/poisoning
• Chemical spill
* Evacuation procedures
Each emergency plan will require a chain-of-command, development of required
response action, identifying response teams, posting of a list of local emergency
agencies in all mobile offices/trailers, identifying site medical personnel, and
reporting procedures. Reports must be made for all incidents involving injuries or
property damage. Reports will be completed by the SM as soon after the incident
as possible and forwarded to appropriate management and safety personnel. Injuries
requiring medical treatment beyond first aid must be reported within 24 hours by
phone, followed by the written report.
SO-51
-------
ATTACHMENT A
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-l
APPENDIX M
SITE SAFETY PLAN GUIDANCE
PURPOSE
This appendix has been extracted from the Standard
Operating Safety Guidelines (SOSG), issued by EPA's Office
of Emergency and Remedial Response (OERR). It is provided
here to assist State Project Officers (SPOs) and Regional
Site Project Officers (RSPOs) in developing and reviewing
site safety plans for CERCLA remedial response projects.
Since field work at a site may not begin until an accep-
table site safety plan is approved, State and Regional
personnel should be familiar with this appendix and the
entire SOSG.
BACKGROUND
All CERCLA projects must have in place a site safety
plan which establishes the requirements and procedures for
protecting the health and safety of all on-site person-
nel. It should present, in a logical format, information
about the site and instructions for preparing for and re-
sponding to potential health and safety hazards. Further,
the site safety plan must specify the Levels of Protection
necessary for each field activity, establish detailed in-
structions for responding to emergency situations, list
key safety personnel, and describe monitoring
requirements.
Responsibility for developing the site safety plan
depends on whether the State or EPA is leading the reme-
dial project. For State-lead remedial response, the State
(or its contractor) will prepare the plan and submit it to
EPA for review; for Federal-lead projects, an EPA contrac-
tor will develop the plan.
APPENDIX SUMMARY
This appendix explains the key elements of a site
safety plan. It is organized into five parts, as follows:
Information on how to prepare a site safety plan
Suggested plan for emergency operation codes
Safety Check-off Sheet
M-l
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-2
Suggested format for a site safety plan
Sample site safety plan (from the Occupational
Health and Safety Manual).
The body of this appendix is actually Part 9 of the SOSG
and should be used in conjunction with the entire
document. The SOSG give detailed information on various
aspects of health and safety protection for personnel at a
hazardous waste site and are applicable to removal and
remedial projects. Any questions on the content of this
appendix or the SOSG should be directed to: EPA's Safety
and Occupational Health Officer, Hazardous Response
Support Division, Woodridge Avenue, Building 10, Edision,
New Jersey 08837. (Phone: (201) 321-6745 or FTS 340-6745),
M-2
-------
I SB.
1/11/85
UMTEO STATES E-'Vli-.TNMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY ^ p^Q ^_^
/; ASHiNG TON. O.C 20460
NOV I 9 1984
MEMORANDUM
SUBJECT: Standard Operating Safety Guides, November 1984
FROM: William N. Hedeman, Jr., Director \") ^
Office of Emergency and Remedial Response"
TO: Regional Office Addressees
The enclosed Standard Operating Safety Guides, November 1984
replaces the Interim standard Operating Guides, Revised
September 1982. The Guides have been updated and revised to
reflect additional experience EPA personnel have gained in
responding to environmental incidents involving hazardous
substances.
The Standard Operating Safety Guides are in accordance and
consistent with the procedures for employee health and safety
contained in EPA's Occupational Health and Safety Manual,
Chapter 9, Hazardous Substances Responses, (1440 TN12),
May 5, 1984.
The guides are not meant to be a comprehensive safety
manual for incident response. Rather, they provide information
on health and safety to complement professional judgement and
experience, and to supplement existing Regional office safety
procedures.
If you have any questions or comments concerning the
guides, please contact Mr. Stephen Lingle, Director, Hazardous
Response Support Division or Mr. J. Stephen Dorrler, Chief,
Environmental Response Team.
Enclosure
Addressees
Director, Ofc. o'f Emergence & Remedial Resp., Region II
Director, Hazardous Waste Mgmt. Div., Region III
Director, Air & Waste Management Division,
Regions IV, VI, VII. VIII
Director, Waste Mgmt. Div., Regions I & V
Director, Toxics & Waste Mgmt. Div., Region IX
Director, Air & Waste Division X
cc: Gene Lucero, OWPE
John Skinner, OSW
M-3
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-4
PART 9
SITE SAFETY PLAN
I. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the site safety plan is to establish requirements for
protecting the health and safety of responders during all activities
conducted at an incident. It contains safety information, instruc-
tions, and procedures.
A site safety plan must be prepared and reviewed by qualified personnel
for each hazardous substance response. Before operations at an incident
commence, safety requirements must be written, conspicuously posted or
distributed to all response personnel, and discussed with them. The
safety plan must be periodically reviewed to keep it current and techni-
cally correct.
In non-emergency situations, for example, long-term remedial action at
abandoned hazardous waste sites, safety plans are developed simultane-
ously with the general work plan. Workers can become familiar with the
plan before site activities begin. Emergency response generally re-
quires verbal safety instructions and reliance on existing standard
operating procedures until, when time permits, a plan can be written.
The plan must contain safety requirements for routine (but hazardous)
response activities and also for unexpected site emergencies. The
major distinction between routine and emergency site safety planning
is the ability to predict, monitor, and evaluate routine activities.
A site emergency is unpredictable and may occur anytime.
II. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The site safety plan must:
Describe the known hazards and evaluate the risks associated with
the incident and with each activity conducted.
- List key personnel and alternates responsible for site safety,
response operations, and for protection of public.
- Describe Lsvels of Protection to be worn by personnel.
- Delineate work areas.
- Establish procedures to control site access.
Describe decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment.
- Establish site emergency procedures.
9-1
M-4
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-5
- Address emergency medical care for injuries and toxicological
problems.
- Describe requirements for an environmental surveillance program.
- Specify any routine and special training required for responders.
- Establish procedures for protecting workers from weather-related
problems.
III. SITE SAFETY PLAN SCOPE AND DETAIL
The plan's scope, detail, and length is based on:
Information available about the incident.
- Time available to prepare a site-specific plan.
- Reason for responding.
Three general categories of response exist - emergencies, character-
izations and remedial actions. Although considerations for personnel
safety are generic and independent of the response category, in
scope, detail, and length safety requirements and plans vary consid-
erably. These variations are generally due to the reason for
responding (or category of response) , information available, and the
severity of the incident with its concomitant.dangers to the respon-
der.
A. Emergencies
1. Situation:
Emergencies generally require prompt action to prevent or
reduce undesirable affects. Immediate hazards of fire, explo-
sion, and release of toxic vapors or gases are of prime
concern. Emergencies vary greatly in respect to types and
quantities of material, numbers of responders, type of work
required, population affected, and other factors. Emergencies
last from a few hours to a few days.
Information available: Varies from none to much. Usually
information about the chemicals involved and their associ-
ated hazards is quickly obtained in transportation-related
incidents, or incidents involving fixed facilities. Deter-
mining the substances involved in some incidents, such as
mysterious spills, requires considerable time and effort.
- Time available: Little time, generally requires prompt
action to bring the incident under control.
- Reason for response: To implement prompt and immediate
9-2
M-5
-------
1/11/35
New Paqe M-6
actions to control dangerous or potentially dangerous sit-
uations.
2. Effects on Plan
In emergencies, time is not available to write lengthy and
detailed safety plans. Decisions for responder safety are
based on a continual evaluation of changing conditions.
Responding organizations must rely on their existing written
standard operating safety procedures or a generic plan, and
verbal safety instructions adapted to meet site-specific
conditions. Since heavy reliance is placed on verbal safety
instructions an effective system to keep all responders
informed must be established. Whenever possible, these inci-
dent-specific instructions should be written.
B. Incident Characterization
1. Situation:
In non-emergency responses,for example, preliminary inspec-
tions at abandoned wastes sites or more comprehensive waste
site investigations the objective is to determine and charac-
terize the chemicals and hazards involved, the extent of
contamination, and risks to people and the environment. In
general, initial inspections, detailed investigations, and
extent of contamination surveys are limited in the activities
that are required and number of people involved. Initial or
preliminary inspections generally require 1-2 days. Complete
investigations may last over a longer time period.
Information available: Much background information. Gener-
ally limited on-site data for initial inspection. On-site
information more fully developed through additional site
visits and investigations.
- Time available: In most cases adequate time is available
to develop written site-specific safety plan.
- Reason for response: To gather data to verify or refute
existing information, to gather information to determine
scope of subsequent investigations, or to collect data for
planning remedial action.
2. Effects on Plan:
Sufficient time is available to write safety plans. In scope
and detail, plans tend to be brief containing safety require-
ments for specific on-site work relevant to collecting data.
As information is developed through additional investigations,
the safety plan, is modified and, if necessary, more detailed
and specific requirements added.
9-3
M-6
-------
1/11/85
tlew Page M-7
C. Remedial Actions
1. Situation:
Remedial actions are cleanups which last over a long period
of time. They commence after more immediate problems at an
emergency have been controlled, or they involve the mitigation
of hazards and restoration of abandoned hazardous waste
sites. Numerous activities are required involving many people
a logistics and support base, extensive equipment, and more
involved work activities. Remedial actions may require months
to years to completely accomplish.
- Information available: Much known about on-site hazards.
- Time available: Ample time for work planning.
- Reason for response: Systematic and complete control,
cleanup, and restoration.
2. Effects on Plan:
Since ample time is available before work commences, site
safety plan tends to be comprehensive and detailed. From
prior investigations much detail may be known about the ma-
terials or hazards at the site and extent of contamination.
IV. SITE SAFETY PLAN DEVELOPMENT
To develop the plan as much background information as possible should
be obtained, time permitting, about the incident. This would include,
but not be 1imited to:
Incident location and name.
- Site description.
- Chemicals and quantities involved.
- Hazards associated with each chemical.
Behavior and dispersion of material involved.
»
- Types of containers, storage, or transportation methods.
- Physical hazards.
- Prevailing weather condition and forecast.
- Surrounding populations and land use.
- Ecologically sensitive areas.
9-4
M-7
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-8
Facility records.
Preliminary assessment reports.
- Off-site surveys.
Topographic and hydrologic information.
The information initially available or obtained through subsequent
characterization provides a basis for developing a site-specific safety
plan. Information is needed about the chemicals and hazards involved,
movement of material on and off the site, and potential contact with
responders or the public. This type of information is then used along
with the reason for responding (and work plan) to develop the safety
plan. The plan is tailored to the conditions imposed by the incident
and to its environmental setting. As additional information becomes
available the safety plan is modified to protect against the hazards
discerned and to provide for site emergencies that may occur.
V. ROUTINE OPERATIONS
Routine operations are those activities required in responding to an
emergency or a remedial action at a hazardous waste site. These ac-
tivities may involve a high degree of risk, but are standard opera-
tions that all incident responses may require.
Safety practices for routine operations closely parallel accepted in-
dustrial hygiene and industrial safety procedures. Whenever a hazard-
ous Incident progresses to the point where operations become more rou-
tine, the associated site safety plan becomes a more refined document.
As a minimum, the following must be included as part of the site safety
plan for routine operations.
- Describe the Known Hazards and Risks
This must include all known or suspected physical, biological, rad-
iological, or chemical hazards. It is important that all health
related data be kept up-to-date. As air, water, soil, or hazardous
substance monitoring and sampling data becomes available, it must
be evaluated, significant risk or exposure to workers noted, poten-
tial impact on public assessed, and changes made in the plan. These
evaluations-need to be repeated frequently since much of the plan
is based on this information.
- List Key Personnel and Alternates
The plan must identify key personnel (and alternates) responsible
for site safety. It should also identify key personnel assigned to
various site operations. Telephone numbers, addresses, and organi-
zations of these people must be listed in the plan and pasted in a
conspicuous place.
9-5
M-8
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-9
Designate Levels of Protection to be Worn
The Levels of Protection to be worn at locations on-site or by
work functions must be designated. This includes the specific
types of respirators and clothing to be worn for each level. No
one shall be permitted in areas requiring personnel protective
equipment unless they have been trained in its use and are wearing
it.
- Delineate Work Areas
Work areas (exclusion zone, contamination reduction zone, and
support zone) need to be designated on the site map and the map
posted. The size of zones, zone boundaries, and access control
points into each zone must be marked and made known to all site
workers.
- List Control Procedures
Control procedures must be implemented to prevent unauthorized
access. Site security procedures - fences, signs, security pa-
trols and check-in procedures - must be established. Procedures
must also be established to control authorized personnel into work
zones where personnel protection is required.
- Establish Decontamination Procedures
Decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment must be es-
tablished. Arrangements must also be made for the proper disposal
of contaminated material, solutions, and equipment.
- Address Requirements for an Environmental Surveillance Program
A program to monitor site hazards must be implemented. This would
include air monitoring and sampling, and other kinds of media
sampling at or around the site that would indicate chemicals
present, their hazards, possible migration, and associated safety
requirements.
- Specify Any Routine and Special Training Required
Personnel must be trained not only in general safety procedures and
use of safety equipment, but in any specialized work they may be
expected te do.
- Establish Procedures for Weather-Related Problems
Weather conditions can affect site work. Temperature extremes,
high winds, storms, etc. impact on personnel safety. Work prac-
tices must be established to protect workers from the effects of
weather and shelters provided, when necessary. Temperature ex-
tremes especially heat and its effect on people wearing protec-
tive clothing, must be considered and procedures established to
monitor for and minimize heat stress.
9-6
M-9
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-10
VI. ON-SITE EMERGENCIES
The plan must address site emergencies - occurrences that require
immediate actions to prevent additional problems or harm to respon-
ders, the public, property, or the environment. In general, all
responses present a degree of risk to the workers. During routine
operations risk is minimized by establishing good work practices and
using personnel protective equipment. Unpredictable events such as
fire, chemical exposure, or physical injury may occur and must be
anticipated. The plan must contain contingencies for managing them.
- Establish Site Emergency Procedures
— List the names and emergency function of on-site personnel
responsible for emergency actions along with the special
training they have.
-- Post the location of nearest telephone (if none at site).
-- Provide alternative means for emergency communications.
-- Provide a list of emergency services organizations that may be
needed. Names, telephone numbers, and locations must be
posted. Arrangements for using emergency organizations should
be made beforehand. Organizations that might be needed are:
- Fire
- Police
- Health
- Explosive experts
- Local hazardous material response units
- Civil defense
- Rescue
-- Address and define procedures for the rapid evacuation of
workers. Clear, audible warnings signals should be estab-
lished, well-marked emergency exits located throughout the
site, and internal and external communications plans devel-
oped. An example of codes that could be used for emergency
operations based on direct-reading instruments is contained in
Annex 7.
-- A complete list of emergency equipment should be attached to
the safety pl-an. This list should include emergency equipment
available on-site, as well as all available medical, rescue,
transport, fire-fighting, and mitigative equipment.
9-7
M-10
-------
1/11/85
New Page M-ll
Address emergency medical care.
-- Determine location of nearest medical or emergency care
facility. Determine their capability to handle chemical
exposure cases.
-- Arrange for treating, admitting, and transporting of injured
or exposed workers.
-- Post the medical or emergency care facilities location, travel
time, directions, and telephone number.
-- Determine local physician's office location, travel directions,
availability, and post telephone number if other medical care
is not available.
— Determine nearest ambulance service and post telephone number.
— List responding organization's physicians, safety officers, or
toxicologists name and telephone number. Also include nearest
poison control center, if applicable.
— Maintain accurate records on any exposure or potential exposure
of site workers during an emergency (or routine operations).
The minimum amount of information needed (along with any
medical test results) for personnel exposure records is con-
tained in Annex 8.
- Advise workers of their duties during an emergency. In particular,
it is imperative that the site safety officers, standby rescue
personnel, decontamination workers, and emergency medical techni-
cians practice emergency procedures.
Incorporate into the plan, procedures for the decontamination of
injured workers and for their transport to medical care facilities.
Contamination of transport vehicles, medical care facilities, or
of medical personnel may occur and should be addressed in the
plan. Whenever feasible these procedures should be discussed with
appropriate medical personnel in advance of operations.
- Establish procedures in cooperation with local and state officials
for evacuating residents who live near the site.
»
VII. IMPLEMENTATION OF THE SITE SAFETY PLAN
The site safety plan, (standard operating safety procedure or a
generic safety plan for emergency response) must be written to avoid
misinterpretation, ambiguity, and mistakes that verbal orders cause.
The plan must be reviewed and approved by qualified personnel. Once
the safety plan is implemented, its needs to be periodically examined
and modified, if necessary, to reflect any changes in site'-work and
conditions.
9-8
M-ll
-------
1/11/85
New Page. M-12
All agencies and organizations which have an active role at the incid-
ent must be familiar with the plan. If possible the plan should
be written in coordination with the organizations involved. Lead
personnel from these organizations should sign the plan to signify
they agree with it and will follow its provisions.
All personnel involved at the site must be familiar with the safety
plan, or the parts that pertain to their specific activities. Fre-
quent safety meeting should be held to keep all informed about site
hazards, changes in operating plans, modifications of safety require-
ments and for exchanges of information. It is the responsibility
of personnel involved at the site as workers or visitors to comply
with the requirements in the plan.
Frequent audits by the incident manager or the safety designee should
be made to determine compliance with the plan's requirements. Any
deviations should be brought to the attention of the incident manager.
Modifications in the plan should be reviewed and approved by appropri-
ate personnel.
VIII. SAMPLE SAFETY PLANS
Annex 9 and 10 are two examples of Site Safety Plans. Since no one
sample plan or plan format can adequately address all safety require-
ments for the variety of incidents that occur, they should be used
as a guide to help develop an incident-specific plan. They can also
be used, with necessary adaptation, as generic plans for emergency
response.
In some incidents, the sample plans contained in Annex 9 and 10 might
be satisfactory to use by themself. Filling in the blanks provides an
effective safety plan. In many incidents they should only be consid-
ered as a check list. Since they do not e-haustively cover every
condition which may need addressed, users of these sample plans and
any other type examples must realize their application to any one
incident may not be acceptable. Therefore they must be used with
discretion and tempered by professional judgement and experience.
They are not meant to be all inclusive but examples of considera-
tions, requirements, and format which should be adapted for inci-
dent-specific conditions.
9-9
M-12
-------
• 1/11/85
New Page M-13
ANNEX 7
Emergency Operation Codes
Real-Time Monitor
(suggested minimum action plan)
(Site Name)
CODE DESIGNATIONS
1. Green
A. Normal operations
2. YELLOW A
A. Cessation of specific work activity on-site because of:
(1) Continuous organic readings on direct-reading instrument of
* ppm above background (measured 20-30 ft. from point of
suspected release), and
(2) Current or projected meteorological conditions indicate
a probable impact on work activity.
B. If background readings above * ppm are obtained during
cesssation of activity, redesign activity to lower releases
and/or delay that on-site activity until off-site air monitoring
indicates accepted off-site concentration.
C. Site personnel will immediately notify EPA/State of site condi-
tion.
3. Yellow B
A. Termination of all work on-site because of:
(1) Continuous organic readings on direct-reading instrument
* ppm above background (measured approximately 1,000 ft.
from work area or site property limits), and
(2) Current or projected meteorologic conditions indicate a
potential impact on inhabited areas.
B. Site personnel will immediately notify EPA/State of site
conditions.
C. EPA/State will modify off-site air monitoring to meet the
needs of contingency plan.
A7-1
M-13
-------
1/11/35
New Page M-14
4. RED
A. Termination of all work on-site because of:
(1) Continuous organic readings on direct-reading instruments
* ppm above background (measured downwind at the nearest
occupied area off-site, and
(2) Current or projected meteorologic conditions indicate a po-
tential impact on inhabited areas.
B. Site personnel will immediatley notify EPA/State of site condi-
tions.
C. Local officials making evacuation/public health decisions will be
advised by EPA/State to:
(1) Release a public health advisory to potentially affected
areas since on-site control methods will not reduce the
source of contamination; and/or
(2) Implement a temporary relocation plan because on-site activi-
ties indicate a potential for continuous above background/
acceptable readings at the nearest inhabited area(s).
Concentration should be determined by appropriate
response personnel.
A7-2
M-14
-------
ANNEX 8
1/11/85
New Paqe M-15
RESPONSE SAFETY CHECK-OFF SHEET
(minimum required data)
BEFORE RESPONSE
1. Incident: Site
2.
3.
4.
5.
a. Response Dates
Type of Response: Spill
Incident Safety Plan: Region
Suspected chemical (s) involved
(c)
Protective Level (s) involved:
(a) If Level C - 1. Identify
2. Describe
Emp 1 oyee
City State
__ Fire Site Train
ERT Not Devel
: (a) (b)
(d)
ABC
Canister
air monitoring source(s)
Other
oped
D
(b) If Level D JUSTIFY (in comments section at bottom of page).
6. SCBA-Identify Buddy: Name/Organization
7. Last Response: (a) Level Used: A B
• (b) Medical Attention/Exam Performed: Yes No
II. AFTER RESPONSE
1. Protective Level Used: A B C D
a. Level C - identify cannister: b. Level D (comment below)
c. Level B or C skin protection: Tyvek/Saran Acid/Rain Other
2. List possible chemical exposure: Same as above: (a)
(c) Td~
Equipment Decontamination: (a) clothing (b) respirator (c) monitoring
Disposed:
Cleaned:
No Action:
4. Approximate time in exclusion area: _______ hours per day for days
5. Was medical attention/exam required for this response: Yes No
Part I: DATE PREPARED: Reviewed by Date
Part II: DATE PREPARED: Reviewed by Date
COMMENTS:
A8-1
M-15
-------
ANNEX 9 1/11/85
New Paqe M-16
(Suggested format for minimum site safety plan)
SITE SAFETY PLAN
(Name of Hazardous Waste Site/Spill)
I. General Information
As a minimum, all personnel involved with emergency response, waste
site cleanup, drum handling and opening, sampling, site investigations,
etc., will follow the applicable Federal/State rules and regulations. In
addition, all site personnel will follow, as a minimum, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous
Response Support Division's, Standard Operating Safety Guides and Chapter
9 Hazardous Substance Response, from the EPA Occupation Health and Safety
Manual.
In the event of conflicting plans/requirements, personnel must Imple-
ment those safety practices which afford the highest personnel protection.
If site conditions change and It is necessary to modify Levels of
Protection A, B, or C the safety designee on-site shall notify the On-Scene
Coordinator before making recommendations to site personnel.
II. APPROVALS
(SIGNATURE) (SIGNATURE)
On-Scene-Coordinator (OSC)DATE Safety Officer DATE
(SIGNATURE) (SIGNATURE)
REVIEW COMMITTEE DATE OTHERS DATE
III. Summary of Minimum Requirements
A. The safety officer/designee shall:
1. Describe chemicals, hazards, and risk involved
2. List key personnel
a. Response manager (OSC)/alternate
b. Safety officer(s)/alternate
c. Ot'her responsible site personnel/alternate
3. Prescribe Levels of Protection
4. Designate work zones: Support area, contamination reduction
area, exclusion area.
5. Implement procedures to control site access.
A9-1
M-16
-------
ATTACHMENT B
-------
DRAFT
ATTACHMENT B
LEVELS OF DECONTAMINATION
A.I Level A Decontamination
Equipment Worn
The full decontamination procedure outlined is for workers wearing Level A
protection (with taped joints between gloves, boots, and suit). Such protection
consists of
1. Fully encapsulating suit with integral boots and gloves
2. Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
3. Hard hat (optional)
-------
DRAFT
Station 2; Boot Cover and Glove Wash
Scrub outer boot covers and gloves with decon solution or detergent/water solution.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Decon solution
3. Detergent/water solution
*f. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
Station 3; Boot Cover and Glove Rinse
Rinse off decon solution from Station 2 using copious amounts of water. Repeat as
many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. High-pressure spray unit
3. Water
it. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
Station fr; Tape Removal
Remove tape around boots and gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
SO-60
-------
DRAFT
Station 5; Boot Cover Removal
Remove boot covers and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
3. Bench or stool
Station 6; Outer-Glove Removal
Remove outer gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 7: Suit/Safety Boot Wash (Exhibit SOA-1)
Thoroughly wash fully encapsulating suit and boots. Scrub suit and boots with long-
handle, soft-bristle scrub brush and copious amounts of decon solution or
detergent/water solution.Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Decon solution
3. Detergent/water solution
4. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
SO-61
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT SOA-1
LEVEL A DECONTAMINATION; SUIT/SAFETY BOOT WASH
SO-62
-------
DRAFT
Station 8; Suit/Safety Boot Rinse
Rinse off decon solution or detergent/water solution using copious amounts of
water. Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. High-pressure spray unit
3. Water
-------
DRAFT
3. Bench or stool
4. Boot jack
Station 11; Fully Encapsulating Suit and HardHat Removal
With assistance of helper, remove fully encapsulating suit and hard hat. Hang suits
on rack or lay out on drop cloths.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Rack
2. Drop cloths
3. Bench or stool
Station 12; SCBA Backpack Removal
While still wearing facepiece, remove backpack and place on table. Disconnect
hose from regulator valve and proceed to next station.
A table is necessary for this procedure.
Station 13; Inner-Glove Wash
Wash with decon solution or detergent/water solution that will not harm skin.
Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Basin or bucket
2. Decon solution
3. Detergent/water solution
4. Small table
SO-64
-------
DRAFT
Station 14; Inner-Glove Rinse
Rinse with water. Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Water
2. Basin or bucket
3. Small table
Station 15; Facepiece Removal
Remove facepiece. Deposit in container with plastic liner. Avoid touching face
with fingers.
Necessary equipment includes:
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 16; Inner-Glove Removal
Remove inner gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 17: Inner-Clothing Removal
Remove clothing soaked with perspiration. Place in container with plastic liner.
Do not wear inner clothing off the site, since there is a possibility that small
SO-65
-------
DRAFT
amounts of contaminants have been transferred in removing fully encapsulating
suit.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 18; Field Wash
Shower if highly toxic, skin-corrosive, or skin-absorbable materials are known or
suspected to be present. Wash hands and face if shower is not available.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Water
2. Soap
3. Small table
4. Basin or bucket
5. Field showers
6. Towels
Station 19; Redress
Put on clean clothes. A dressing trailer is needed in inclement weather.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Tables
2. Chairs
3. Lockers
SO-66
-------
DRAFT
Full Decontamination (Situation 1) and Three Modifications
The preceding description outlines each station that is included in a complete
worst-case decontamination protocol. It is obvious that different sites will present
different hazard levels and thus that site-specific modifications of this protocol
will be required. The following table illustrates the modifications that can be
made in response to a variety of conditions.
STATION NUMBER
I 2 3 55 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1* 15 16 17 18 19
1XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
2XXXXXXXXX
3X XXXX XXX
f X XXX
Situation 1
The individual entering the Contamination Reduction Corridor (CRC) is
observed to be grossly contaminated, or extremely toxic substances are known or
suspected to be present.
Situation 2
Same as Situation 1 except that individual needs new air tank and will return to
Exclusion Zone.
Situation 3
Individual entering the CRC is expected to be minimally contaminated.
Extremely toxic or skin-corrosive materials are not present. No outer gloves or
boot covers are worn. Inner gloves are not contaminated.
SO-67
-------
DRAFT
Situation 4
Same as Situation 3 except that individual needs new air tank and will return to
Exclusion Zone.
Exhibit SOA-2 shows the layout for Level A decontamination.
A.2 Level B Decontamination
Equipment Worn
The full decontamination procedure outlined is for workers wearing Level B
protection (with taped joints between gloves, boot, and suit). Such protection
consists of
1. One-piece, hooded, chemical-resistant splash suit
2. Self-contained breathing apparatus
3. Hard hat
4. Chemical-resistant boots with steel toe and shank
5. Boot covers
6. Inner and outer gloves
SO-68
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT SOA-2
DECONTAMINATION LAYOUT LEVEL A PROTECTION
Tank Change
Outer Glove
Removal
EXCLUSION
ZONE
Tape
Removal
Boot Cover
Glove Wash < <
Segregated
Equipment
Orop
— Hotline
Do]
Suit/Safety Boot
Wash
Suit/Safety Boot
Rinse
Safety Boot
Removal
CONTAMINATION
REDUCTION
ZONE
Fully Encapsulating Suit
and Hard Hat Removal
SCBA Backpack
Removal
Inner Glove
Wash
Inner Glove
Rinse
Face Piece
Removal
Wash
M6j
Inner Glove
Removal
Inner Clothing
Removal
Contamination
Control Line
1
SUPPORT
ZONE
SO-69
-------
DRAFT
Procedure for Full Decontamination
Station 1; Segregated Equipment Drop
Deposit equipment used on the site (tools, sampling devices and containers,
monitoring instruments, radios, clipboards, etc.) on plastic drop cloths or in
different containers with plastic liners. Each will be contaminated to a different
degree. Segregation at the drop reduces the probability of cross-contamination.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Containers of various sizes
2. Plastic liners
3. Plastic drop cloths
Station 2; Boot Cover and Glove Wash
Scrub outer boot covers and gloves with decon solution or detergent/water solution.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Decon solution
3. Detergent/water solution
14. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
Station 3; Boot Cover and Glove Rinse
Rinse off decon solution from Station 2 using copious amounts of water. Repeat as
many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
SO-70
-------
DRAFT
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. High-pressure spray unit
3. Water
*. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
Station fr; Tape Removal
Remove tape around boots and gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 5; Boot Cover Removal
Remove boot covers and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
3. Bench or stool
Station 6; Outer-Glove Removal
Remove outer gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner. Necessary
equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
SO-71
-------
DRAFT
Station 7; Suit/Safety Boot Wash
Thoroughly wash chemical-resistant splash suit, SCBA, gloves, and safety boots.
Scrub with long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brush and copious amounts of decon
solution or detergent/water solution. Wrap SCBA regulator (if belt-mounted type)
with plastic to keep out water. Wash backpack assembly with sponges or cloths.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Decon solution
3. Detergent/water solution
4. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
5. Small buckets
6. Sponges or cloths
Station 8; Suit/SCBA/Boot/Glove Rinse
Rinse off decon solution or detergent/water solution using copious amounts of
water. Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. High-pressure spray unit
3. Water
<4. Small buckets
5. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
6. Sponges or cloths
SO-72
-------
DRAFT
Station 9; Tank Change
If worker leaves Exclusion Zone to change air tank, this is the last step in the
decontamination procedure. Worker's air tank is exchanged, new outer glove and
boot covers donned, and joints taped. Worker returns to duty.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Air tanks
2. Tape
3. Boot covers
*f. Gloves
Station 10; Safety Boot Removal
Remove safety boots and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
3. Bench or stool
4. Boot jack
Station 11; SCBA Backpack Removal
While still wearing facepiece, remove backpack and place on table. Disconnect
hose from regulator valve and proceed to next station.
A table is necessary for this procedure.
SO-73
-------
DRAFT
Station 12; Splash Suit Removal
With assistance of helper, remove splash suit. Deposit in container with plastic
liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
3. Bench or stool
Station 13; Inner-Glove Wash
Wash inner gloves with decon solution or detergent/water solution that will not
harm skin. Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Decon solution
2. Detergent/water solution
3. Basin or bucket
4. Small table
Station 1^; Inner-Glove Rinse
Rinse inner gloves with water. Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Water
2. Basin or bucket
3. Small table
SO-74
-------
DRAFT
Station 13; Facepiece Removal
Remove facepiece. Avoid touching face with gloves. Deposit in container with
plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 16; Inner-Glove Removal
Remove inner gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 17: Inner-Clothing Removal
Remove clothing soaked with perspiration. Place in container with plastic liner.
Do not wear inner clothing off the site since there is a possibility that small
amounts of contaminants have been transferred in removing fully encapsulating
suit.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
SO-75
-------
DRAFT
Station 18; Field Wash
Shower if highly toxic, skin-corrosive, or skin-absorbable materials are known or
suspected to be present. Wash hands and face if shower is not available.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Water
2. Soap
3. Small tables
4. Basins or buckets
5. Field showers
Station 19; Redress
Put on clean clothes. A dressing trailer is needed in inclement weather.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Tables
2. Chairs
3. Lockers
Full Decontamination (Situation 1) and Three Modifications
The preceding description outlines each station that is included in a complete
worst-case decontamination protocol. It is obvious that different sites will present
different hazard levels and that site-specific modifications of this protocol will be
required. The following table illustrates the modifications that can be made in
response to a variety of conditions.
SO-76
-------
DRAFT
STATION NUMBER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 If 15 16 17 18 19
1XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
2XXXXXXXXX
3X XX XXX XXXX
* X XXX
Situation 1
The individual entering the CRC is observed to be grossly contaminated, or
extremely toxic substances are known or suspected to be present.
Situation 2
Same as Situation 1 except that individual needs new air tank and will return to
Exclusion Zone.
Situation 3
Individual entering the CRC is expected to be minimally contaminated. Extremely
toxic or skin-corrosive materials are not present. No outer gloves or boot covers
are worn. Inner gloves are not contaminated.
Situation 4: Same as Situation 3 except that individual needs new air tank and will
return to Exclusion Zone.
Exhibit SOA-3 shows the layout for Level B contamination.
50-77
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT SOA-3
DECONTAMINATION LAYOUT LEVEL B PROTECTION
Tank Change
CONTAMINATION
REDUCTION
ZONE
EXCLUSION
Outer Glove
Removal
ZONE
Tape
Removal
Boot Cover
&
Glove Wash
Segregated
Equipment
Drop
»- Hotline -»—
Suit/Safety Boot
Wash
Suit/SCBA/Boot/Glove
Rinse
Safety Boot
Removal
SCBA Backpack
Removal
Splash Suit
Removal
Inner Glove
Wash
Inner Glove
Rinse
Face Piece
Removal
Inner Glove
Removal
Inner Clothing
Removal
Reid
Wash
Contamination
Control Une
-•ft 9 ] Redress
SUPPORT
ZONE
SO-7S
-------
DRAFT
A.3 Level C Decontamination
Equipment Worn
The full decontamination procedure outlined is for workers wearing Level C
protection (with taped joints between gloves, boots, and suit). Such protection
consists of
1. One-piece, hooded, chemical-resistant splash suit
2. Canister-equipped full-face mask
3. Hard hat
4. Chemical-resistant boots with steel toe and shank
5. Boot covers
6. Inner and outer gloves
Procedure for Full Decontamination
Station h Segregated Equipment Drop
Deposit equipment used on the site (tools, sampling devices and containers,
monitoring instruments, radios, clipboards, etc.) on plastic drop cloths or in
different containers with plastic liners. Each will be contaminated to a different
degree. Segregation at the drop reduces the probability of cross-contamination.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Containers of various sizes
2. Plastic liners
3. Plastic drop cloths
SO-79
-------
DRAFT
Station 2; Boot Cover and Glove Wash
Scrub outer boot covers and gloves with decon solution or detergent/water solution.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Decon solution
3. Detergent/water solution
4. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
Station 3; Boot Cover and Glove Rinse
Rinse off decon solution from Station 2 using copious amounts of water. Repeat as
many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. High-pressure spray unit
3. Water
-------
DRAFT
Station 5; Boot Cover Removal
Remove boot covers and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
3. Bench or stool
Station 6; Outer-Glove Removal
Remove outer gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 7; Suit/Safety Boot Wash
Thoroughly wash splash suit and safety boots. Scrub with long-handle, soft-bristle
scrub brush and copious amounts of decon solution or detergent/water solution.
Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Decon solution
3. Detergent/water solution
4. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
SO-81
-------
DRAFT
Station 8; Suit/Safety Boot Rinse
Rinse off decon solution or detergent/water solution using copious amounts of
water. Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. High-pressure spray unit
3. Water
*. Two or three long-handle, soft-bristle scrub brushes
Station 9: Canister or Mask Change
If worker leaves Exclusion Zone to change canister (or mask), this is the last step in
the decontamination procedure. Worker's canister is exchanged, new outer glove
and boot covers donned, and joints taped. Worker returns to duty.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Canister (or mask)
2. Tape
3. Boot covers
4. Gloves
Station 10; Safety Boot Removal
Remove safety boots and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
SO-82
-------
DRAFT
3. Bench or stool
4. Boot jack
Station 11: Splash Suit Removal
With assistance of helper, remove splash suit. Deposit in container with plastic
liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Bench or stool
3. Plastic liner
Station 12; Inner-Glove Wash
Wash inner gloves with decon solution or detergent/water solution that will not
harm skin. Repeat as many times as necessary.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Decon solution
2. Detergent/water solution
3. Basin or bucket
Station 13; Inner-Glove Rinse
Rinse inner gloves with water. Repeat as many times as necessary. Necessary
equipment includes the following:
1. Water
2. Basin or bucket
3. Small table
50-83
-------
DRAFT
Station 14; Facepiece Removal
Remove facepiece. Avoid touching face with gloves. Deposit facepiece in
container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 15; Inner-Glove Removal
Remove inner gloves and deposit in container with plastic liner.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (20 to 30 gal)
2. Plastic liners
Station 16; Inner-Clothing Removal
Remove clothing soaked with perspiration. Place in container with plastic liner.
Do not wear inner clothing off the site since there is a possibility small amounts of
contaminants have been transferred in removing fully encapsulating suit.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Container (30 to 50 gal)
2. Plastic liners
-------
DRAFT
Station 17; Field Wash
Shower if highly toxic, skin-corrosive, or skin-absorbable materials are known or
suspected to be present. Wash hands and face if shower is not available.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Water
2. Soap
3. Tables
4. Wash basins or buckets
5. Field showers
Station 18: Redress
Put on clean clothes. A dressing trailer is needed in inclement weather.
Necessary equipment includes
1. Tables
2. Chairs
3. Lockers
k. Clothes
Full Decontamination (Situation 1) and Three Modifications
The preceding description outlines each station that is included in a complete
worst-case decontamination protocol. It is obvious that different sites will present
different hazard levels and thus that site-specific modifications of this protocol
will be required. The following table illustrates the modifications that can be
made in response to a variety of conditions.
SO-85
-------
STATION NUMBER
1 2 3 » 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
2XXXXXXXXX
3X XXXX XXX
f X XXX
Situation 1
The individual entering the CRC is observed to be grossly contaminated or
extremely skin-corrosive substances are known or suspected to be present.
Situation 2
Same as Situation 1 except that individual needs new canister or mask and
will return to Exclusion Zone.
Situation 3
Individual entering the CRC is expected to be minimally contaminated.
Extremely skin-corrosive materials are not present. No outer gloves or boot
covers are worn. Inner gloves are not contaminated.
Situation *»
Same as Situation 3 except that individual needs new canister or mask and
will return to Exclusion Zone.
Exhibit SOA-4 shows the layout for Level C decontamination.
SO-86
-------
EXHIBIT SOA-*
DECONTAMINATION LAYOUT LEVEL C PROTECTION
DRAFT
EXCLUSION
ZONE
Canister or
Mask Change
Outer Glove
Removal
Segregated
Equipment
Drop
—•- Hotline -~—
CONTAMINATION
REDUCTION
ZONE
Suit/Safety
Boot Wash
Suit/Safety Boot
Rinse
Safety Boot
Removal
Splash Suit
Removal
Inner Glove
Wash
Inner Glove
Rinse
Face Piece
Removal
Inner Glove
Removal
Inner Clothing
Removal
Contamination
Control Line
Redress
SUPPORT
ZONE
SO-87
-------
10
-------
DRAFT
MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION MM
2.0 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATOR MM
2.1 DESCRIPTION AND USE MM
2.2 LIMITATIONS MI-6
2.3 NIOSH CRITERIA MI-6
3.0 OXYGEN DETECTOR MI-6
3.1 DESCRIPTION AND USE MI-6
3.2 LIMITATIONS MI-6
3.3 NIOSH CRITERIA MI-6
4.0 COLORIMETRIC TUBES MI-7
4.1 DESCRIPTION AND USE MI-7
4.2 LIMITATIONS MI-7
5.0 RADIATION SURVEY METERS AND DOSIMETERS MI-7
5.1 DESCRIPTION AND USE MI-7
5.2 LIMITATIONS MI-7
5.3 OSHA (GENERAL INDUSTRY) REGULATIONS MI-7
6.0 ORGANIC VAPOR DETECTORS MI-9
6.1 INTRODUCTION MI-9
6.2 OVA MI-11
6.2.1 GAS CHROMATOGRAPH FUNCTIONS MI-11
6.2.2 CALIBRATION MI-11
6.2.3 LIMITATIONS MI-12
6.3 HNU MI-12
6.3.1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATIONS MI-12
6.3.2 CALIBRATION MI-13
6.3.3 SPECIALIZED USES MI-13
6.3.4 ADVANTAGES MI-13
6.4 AID 580 ORGANIC VAPOR METER MI-14
6.4.1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION MI-14
6.4.2 CALIBRATION MI-14
6.4.3 SPECIALIZED USES MI-15
6.4.4 ADVANTAGES MI-15
6.4.5 LIMITATIONS MI-15
6.5 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS MI-16
Ml-ii
-------
DRAFT
CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
SECTION PAGE
7.0 COLLECTION MEDIA AND AIR-SAMPLING PUMPS Ml-17
7.1 USE MI-17
7.2 LIMITATIONS MI-17
8.0 RATIONALE FOR RELATING TOTAL ATMOSPHERIC MI-17
CONCENTRATIONS TO SELECTION OF THE LEVEL
OF PROTECTION
8.1 INTRODUCTION MI-17
8.2 FACTORS FOR CONSIDERATION MI-19
8.3 INSTRUMENT SENSITIVITY MI-20
EXHIBITS
SECTION PAGE
MI-1 INSTRUMENTATION FOR AIR MONITORING MI-2
MI-2 ATMOSPHERIC HAZARD GUIDELINES MI-3
MI-3 FLAMMABLE RANGES OF SELECTED COMPOUNDS MI-5
MI-4 EXTERNAL RADIATION MI-8
MI-5 COMPARISON OF THE OVA AND HNU MI-10
MI-6 SELECTED COLLECTION MEDIA FOR AIR SAMPLING MI-18
MI-7 DECISION GUIDANCE FOR ASSIGNING LEVELS OF
PROTECTION
Ml-iii
-------
DRAFT
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The combustible gas indicator (CGI), oxygen meter, colorimetric tubes, radiation
detector, photoionization detector (PID), and portable gas chromatograph (GC) are
used to qualitatively and quantitatively define airborne chemical and physical
hazards. They can also be used to help identify sampling locations, thus limiting
the number of samples needed to be taken. The portable GC in the gas
chromatographic mode, as well as collection media in conjunction with air-
sampling pumps, are used to characterize and identify specific chemical compounds
present in the air. All equipment described is portable, battery operated, and
intrinsically safe, and is sufficiently rugged for field use (Exhibit MI-1).
The objective for this portion of the course is to discuss the philosophy, use, and
limitations of the above-mentioned pieces of analytical equipment as used in
investigative and remedial response activities, and to use the information derived
from the analytical instrumentation to perform a hazard assessment (Exhibit MI-2).
2.0 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATOR
2.1 Description and Use
A typical CGI determines the level of organic vapors and gases present in an
atmosphere as a percentage of the lower explosive limit (LEL). This is done by
measuring the change in electrical resistance in a Wheatstone bridge circuit. The
LEL is the lowest concentration of a gas or vapor in air by volume that will explode
or burn when there is an ignition source.
The indicator measures from 0 percent to 100 percent of the LEL, 100 percent
being an explosive atmosphere.
MI-1
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-1. INSTRUMENTATION FOR AIR MONITORING
Hazard
Direct Reading
Collection Media
Explosive atmosphere
Oxygen-deficient
atmosphere
Toxic atmosphere
Radioactivity
Combustible gas
indicator
Oxygen meter
Photoionization
detector (PID)
Flame ionization
detector (FID)
with GC option
Colorimetric tubes
Radiation survey
meters
Passive monitors
Not used
Not used
Sampling pumps in
conjunction with
absorption tubes,
filters, impingers
Dosimeters
Film badges
MI-2
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-2. ATMOSPHERIC HAZARD GUIDELINES
Monitoring Equipment
Hazard
Ambient Level
Action
Combustible gas indicator
Explosive
atmosphere
Oxygen concentration meter
Oxygen
Radiation survey
Radiation
< 10% LEL Continue investigation
10%-25% Continue onsite
monitoring with
extreme caution as
higher levels are
encountered.
> 25% LEL Explosion hazard;
withdraw from area
immediately.
< 19.5% Monitor wearing SCBA.
NOTE: Combustible gas
readings are not valid
in atmospheres with
< 19.5% oxygen.
19.5%-25% Continue investigation
with caution. SCBA not
needed, based on
oxygen content only.
> 25.0% Discontinue inspection;
fire hazard potential.
Consult specialist.
< 1 mR/hr Continue investigation.
If radiation is detected
above background levels,
this signifies the
presence of possible
radiation sources; at
this level, more
thorough monitoring is
advisable. Consult with
a health physicist.
MI-3
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-2. ATMOSPHERIC HAZARD GUIDELINES (CONTINUED)
Monitoring Equipment
Hazard Ambient Level
Action
> 10 mR/hr
Colorimetric tubes
NHU photoionizer
Organic and
inorganic
vapors/gases
Organic
vapors/gases
Organic vapor analyzer
Organic
Depends on
species
1) Depends
on
species
2) Total
response
mode
1) Depends
on
species
2) Total
response
mode
Potential radiation
hazard; evacuate site.
Continue monitoring
only upon the advise of
a health physicist.
Consult standard
reference manuals for
air concentrations/
toxicity data.
Consult standard
reference manuals for
air concentrations/
toxicity data.
Consult EPA Standard
Operating Procedures.
Consult standard
reference manuals for
air concentrations/
toxicity data.
Consult EPA Standard
Operating Procedures.
MI-4
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-3. FLAMMABLE RANGES OF SELECTED COMPOUNDS
MI-5
-------
EXHIBIT - 3
FLAMMABLE RANGES OF SELECTED COMPOUNDS
250,000
— 200,000
COMPOUND
CONCENTRATION
(% BY VOLUME)
— 150,000
COMPOUND
CONCENTRATION
(PARTS PER MILLION)
100,000
— 50,000
METHANE GASOLINE ETHANOL
(92 OCTANE)
COMPOUND
THIS CHART ILLUSTRATES THE FLAMMABLE RANGE OF SELECTED COMPOUNDS; THE
LOWEST VALUE REPRESENTS THE LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (L.E.L) 0AND THE
HIGHER VALUE THE UPPER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (U.E.L) (b)
KEY
NOT ENOUGH OXYGEN FOR COMBUSTION
FLAMMABLE RANGE
NOT ENOUGH FUEL FOR COMBUSTION
-------
DRAFT
2.2 Limitations
The CGI cannot be used in the presence of silanes, silicones, silicates, and leaded
gasoline vapors, all of which can destroy the instrument's sensitivity. The CGI does
not indicate if a given atmosphere is toxic. Also, the CGI readings are influenced
by the level of oxygen, and should not be used to determine the presence of organic
vapors in a given atmosphere. The instrument must be calibrated frequently.
2.3 NIOSH Criteria
NIOSH guidelines on the use of the CGI are as follows:
1. 10 Percent LEL—limit activities in area to those that do not generate
sparks; wear non-sparking gear.
2. 20 percent LEL—limit all activities in area.
3.0 OXYGEN DETECTOR
3.1 Description and Use
A typical oxygen detector measures the atmospheric 02 concentration directly by
means of a galvanic cell. Since the readings of the CGI are influenced by the level
of oxygen, oxygen detectors are frequently combined with CGI's.
3.2 Limitations
The readings on the oxygen detector are influenced by the difference from sea
level.
3.3 NIOSH Criteria
Oxygen levels lower than 19.5 percent require the use of supplied-air respirators.
MI-6
-------
DRAFT
4.0 COLORIMETRIC TUBES
4.1 Description and Use
The colorimetric tube and pump measure the concentrations of specific inorganic
and organic vapors and gases that cause a discoloration that is proportional to the
amount of material present.
4.2 Limitations
Specific tubes must be selected before going into field; therefore, it is difficult to
assess unknown atmospheres. There are many interferences. The results can be
erroneous because of cross sensitivity. Response time is relatively slow.
5.0 RADIATION SURVEY METERS AND DOSIMETERS
5.1 Description and Use
Radiation survey meters are used to determine the level of alpha, beta, and gamma
radiation. Dosimeters are used to measure whole-body radiation exposure over a
given period of time (Exhibit MI-4).
5.2 Limitations
Radiation survey meters must only be used by persons who have been trained in the
proper interpretation of their readings. They must be frequently calibrated and
checked. Dosimeters do not give real-time readouts of radiation levels.
5.3 OSHA (General Industry) Regulations
OSHA Regulations for exposure to radiation for any individual in a restricted area
are as follows:
MI-7
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-4. EXTERNAL RADIATION
MI-8
-------
DRAFT
1. Whole Body - 1.25 REM/Calendar quarter average.
2. NOT to exceed 3 REM in any calendar quarter.
Radiation survey meters display incoming geiger counts as mR/hr (milli
Rotegens/hour). It is important to understand the relationship between mR/hr and
REMs (Radiation dose Equivalent in Man).
1 Rotegen = 0.83 to 0.93 RADs (Radiation Absorbed Dose)
(1 RAD is the quantity of radiation required for 100 ergs of energy to be absorbed
by 1 gram of body tissue.)
RADs x QF (quality factor) REMs
QF = 10 for a
1.7 for 6 above 30 keV
1 for 6 below 30 keV
1 for y
A general rule of thumb is that, if a radiation can be ruled out, multiply mR/hr
by 2 to get milli REM/hr.
6.0 ORGANIC VAPOR DETECTORS
6.1 Introduction
The HNU System photoionizer, AID 580, and the Century organic vapor analyzer
(OVA) are used in the field to detect a variety of compounds in air. The three
instruments differ in their modes of operation and in the number and types of
compounds they detect (Exhibit MI-5). Both instruments can be used to detect
leaks of volatile substances in drums and tanks, determine the presence of volatile
compounds in soil and water, make ambient-air surveys, and collect continuous air-
monitoring data. These instruments are valuable tools for helping to decide the
MI-9
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-5 COMPARISON OF THE OVA AND HNU
Parameter
OVA
HNU and AID 580
Response
Application
Detector
Limitations
Calibration gas
Ease of Operation
Detection limits
Response time
Maintenance
Useful range
Service life
Responds to all combustable
organic gases and vapors.
In survey mode, detects total
concentrations of gases and
vapors. In GC mode, identifies
and measures specific
compounds.
Flame ionization detector
Does not respond to inorganic
gases and vapors. No
temperature control.
Methane
Requires experience to
interpret correctly,
especially in GC mode.
0.1 ppm (methane)
2-3 sec (survey mode)
Periodically clean and inspect
particle filters, valve rings,
and burner chamber. Check
calibration and pumping system
for leaks. Recharge battery
after each use.
0-1000 ppm
8 hr; 3 hr with strip chart
recorder.
Responds to many organic
and some inorganic gases
and vapors.
In survey mode, detects
total concentrations of
gases and vapors. Some
identification of compounds
possible if more than one
probe is used.
Photoionization detector.
Does not respond to methane.
Does not detect a compound
if probe has a lower energy
(eV) than compound's
ionization potential.
Benzene (HNU),
Butadiene (580)
Fairly easy to use and
interpret.
0.1 ppm (benzene)
3 sec for 90percent of total
concentration
Clean UV lamp frequently.
Check calibration
regularly. Recharge
battery after each use.
0-2000 ppm
10 hr; 5 hr with strip
chart recorder.
MI-10
-------
DRAFT
levels of protection to be worn, for assisting in determining other safety
procedures, and for determining subsequent monitoring or sampling locations when
personnel are thoroughly trained to operate the instruments and to interpret the
data.
6.2 OVA
The OVA operates in two different modes. In the survey mode, it can determine
the approximate concentration of all detectable species in air. With the gas
chromatograph option, individual components can be detected and measured
independently, with some detection limits as low as a few parts per million. This
instrument can be used to screen for sample locations.
6.2.1 Gas Chromatograph Functions
In the GC mode, a small sample of ambient air is injected into a chromatographic
column and carried through the column by a stream of hydrogen gas. Contaminants
with different chemical structures are retained on the column for different lengths
of time (known as retention times) and hence are detected separately by the flame
ionization detector. A strip chart recorder can be used to record the retention
times, which are then compared to the retention times of a standard with known
chemical constituents. The sample can be injected into the column either from the
air-sampling hose or directly from a gas-tight syringe.
6.2.2 Calibration
The OVA is internally calibrated to methane by the manufacturer. When measuring
methane, it indicates the true concentration. In response to all other detectable
compounds, however, the instrument reading my be higher or lower than the true
concentration. Relative response ratios for substances other than methane are
available. To interpret the readout correctly, it is necessary either to make
calibration charts relating the instrument readings to the true concentration or to
adjust the instrument so that it reads correctly. This is done by turning the 10-
MI-11
-------
DRAFT
turn, gas-select knob, which adjusts the response of the instrument. The knob is
normally set at 300 when calibrated to methane. Secondary calibration to another
gas is done by sampling a known concentration of the gas and adjusting the gas
select knob until the instrument reading equals the true concentration.
6.2.3 Limitations
The OVA has an inherent limitation in that it can detect only organic molecules.
Also, it should not be used at temperatures lower than about 40 F because gases
condense in the pump and column. It has no temperature control, and since
retention times van/ with ambient temperatures for a given column, absolute
determinations of contaminants are difficult. Despite these limitations, the GC
mode can often provide tentative information on the identity and number of
contaminants in air without relying on costly, time-consuming laboratory analysis.
6.3 HNU
The HNU System portable photoionizer detects the concentration of organic gases
as well as a few inorganic gases. The basis for detection is the ionization of
gaseous species. The incoming gas molecules are subjected to ultraviolet (UV)
radiation, which is energetic enough to ionize many gaseous compounds. Each
molecule is transformed into charged-ion pairs, creating a current between two
electrodes. Every molecule has a characteristic ionization potential, which is the
energy required to remove an electron from the molecule, yielding a positively
charged ion and the free electron.
6.3.1 Instrument Configurations
Three probes, each containing a different UV light source, are available for use
with the HNU. Energies are 9.5, 10.2, and 11.7 eV. All three detect many
aromatic and large-molecule hydrocarbons. The 10.2- and 11.7 -eV probes, in
addition, detect some smaller organic molecules and some halogenated
Ml-12
-------
DRAFT
hydrocarbons. The 10.2-eV probe is the most useful for environmental response
work, as it is more durable than the 11.7-eV probe and detects more compounds
than the 9.5-eV probe.
6.3.2 Calibration
The primary HMD calibration gas is benzene. The span potentiometer knob is
turned to 9.8 for benzene calibration. A knob setting of zero increases the
sensitivity to benzene approximately tenfold. As with the OVA, the instrument's
response can be adjusted to give more accurate readings for specific gases and
eliminate the necessity for calibration charts.
6.3.3 Specialized Uses
While the primary use of the HNU is as a quantitative instrument, it can also be
used to detect certain contaminants, or at least to narrow the range of
possibilities. Noting instrument response to a contaminant source with different
probes can eliminate some contaminants from consideration. For instance, a
compound's ionization potential may be such that the 9.5-eV probe produces no
response, but the 10.2- and 11.7-eV probes do elicit a response. This instrument
can also be used for screening sample locations. The HNU does not detect
methane.
6.3.4 Advantages
The HNU is easier to use than the OVA. Its lower detection limit is also in the low
ppm range. The response time is rapid; the meter needle reaches 90 percent of the
indicated concentration in 3 sec.
MI-13
-------
DRAFT
6.4 AID 580 Organic Vapor Meter
The AID 580 Organic Vapor Meter has been designed for measurement of low levels
of most organic vapors in air. The principle of detection is photoionization, the
same as the HNU.
6.4.1 Instrument Configurations
Two lamps, 10.0eV and 11.8eV are available for use on the AID 580. Both of these
lamps are capable of detecting some smaller organic molecules with the 11.8eV
lamp detecting more than 10.0eV. Most applications of the 580 will dictate the use
of the 10.0eV lamp because it is very useful for environmental survey work and it is
more durable than the 11.8eV lamp.
6.4.2 Calibration
The 580 is first supplied with effectively zero air. This simply means that the air
has no contaminants which will elicit a response from the 580. In most cases,
ambient air will be sufficient to perform this calibration step.
When monitoring zero air, the zero adjust on the rear panel of the 580 can be
adjusted so that the readout of the LCDK on the front panel reads 0.00. The 580 is
then presented with a sample of known concentration of butadiene. The Span Pot,
again located on the rear panel is adjusted with a screwdriver for the proper
reading. While carrying out this calibration step, the Sensitivity/Calibrate Pot
should be set at 200. Following this initial calibration to butadiene, various other
concentrations of the calibration gas should be introduced to the instrument. The
readout of the LCD should correspond to the known concentration values. This will
provide a linear check of the instrument.
Ml-14
-------
DRAFT
6.4.3 Specialized Uses
While the primary use of the 580 is a survey instrument, it can be calibrated to
specific compounds to give an exact reading. However, the specific compounds
must be known in advance and specific calibration steps taken. These procedures
are spelled out in detail in the operating manual of the instrument.
The AID 580 may also be used to collect air samples in a media such as a charcoal
tube or air bag. This is possible because the UV energy source of the instrument is
a non-destructive testing method (i.e., the compounds are discharged from the
instrument in tact). Sampling tubes may be connected via the outlet part on the
rear panel of the 580. When utilizing this feature of the instrument, the flow rate
of the air being passed through the sampling media must be known. This will
involve further calibration using a bubble meter so that a quantitative
measurement of the contaminants can be calculated.
6.4.4 Advantages
The AID 580 has a built in audible alarm that can be set from 0 - 1000 ppm. This is
done by simply adjusting the top dial on the front of the instrument. The dial is a
ten-turn select knob with each full turn equal to 100 ppm.
6.4.5 Limitations
As with any photoionization detector, not all compounds are detected, for example
low molecular weight hydrocarbons such as methane, ethane, propane, methyl
alcohol, and some of the freons. Also, not all compounds are detected with the
same sensitivity. Therefore, the results of any survey using this instrument should
be taken as just that, a survey. A zero reading can not be interpreted as a
contaminant-free environment.
MI-15
-------
DRAFT
6.5 General Considerations
These instruments can monitor only certain vapors and gases in air. Many
nonvolatile liquids, toxic solids, particulates, and other toxic gases and vapors
cannot be detected. Because the types of compounds that the HNU, AID 580 and
OVA can potentially detect are only a fraction of the chemicals possibly present on
a site, a zero reading on either instrument does not necessarily signify the absence
of air contaminants.
The instruments are generally not specific, and their response to different
compounds is relative to the calibration gas. Instrument readings may be higher or
lower than the true concentration. This can be an especially serious problem when
monitoring for total contaminant concentrations if several different compounds are
being detected at once. In addition, the response of these instruments is not linear
over the entire detection range. Care must therefore be taken when interpreting
the data. All identifications should be reported as tentative until they can be
confirmed by more precise analysis. Concentrations should be reported in terms of
the calibration gas and span potentiometer knob or gas-select knob setting.
Since the OVA, AID 580, and HNU are small, portable instruments, they cannot be
expected to yield results as accurate as laboratory instruments. They were
originally designed for specific industrial applications. They are relatively easy to
use and interpret when detecting total concentrations of known contaminants in
air, but interpretation becomes more difficult when trying to identify the
components of a mixture. Neither instrument can be used as an indicator for
combustible gases or oxygen deficiency.
The OVA (Model 128) is certified by Factory Mutual to be used in Class I, Division
1, group A, B, C, and D environments. The HNU is certified by Factory Mutual for
use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.
MI-16
-------
DRAFT
7.0 COLLECTION MEDIA AND AIR-SAMPLING PUMPS
7.1 Use
Collection media are used in conjunction with air-sampling pumps to collect and
concentrate air samples for subsequent laboratory analysis (Exhibit MI-6).
7.2 Limitations
There is the possible loss of organic material due to temperature changes,
absorption on container walls, desorption, etc. Since laboratory analysis is
required, the method does not provide a real-time readout of pollutant levels.
8.0 RATIONALE FOR RELATING TOTAL ATMOSPHERIC VAPOR/GAS
CONCENTRATIONS TO SELECTION OF THE LEVEL OF PROTECTION
8.1 Introduction
The following rationale is the suggested operating guide for Superfund and is
excerpted from the Standard Operating Guides, Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response, Hazardous Response Support Division.
The objective of using total atmospheric vapor/gas concentrations for determining
the appropriate Level A, B, or C. In situations where the presence of vapors or
gases is not known, or if present, the individual components are unknown,
personnel required to enter that environment must be protected. Exhibit MI-7
depicts the decision guidance for assigning levels of protection. Until the
constituent substances and corresponding atmospheric concentrations of vapor,
gas, or particulates can be determined and respiratory and/or body protection
related to the toxicological properties of the identified substances, the total
vapor/gas concentration, with judicious interpretation, can be used as a guide for
selecting personnel protection equipment.
MI-17
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-6. SELECTED COLLECTION MEDIA FOR AIR SAMPLING
Pollutant
Collection Medium
Laboratory Analysis
Volatile organic
Particulate
organic
Pesticides
PCBs
Metals
Volatile
inorganic
Particulate
inorganic
Cyanides
Carbon tubes
Tenax tubes
XAD-2 tubes
Silica gel tubes
Glass filter
Florisil tubes
PUPs
Glass filters
Impingers
Glass filters
Membrane filters
Impingers
Reagent solutions
Membrane filter
Glass filter
Filters
Impingers
GC/MS
GC/MS
GC/MS
GC/EC
GC/MS
AA
Wet methods
Wet methods
Wet methods
MI-18
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT MI-7. DECISION GUIDANCE FOR ASSIGNING LEVELS OF PROTECTION
MI-19
-------
EXHIBIT - 7
DECISION GUIDANCE FOR ASSIGNING
LEVELS OF PROTECTION
ADD APRON OR
OTHER APPROPRIATE
CLOTHING
WAIT UNTIL
HAZARDOUS
ATMOSPHERE
DISSIPATES
SPLASH
PROTECTION
NEEDED FOR
INITIAL
NTRY
WEAR
LEVELA
ADO APRON OR
OTHERAPPROPRIATE
CLOTHING
SPLASH
PROTECTION
REQUIRED FOR
INVEST-
GATION
CONDUCT
INVESTIGATION
IN INITIAL
ENTRY PERSONAL
PROTECTION GARB
COMPLETE
INVESTIGATION
WITHOUT
RESPIRATORY
CONDUCT
AIR
MONITORING
GO TO RESPIRATORY
PROTECTION DECISON
LOGIC BASED ON AIR
MONITORING DATA
-------
DRAFT
Although total vapor/gas concentration measurements are useful to a qualified
professional for the selection of protection equipment, caution should be exercised
in interpretation. An instrument does not respond with the same sensitivity to
several vapor/gas contaminants as it does to a single contaminant. Also, since
total vapor/gas field instruments see all contaminants in relation to a specific
calibration gas, the concentration of unknown gases or vapors may be over- or
underestimated.
Suspected carcinogens, particulates, highly hazardous substances, or other
substances that do not elicit an instrument response may be known or believed to
be present. Therefore, the protection level should not be based solely on the total
vapor/gas criterion. Rather, the level should be selected case by case, with special
emphasis on potential exposure and chemical and toxicological characteristics of
the known or suspected material.
8.2 Factors for Consideration
In using total atmospheric vapor/gas concentrations as a guide for selecting a Level
of Protection, a number of other factors should also be considered:
1. The uses, limitations, and operating characteristics of the monitoring
instruments must be recognized and understood. Instruments such as the
HNU System photoionizer, Century OVA, MIRAN infrared
spectrophotometer, AID 580, and others do not respond identically to the
same concentration of a substance or respond to all substances.
Therefore, experience, knowledge, and good judgment must be used to
complement the data obtained with instruments.
2. Other hazards may exist, such as gases not detected by the HNU or OVA
(i.e., phosgene, cyanide, arsenic, chlorine), explosives, flammable
materials, oxygen deficiency, liquid/solid particles, and liquid or solid
chemicals.
MI-20
-------
DRAFT
3. Vapors/gases with very high toxicities at low concentrations could be
present.
4. The risk to personnel entering an area must be weighed against the need
for entering. Although this assessment is largely a value judgment, it
requires a conscientious balancing of the variables involved and the risk to
personnel against the need to enter an unknown environment.
5. The knowledge that suspected carcinogens or substances extremely toxic
or destructive to skin are present or suspected to be present (which may
not be reflected in the total vapor/gas concentration) requires an
evaluation of factors such as the potential for exposure, chemical
characteristics of the material, limitations of instruments, and other
considerations specific to the incident.
6. What needs to be done on the site must be evaluated. Depending on the
total atmospheric vapor concentrations, Level C protection may be judged
adequate; however, tasks such as moving drums, opening containers, and
bulking of materials, which increase the probability of liquid splashes or
the generation of vapors, gases, or particulates, may require a higher
level of protection.
7. Before any respiratory protective apparatus is issued, a respiratory
protection program must be developed and implemented according to
recognized standards (ANSI Z88.2-1980).
8.3 Instrument Sensitivity
Although the measurement of total vapor/gas concentrations can be a useful
adjunct to professional judgment in the selection of an appropriate level of
protection, caution should be used in the interpretation of the readout of the
measuring instrument. The response of an instrument to a gas or vapor cloud
containing two or more substances does not provide the same sensitivity as
MI-21
-------
DRAFT
measurements involving the individual, pure constituents. Hence, the instrument
readout may overestimate or underestimate the concentration of an unknown
composite cloud. This same type of inaccuracy could also occur in measuring a
single unknown substance with the instrument calibrated to a different substance.
The idiosyncrasies of each instrument must be considered in conjunction with the
other parameters in selecting the protection equipment needed.
Using the total vapor/gas concentration to determine levels of protection should
provide protection against concentrations greater than the readout of the
instrument. However, when the upper limits of Levels C and B are approached,
serious consideration should be given to selecting a higher level of protection.
Cloud constituents must be identified as rapidly as possible and levels of protection
based on the toxic properties of the specific substances identified.
MI-22
-------
11
-------
DRAFT
TOXICOLOGY/FIRST AID CHAPTER
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION TOX-1
1.1 DEFINITIONS TOX-1
1.2 TOXIC EXPOSURES AS A FUNCTION OF DAILY LIFE TOX-2
1.3 DOSE-RESPONSE RELATIONSHIP TOX-3
1.3.1 MEASUREMENT OF RESPONSE TOX-3
1.3.2 DOSE-RESPONSE TERMS TOX-5
1.3.3 USE OF DOSE-RESPONSE RELATIONSHIP TOX-8
1.3.4 SHORTCOMINGS OF DOSE-RESPONSE DATA TOX-11
1.4 FACTORS AFFECTING DOSE-RESPONSE RELATIONSHIP TOX-14
1.4.1 EXPOSURE TOX-14
1.4.2 SEX TOX-14
1.4.3 AGE TOX-16
1.4.4 SYNERGISM, ANTAGONISM, AND POTENTIATION TOX-16
1.4.5 GENETIC CHARACTERISTICS TOX-17
1.4.6 SPECIES VARIATION TOX-17
1.5 TOXIC EFFECTS TOX-18
1.5.1 TOXIC RESPONSES OF THE CNS TOX-19
1.5.2 TOXIC RESPONSES OF THE LIVER TOX-24
1.5.3 TOXIC RESPONSES OF THE KIDNEY TOX-30
1.5.4 TOXIC RESPONSES OF THE EYE TOX-31
1.5.5 TOXIC RESPONSES OF THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM TOX-32
1.5.6 TOXIC RESPONSES OF THE BLOOD TOX-35
1.5.7 TOXIC RESPONSES OF THE REPRODUCTIVE SYSTEM TOX-37
1.6 ACCEPTABLE EXPOSURES TOX-39
1.6.1 TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGES (TWAs) TOX-40
1.6.2 TLVs DESIGNATED WITH "SKIN" NOTATION TOX-41
1.6.3 EXCURSIONS (STEL, TLV-C) TOX-41
1.6.4 MIXTURE TLV TOX-42
1.6.5 MINERAL DUST AND NUISANCE DUST TLV TOX-43
1.6.6 PHYSICAL AGENTS TOX-43
2.0 CARCINOGENS TOX-44
2.1 DEFINITIONS TOX-44
2.2 DNA AS A TARGET FOR CARCINOGENS TOX-46
2.3 "CAUSES" OF CANCER TOX-46
TOX-ii
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBITS
NUMBER PAGE
TOX-1 HYPOTHETICAL RESPONSE OF A GIVEN SPECIES TO TOX-4
A GIVEN DOSE
TOX-2 TYPICAL DOSE-RESPONSE RELATIONSHIP TOX-6
TOX-3 DOSE-RESPONSE TEST TOX-7
TOX-4 TOXICITY RATING CHART TOX-9
TOX-5 COMPARISON OF EFFECTIVE DOSE AND LETHAL TOX-10
DOSE RESPONSE CURVES
TOX-6 CALCULATION OF A TLV ON THE BASIS OF A TOX-12
DOSE-RESPONSE CURVE
TOX-7 DOSE-RESPONSE CURVES OF TWO SUBSTANCES TOX-13
TOX-8 CLASSIFICATION OF FACTORS INFLUENCING TOXICITY TOX-15
TOX-9 CLASSIFICATION OF NEUROTOXICANTS BY SITE TOX-21
OF PRIMARY ACTION
TOX-10 LIVER DAMAGE BY SOME ACUTE HEPATOTOXIC TOX-26
CHEMICALS
TOX-11 ORGANELLES AFFECTED BY VARIOUS HEPATOTOXINS TOX-28
TOX-12 PULMONARY DISEASES AND SOME SELECTED TOX-34
OCCUPATIONALLY INHALED AGENTS
TOX-13 CLASSES OF CARCINOGENIC CHEMICALS TOX-45
TOX-iv
-------
DRAFT
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Definitions
The following definitions will be useful in understanding the remainder of the
chapter:
Toxicology
The qualitative and especially the quantitative study of the injurious effects of
chemical and physical agents, as observed in alteration and response in living
systems; it includes the application of the findings of these studies to the
evaluation of safety and to the prevention of injury to man and to all forms of
useful life.
Poison
Any substance which, when ingested, inhaled, or absorbed, or when applied to,
injected into, or developed within the body in relatively small amounts, by its
chemical action may cause damage to structure or disturbance of function.
Dose
The quantity of a substance to which an organism is exposed. The dose determines
whether effects of a substance are toxic, nontoxic, or beneficial. All substances
are poisons; there is none which is not a poison. The right dose differentiates a
poison and a remedy.
Toxicity
The quality of being poisonous, especially the degree of potency of a toxic microbe
or of a poison. It is expressed by a fraction indicating the ratio between the
smallest amount that will cause an animal's death and the weight of that animal.
TOX-1
-------
DRAFT
Threshold Limit Value (TLV)
The airborne concentration of a substance with specified conditions (time-weighted
average, short-term exposure, or ceiling value) under which it is believed that
nearly all workers may be exposed day after day without adverse effects.
Permissable Exposure Limit (PEL)
The airborne concentration of a substance set by OSHA as an enforcable standard
which may not be exceeded.
1.2 Toxic Exposures as a Function of Daily Life
Everyone is exposed to toxic materials in daily life in a variety of ways:
1. Deliberate exposures such as:
a. Cigarette smoke
b. Drugs (medicinal and recreational)
c. Household aerosols
2. Unintentional exposures such as:
a. Cigarette smoke (passive smoking)
b. Air pollution
c. Occupational exposure
The deliberate exposure can be controlled; for the most part, the unintentional
exposure is beyond the individual's ability to control. The exception is the
occupational exposure, it is the employer's legal, as well as moral, obligation to
provide the worker with safe breathing air.
TOX-2
-------
DRAFT
1.3 Dose-Response Relationship
A particular toxicity test exhibits a dose-response relationship when there is a
consistent mathematical relationship between the proportion of individuals
responding and a given dose for a given exposure period. For example, the number
of mortalities increases as the dose of a chemical given to a group of organisms
increases.
1.3.1 Measurement of Response
Different species of test organisms differ in how they respond to a specific
chemical. In addition, there are variations in response to a given dose within a
group of test organisms of the same species. Typically, this intraspecies variation
follows a normal (Gaussian) distribution when the number of organisms responding
is plotted against the degree of response for a given dose (Exhibit TOX-1).
Statistical techniques exist for describing normal distribution:
1. Two-thirds of the test population will exhibit a response that is within one
standard deviation of the mean response.
2. Ninety-five percent lie within two standard deviations of the mean.
3. Ninety-nine percent lie within three standard deviations of the mean.
Thus, a relatively small number of experimental groups can be tested, and
statistical techniques can be used to define the probable response of the average
organism to a given dose. Graphically, this average response is depicted as a point,
with bars used to exhibit one standard deviation above and below the average.
TOX-3
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-1
HYPOTHETICAL RESPONSE OF A GIVEN SPECIES TO A GIVEN DOSE
«. °a
vi c
No reaction
Extreme reaction
TOX-4
-------
DRAFT
Typically, frequency-response curves are not used. Instead, cumulative dose
response curves are utilized, which depict the summation of the frequency response
curves over the range of doses. A further refinement is made by plotting the
cumulative response versus the logarithm of the dose, which yields plots that are
generally linear. Several basic relationships can be readily identified from the
plots (Exhibit TOX-2). A dose is often described as either a lethal dose (LD) in a
test where the response is mortality, or an effective dose (ED) in a test where the
response is some other observable effect.
Constructing an ultimate dose-response curve enables the identification of doses
that affect a given percent of the exposed population (e.g., the ED^Q is thai dose
at which there is an observable effect in 50 percent of the test organisms).
1.3.2 Dose-Response Terms
The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) defines a
number of dose-response terms (Exhibit TOX-3) in the Registry of Toxic
Substances (1980, p. xxiv):
1. Toxic dose low (TDLO): the lowest dose of a substance introduced by any
route other than inhalation, over any given period of time, and reported to
produce any toxic effect in humans or carcinogenic, neoplastigenic, or
teratogenic effects in animals or humans.
2. Toxic concentration low (TC(_0): the lowest concentration of a substance
in air to which humans or animals have been exposed for any given period
of time that has produced any toxic effect in humans or carcinogenic,
neoplastigenic, or teratogenic effects in animals or humans.
3. Lethal dose low (LD|_O): the lowest dose, other than 1050, of substance
introduced by any route other than inhalation which has been reported to
have caused death in humans or animals.
TOX-5
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-2
TYPICAL DOSE-RESPONSE RELATIONSHIP
§><=
en ws
II
Dose
TOX-6
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-3. DOSE-RESPONSE TEST
Category
TDLo
TCLO
Exposure
Time
Acute or
chronic
Acute or
chronic
Route of
Exposure
All except
inhalation
Inhalation
Toxic
Human
Any non-
lethal
Any non-
lethal
Effects
Animal
Carcinogenic,
neoplastigenic.
tumorigentic,
teratogenic
Carcinogenic,
neoplastigenic,
tumorigenic,
teratogenic
Acute or
chronic
Acute
Acute or
chronic
Acute
All except
inhalation
All except
inhalation
Inhalation
Inhalation
Death
Not
applicable
Death
Not
applicable
Death
Death
(statistically
determined)
Death
Death
(statistically
determined)
TOX-7
-------
DRAFT
4. Lethal dose (LDX): a calculated dose of a substance which is expected to
cause the death of x-percent of defined experimental animal population.
Fifty-percent (LD50) is usually used.
5. Lethal concentration low (LC|_0): the lowest concentration of a substance
in air, other than \-C$Q, which has been reported to have caused death in
humans or animals.
6. Lethal concentration (LCX): a calculated concentration of a substance in
air, exposure to which for a specified length of time is expected to cause
the death of x-percent of defined experimental animal population. Fifty-
percent (LC5o) is usually used.
1.3.3 Use of Dose-Response Relationship
Comparing the LD5Q of chemicals in animals gives a relative ranking of potency or
toxicity of each. For example, DDT (LD5Q for rats = 113 milligrams per kilogram)
would be considered more toxic than ethyl alcohol (LD5Q for rats = 1400 milligrams
per kilogram). Using this LD$Q and multiplying by 70 kilograms (average mass of
man) gives a rough extrapolation to humans, assuming they are as sensitive as the
species tested to the substance tested.
The LD5Q serves only as a rough estimate of the toxic potential of a substance, but
it is easy to compute the approximate potency and hence the approximate risk
associated with a substance (Exhibit TOX-4).
Dose-response curves are useful when the response is mild, such as odor or tearing,
rather than severe, such as coma. The difference between the curves provides the
margin of safety (Exhibit TOX-5), which is usually defined as equal to
Toxic
Nontoxic
TOX-8
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-4 TOXICITY RATING CHART
Toxicity Rating
or Class
Oral Acute 1050
for Rats
Extremely toxic
Highly toxic
Moderately toxic
Slightly toxic
Practically nontoxic
1 mg/kg or less (dioxin, botulin toxin)
1 to 50 mg/kg (strychnine)
50 to 500 mg/kg (DDT)
0.5 to 15 g/kg (morphine)
5 to 15 g/kg (ethyl alcohol)
TOX-9
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-5
COMPARISON OF EFFECTIVE DOSE AND LETHAL DOSE RESPONSE CURVES
IOO%T-
1.1
g. «
J 1 50%
ED
50
ED
50
Dose
Key: ED = effective dose (dose response for smell)
LD = lethal dose (dose response for mortality)
TOX-10
-------
DRAFT
Another ratio sometimes used is
Toxic dose-|
Nontoxic dosegg
This gives a smaller margin of safety than the previous ratio, but it is more
realistic.
A TLV is an airborne concentration of a substance in the workplace to which
workers can presumably be exposed without undesirable effects. Using the lower
end of the dose-response curve (LD, TD, or no effect) and a 1/10 or 1/100
protection factor permits assigning a TLV (Exhibit TOX-6).
1.3.4 Shortcomings of Dose-Response Data
Several shortcomings must be recognized in a dose-response data. One is that an
TD5Q or 1050 is a single value and does not indicate the shape of the curve—that
is, what the dose-response interval is, which is as important as how high or low the
LDgQ is. Thus, comparing these values can give the wrong impression
(Exhibit TOX-7).
Most 1050 data are for an acute (single dose) exposure rather than a chronic
(continuous, long-term) exposure. Data cannot be extrapolated if the disposition of
the chemical (that is, bioaccumulation, metabolism, excretion) or the target is not
known. For example, carcinogens are unsually more dangerous if the dose is
administered over several exposures instead of in one single exposure.
A third shortcoming is that usually there is little information to guide the choice of
the animal data that mimic human exposure. Are humans less or more sensitive
than the test species? For example, in human studies arsenic has been found a
carcinogen, while in animal studies it has not.
TOX-11
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-6
CALCULATION OF A TLV ON THE BASIS OF A DOSE-RESPONSE CURVE
oc jo
I TLV
No Effect
Dose
TOX-12
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-7
DOSE-RESPONSE CURVES OF TWO SUBSTANCES
S .1
Dose
(Chemical A is assumed to be more toxic than Chemical B based on
ID50, but at lower doses the situation is reversed. At LD20
Chemical B is more toxic than Chemical A.)
TOX-13
-------
DRAFT
In chronic human exposure, the best guide is to extrapolate chronic animal data
that give a "no effect dose". Usually this dose is not found in the literature, and
thus the dose-response curve is needed.
1.4 Factors Affecting Dose-Response Relationship
Man, being a complex biologic system, does not respond uniformly to a given dose
of a toxic substance. There are a variety of modifying factors. A classification of
these factors is presented as Exhibit TOX-8, and certain major factors are
discussed in the following sections.
1.4.1 Exposure
Tcxicity to humans and other mammals may vary depending on the route of
exposure. Material may be more or less toxic by a given route depending on the
modification of the chemical, if any, through biotransformations. These will be
discussed in more detail in Section 1.5. Two major entry routes, namely the lungs
and the skin, are the most likely ways for chemical toxicants to enter the body.
1.4.2 Sex
Some substances may be more toxic to one sex than the other. For example,
women have a larger percent of fat in their total body weight, which means they
can accumulate more fat-soluble substances than men. Women also have different
susceptibilities to teratogenic chemicals. Some cancers and other diseases are sex-
linked. Animal data also shows sex-linked differences.
TOX-14
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-8. CLASSIFICATION OF FACTORS INFLUENCING TOXICITY
Type
Examples
Factors related to chemical
Factors related to exposure
Factors related to person exposed
Factors related to environment
Composition (salt, free base, etc.); physical
characteristics (particle size, liquid, solid,
etc.); physical properties (volatility, solubility,
etc.); presence of impurities; breakdown
products; carrier.
Dose; concentration; route of exposure (inges-
tion, skin absorption, injection, inhalation);
duration.
Heredity; immunology; nutrition; hormones;
age; sex; diseases.
Carrier (air, water, food, soil); additional
chemicals present (synergism, antagonism);
temperature; air pressure.
TOX-15
-------
DRAFT
1.4.3 Age
Older people have different blood systems, musculature, metabolism, and excretory
patterns than younger people, which change the disposition and toxic effects of
chemicals. Also, children are not small adults. For example, they have higher
respiration rates and different susceptibilities (less sensitive to stimulants of the
central nervous system but more sensitive to depressants), metabolism, and
excretory patterns.
1.4.4 Synergism, Antagonism, and Potentiation
Some combinations of chemicals produce different effects from those attributed to
each individually:
1. Synergists
Chemicals that, when combined, cause a greater than additive effect.
2. Potentiation
Potentiation is a type of synergism where the potentiator is a chemical
not usually considered to be toxic, but it increases the toxicity of other
chemicals.
3. Antagonists
Chemicals that, when combined, lessen the predicted effect. There are
four types of antagonists.
a. Functional
Produces opposite effects of the normal physiologic function.
TOX-16
-------
DRAFT
b. Chemical
Reacts in a way that affects the toxicity of another chemical. For
example, phosphate reduces lead absorption in the gastrointestinal
tract by forming insoluble lead phosphate.
c. Dispositional
Alters absorption, metabolism, distribution, or excretion. For
example, some alcohols use the same enzymes in their metabolism.
Ethanol is more readily metabolized than methanol, so when both are
present, methanol is not metabolized and can be excreted before
forming formaldehyde. Another dispositional antagonist is Antabuse
which, when administered to alcoholics, inhibits the metabolism of
acetaldehyde, giving the patient a more severe, prolonged hangover.
d. Receptor
Occurs when a relatively nontoxic chemical binds to the same tissue
receptor as a toxic chemical and thereby lowers the toxic effect of
the second chemical.
1.4.5 Genetic Characteristics
People are not borne genetically equal. Some lack genes which produce enzymes
that can alter the toxicities of some chemicals. For example, when people with
GGPD enzyme deficiency are given aspirin or certain antibiotics, they are likelier
than normal people to suffer damage to their red blood cells.
1.4.6 Species Variation
The physiologic differences among various animal species lead to the "Catch 22" of
toxicology. Animals are used as models to study the mechanisms of toxicity of
TOX-17
-------
DRAFT
chemicals; therefore, the proper selection of test animals requires knowing which
one most closely resembles humans with respect to the chemical of interest. The
goal of animal studies is to predict chemical effects on humans. However,
selecting the right animal requires knowledge of the fate of the chemical in
humans (the goal), as well as its fate in various animals.
1.5 Toxic Effects
Toxic chemicals act on different organ systems. The various effects are:
1. Local
Certain chemicals cause injury to the upper respiratory tract or to the
lungs. Many chemicals can produce lung disease.
2. Organotoxic
Organotoxic chemicals are those that are absorbed into the blood stream
and travel to a specific organ where they do their damage. Examples
would be central nervous system depressants such as methanol or ethanol,
hepatotoxins such as chlorinated hydrocarbons, or hematopoietic poisons
such as benzene.
3. Asphyxiant
Asphyxiants fall into two classes: gases that are present in high enough
concentrations to dilute the oxygen content of respired air to where
serious deleterious effects can be observed, and chemicals such as cyanide
or carbon monoxide, which prevent the body from receiving an adequate
oxygen supply.
TOX-18
-------
DRAFT
4. Irritant
Certain chemicals irritate the air passages and can cause a pulmonary
edema. Examples are chlorine gas and hydrogen fluoride.
Bronchoconstriction and chronic pulmonary disease can result from the
inhalation of a variety of materials that appear to act wholly or partly
through an allergic response. Many respiratory allergic reactions are
attributable to dusts, baceterial contaminants, or spores. However, some
chemicals produce the same type of response. One example is toluene
diisocyanate (TDI), which can produce an allergic reaction when inhaled.
6. Carcinogenic
Many chemicals are suspected of causing cancer in man. This topic will
be discussed in detail in another section of this manual.
A discussion of toxic effects on specific organs or tissues follows.
1.5.1 Toxic Responses of the CNS
The CNS is defined as that part of the nervous system in vertebrates which consists
of the brain and the spinal cord. It receives environmental input through the
sensory nerves and responds by sending impulses through the motor nerves to the
muscles. The CNS serves the purpose of supervising and coordinating activities of
the entire nervous system, and as such is vital for normal function and survival.
The CNS is protected from a large number of toxic materials by the so-called
blood-brain barrier. The evidence for the existence of this barrier is based upon
numerous observations that some agents which may enter and affect other soft
body tissues such as the liver, kidney, and muscle, fail to reach the brain. Highly
TOX-19
-------
DRAFT
polar compounds are in general the most readily excluded. However, this
preferential exclusion does not exist for all substances, especially the non-polar,
lipid soluble compounds. This barrier is not so well established in children as in
adults. A good example is inorganic lead salts, which may accumulate to toxic
concentrations in the CNS of children, whereas they may instead cause
development of marked adverse effects in the peripheral nervous system in adults
(Norton, 1980).
Two general types of CNS toxicity may result from exposure to toxic materials:
(1) structural toxicity and (2) functional toxicity. Both may be produced by direct
contact with a chemical toxicant or by secondary effects such as anoxia ( a
diminished supply of oxygen).
There are several types of functional changes which can occur as a result of
physiological damage to the CNS. These include:
1. Symbol Formation
Impaired memory or learning.
2. Sensory-motor Integration
a. Impaired life support systems such as eating, reproduction, and
respiration.
b. Impaired voluntary and involuntary movement.
3. Emotional Responses
Emotional instability and psychosis.
Neurotoxicants can be classified also by their primary actions, according to the
following types: (See Exhibit TOX-9)
TOX-20
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-9. CLASSIFICATION OF NEUROTOXICANTS BY
SITE AND TYPE OF PRIMARY ACTION
Agent
Anoxin
(Type 1)
Myelin
(Type 2)
Peripheral Nerves
(Types 3,4,5)
Localized CNS
(Type 6)
Acetylpyridine
Alcohol(s)3
Azide
Carbon disulfide
Carbon monoxide
Cyanide
DDT
Hexachlorophene
Lead (inorganic)
child
adult
Mercury (organic)
Nitrogen trichloride
Organophosphates
a Exposure to ethanol or methanol may involve metabolism, which enhances the
activity of other agents.
TOX-21
-------
DRAFT
1. Anoxic Response
Neurons and astrocytes (gray matter) may be damaged, and responses will
vary depending on which of the three types of anoxia is responsible.
Anoxic Anoxia is caused by inadequate oxygen supply in the presence of
adequate blood flow, which can result from direct interference with
respiration by a toxicant. Neuromuscular blocking agents and compounds
which interfere with the oxygen-carrying capacity may cause this
response. Even if adequate oxygen is restored after such events as
cardiovascular failure, neurons of the CNS can be destroyed without death
of the individual.
Ischemic anoxia causes a decrease in arterial blood pressure so that the
brain does not receive enough oxygen. The blood supply stagnates, leading
to accumulation of metabolites such as lactic acid, ammonia, and
inorganic phosphate. This type of anoxia can occur during cardiac arrest
or with extreme hypotension from vascular dilation.
Cytotoxic anoxia is caused by interference with cell metabolism in the
presence of both adequate oxygen and blood supply. The oligodendroglia
rather than the neurons are the cells are most greatly affected by this
process, which can occur during hypoglycemia (excess insulin) or in the
presence of metabolic inhibitors such as cyanide, azide, or dinitrophenol.
The damage to the CNS as a result of anoxia depends primarily on the
extent of neuronal death. Neurons are differentiated cells which do not
divide and cannot be replaced. However, there is an excess of neurons so
that normal function may be restored after many nonfatal neurotoxic
experiences. Some permanent loss of function will occur when the cell
destruction proceeds beyond a critical number. If cell death does not
occur, the neurotoxic reaction will last only until the toxic material is
removed, metabolized, or until the altered cell constituents have been
regenerated.
TOX-22
-------
DRAFT
The CNS cells are deficient in their ability to use anaerobic metabolism
and can therefore be greatly damaged under conditions of a reduced
oxygen supply. When this occurs, there may be cellular swelling and cell
organelle disorientation which will be accompanied by decreased
cytoplasmic pH, decreased activity of oxidative enzymes, and serious loss
in the capacity to synthesize protein. During anoxia, the cell membrane
integrity is lost and edema (fluid accumulation and swelling) develops
rapidly. The CNS cell type most seriously affected is the neuron, which
may be damaged within minutes after oxygen ceases to flow to the brain.
Some neurons will die even before oxygen or glucose transport stops.
2. Damage to Myelin
Substances which effect the Schwann cells and oligodendrocyte may cause
damage to the myelin sheath surrounding the neurons. If the central
white matter (CNS) is involved, encephalopathy will occur and if
peripheral cells are damaged, polyneuritis will develop.
3. Damage to Peripheral Axons
In addition to the myelin damage just described, there can be secondary
axonic degeneration, damage at the myoneural junction, or damage to the
dorsal root ganglion.
TOX-23
-------
DRAFT
4. Primary Damage to the Peripheral Neuron Cell Body
Damage to this structure impairs normal function of the entire neuron
because it is the main site of protein synthesis.
5. Damage at the Neuromuscular Junction of the Motor Nerve
Damage at this site affects pre- and postsynaptic binding, which includes
the activity of cholinesterase. This site is especially vulnerable because
it is not protected by the myelin sheath or the brain-blood barrier (i.e.,
substances diffusing through capillaries of the skeletal muscle reach this
site directly).
6. Localized CNS Lesions
Toxic compounds may cause these lesions to occur in regions that are not
protected by the brain-blood barrier and that may have unique
biochemical specilization.
1.5.2 Toxic Responses of the Liver
The liver has a major role in response to chemical toxicants because of its
capability to carry out numerous detoxifying biotransformations. It has the
capability, for example, to render many lipophilic materials into water soluble
forms that can be excreted in the urine or feces. It is especially active in
oxidative transformation and in the production of esterified forms of potentially
toxic organic substances It may, however, produce toxic metabolites from
otherwise inactive substances, which may lead to either liver injury or to injury of
other organs and tissues. Liver injury is by no means a single entity and the
consequence of damage can only be assessed when the precise nature of the injury
is defined.
TOX-24
-------
DRAFT
The period of exposure and the concentration of the toxic agent are important for
determining the type of lesion produced by a given substance. After acute toxic
exposure, one generally observes lipid accumulation in the hepatocytes, cellular
necrosis, or a malfunction of the hepatobiliary system. On the other hand, chronic
and low level exposures may cause cirrhotic (hardening due to excessive connective
tissue) or neoplastic (cancer) transformations. The injury to the liver may be
either reversible or permanent. Since there is heterogeneity among cell types in
the liver with regard to their function, it only stands to reason that the hepatotoxic
(toxic to liver) response may occur by a variety of mechanisms.
1.5.2.1 Acute Hepatic Damage
Chemically induced acute injury may have a variety of different morphological
manifestations. Fatty liver and necrosis (degenerative processes leading to cell
death) may be produced. The necrosis may affect small groups of parenchymal
cells, groups of cells within defined zones of the liver (focal necrosis), or almost all
of the cells within a liver lobule (massive necrosis). Likewise, lipid accumulation
may be confined to small areas or zones, or more generally distributed. Classical
damage caused by halogenated hydrocarbons, carbon tetrachloride and chloroform
results in both fatty liver and necrosis. Other chemicals such as tannic acid may
cause only necrotic manifestations. Exhibit TOX-10 (modified data from Plaa,
1980) gives some examples of acute hepatotoxic chemicals.
1.5.2.2 Chronic Hepatic Damage
Chronic exposures may result in very significant alterations in the total liver
structure. There can be variations in the types of cirrhosis, and either or both
degerative and proliferative (all division) changes of different sorts.
Carcinogenesis (production of cancer) is yet another manifestation.
1.5.2.3 Types of Hepatitis (Liver Injury)
The two types of hepatitis and the characteristics thereof are as follows:
TOX-25
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-10. LIVER DAMAGE BY SOME ACUTE
HEPATOTOXIC CHEMICALS
Agent Necrosis Fatty Liver
Carbon Tetrachloride + +
Chloroform + +
Bromobenzene + +
Dimethylnitrosamine + +
Aflatoxin BI + +
Tannic Acid + +
Ethionine
Tetracycline
Ethanol - +
TOX-26
-------
DRAFT
1. Toxic hepatitis
a. Production of distinct lesions.
b. Dose-related production of lesions or severity of damage.
c. Lesions appearing after a predictable, usually short, latent period
(period with no obvious structure or activity changes).
2. Drug-associated hepatitis
a. Effect cannot be produced in experimental animals.
b. Effects not dose-dependent.
c. No latent period.
d. Few individuals in exposed population affected.
e. Often involves hypersensitivity (allergic response).
f. Considerable variation in lesion expression among different
individuals.
1.5.2.4 Sites of Cell Injury
Hepatotoxic chemicals are capable of causing injury to liver cells at a variety of
subcellular sites. These sites or organelles are among those which are affected:
plasma membrane, endoplasmic reticulum, mitochondria, lysosomes, and nucleus.
Exhibit TOX-11 lists a few hepatotoxic compounds and the organelle which they
affect. It should be mentioned that data on carbon tetrachloride (CCI4) has been
of major significance in defining the nature of hepatic injury. Carbon tetrachloride
TOX-27
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-11. ORGANELLES AFFECTED BY
VARIOUS HEPATOTOXINS
Cell Structure
Agent
Plasma membrane
Endoplasmic reticulum
Mitochondria
Lysosomes
Nucleus
Carbon tetrachloride
Carbon tetrachloride
Dimethylnitrosamine
Phosphorous
Tannic acid
Carbon tetrachloride
Phosphorous
Hydrazine
Dimethylnitrosamine
Carbon tetrachloride
Pyrrolizidine alkaloids
Pyrrolizidine alkaloids
Dimethylnitrosamine
Hydrazine
Aflatoxin B-|
Tannic acid
TOX-28
-------
DRAFT
affects the cell membrane, altering its permeability, and diminishes activity of
Krebs cycle enzymes. Oxidative phosphorization is also uncoupled. Some evidence
(Recknagel and Ghoshal, 1966) shows that the lipid structure or microsomes derived
from the endoplasmic reticulum are • affected by 0014. They proposed that
peroxidative decomposition of the lipids in this structure occurs during the early
stages of intoxication. Present evidence shows that CC1-4 is biotransformed to
produce chloroform and C02-
1.5.2.5 Mechanisms of Hepatic Injury
Mechanisms by which hepatic injury may occur are: (1) lipid accumulation, (2)
inhibition or alteration of protein synthesis, (3) lipid peroxidation, (4) necrosis (cell
degeneration and death), (5) cholestasis (involving bile products), (6) cirrhosis
(characterized by collagen distributed throughout the liver), and (7) carcinogensis
(a series of changes leading to hepatic cancer).
Before completing this discussion it should be noted that hepatic enzymes, such as
cytochrome P-450/mixed function oxidases (MFO), may convert a variety of
chemical substances into metabolic forms which may react with the cell's
chromosomes (genotoxic metabolites) or with other structures previously
mentioned. Typically, this results from a chemical being activated to an
electrophilic form by an MFO in an attempt to enhance its excretion. The
electrophile is now capable of reacting with nacleophilic species present in the
cell, including many of the components of DNA. Alteration of DNA in this manner
is felt to be a major function in mutagenesis. There are also compounds to which
individuals may be exposed that can potentiate the action of other agents. For
example, consumption of or exposure to ethanol increases an individual's
susceptibility to halogenated hydrocarbons. Those halogenated hydrocarbons whose
toxicities are increased by ethanol include carbon tetrachloride, chloroform,
trichloroethylene, and 1,1,2-trichloroethane (Klaassen and Plaa, 1967). Other
aliphatic alcohols such as methanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, sec-butanol, and tert-
butanol also exert potentiating effects on the acute toxicity of CCI3 (Cornish and
Adefuin, 1967). The potent teratogen, 2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD)
TOX-29
-------
DRAFT
has the capability of potentiating carcinogenic activity of 3-methylcholanthrene in
rodents that otherwise fail to develop liver tumors, and it increases the incidence
of tumors substantially in susceptible animals (Kouri, Schechtman, and Nebert,
1980). Although each type of potentiating effect should be considered to operate
through a variety of mechanisms, the enhancement can frequently be attributed to
stimulation of a specific set of enzymes or by altering the rate at which an agent
may penetrate,
1.5.3 Toxic Responses of the Kidney
The kidney is an organ likely to have considerable exposure to toxic chemicals that
may enter the body. About 25 percent of the heart's blood flow output reaches the
kidney and about 1/3 of the plasma water reaching the kidney is filtered (Hook,
1980), so that approximately 98 percent of the salt and water is reabsorbed. Since
the blood flow is very high and because reabsorption from the glomerular filtrate is
also high, materials remaining in the urine may be concentrated in this tubule.
Thus, a potential renal toxicant may also be concentrated in the kidney. As a
consequence, the kidney may be highly susceptible to systemic toxicants. The
kidney also carries out numerous metabolic functions, some of which are unique.
The following agents are some specific nephrotoxins (kidney toxins):
1 Heavy Metals
Heavy metals are especially toxic to the kidneys. At low doses,
glucosuria, amino-aciduria, and polyuria may occur whereas increased
concentrations lead to renal necrosis, anuria, increased blood urea
nitrogen, and death. Mercury, chromium, and uranium toxicity to the
kidneys are well documented, and other metals have been demonstrated as
nephrotoxic.
TOX-30
-------
DRAFT
2. Halogenated Hydrocarbons
Hydrocarbons such as carbon tetrachloride and chloroform are both
hepatotoxic and nephrotoxic, but it appears that their biotransformation
to the active metabolite occurs in the liver. Hepatic potentiating
chemicals, such as the aliphatic alcohols and acetone, are likewise
potentiators for nephrotoxicity, and other halogenated hydrocarbons also
are toxic to the kidneys.
3. Antibiotics
Antibiotics such as neomycin, streptomycin, kanamycin, and gentamycin
also exhibit nephrotoxicity.
4. Analgesics
Analgesics such as aspirin taken over long periods may cause nephritis and
even renal failure (loss of concentrating capability).
5, Anesthetics
Anesthetics especially among halogenated hydrocarbons, may also produce
nephrotoxicity.
1.5.4 Toxic Responses of the Eye
The eye is a highly specialized organ which has unique features that make it
sensitive to toxic substances. It contains at least four photosensitive pigments, and
organ-specific lens proteins. In addition to these components, the eye contains
true neural tissue (inner retina and optic nerve), light-sensitive neural tissue
(photoreceptors), the lens and cornea surrounded by unique fluids required for
transparency, and an isolated cerebrospinal fluid system. The barrier to circulating
TOX-31
-------
DRAFT
blood is as specific and effective as that of the brain. A breakdown of this barrier
would likely result in blindness.
Contact with external agents is of special consequence to the cornea, conjunctive,
and neighboring tissues. Acids may be counteracted by washing procedures;
however, the effectiveness of eye washing can be variable. For instance, HCI can
cause severe damage at pH 1.0, but may have virtually no effect at about pH 3,
whereas sulfuric acid may be injurious at a wide range of pHs. Sulfur dioxide (S02)
will combine with corneal liquid to form H2S03. H2SC>3 is fat soluble, and will
penetrate through the cornea and cause a more severe and variable response. For
example, NaOH exposures for short periods, e.g., 1/20 normal for 30 sec., may not
have lasting effects whereas exposures of over three minutes may lead to corneal
opacity or even ulceration and perforation. Ammonium hydroxide, on the other
hand, will penetrate rapidly into the anterior (front) chamber because of the fat
solubility of nonionized NHs (e.g., in a few seconds). Lime burns, organic solvents,
and war gases (nitromustards) may also cause severe burns.
Organic solvents can be of significant concern. Naphthalene, for example, can
cause significant acute toxicological damage to the retina on external contact.
Systemic absorption of naphthalene vapor may result in the formation of cataracts.
Methanol, a well publicized poison of the CNS can likewise damage the ganglion
cell layer of the optic nerve (GCN) and lead to permanent visual impairment.
Carbon disulfide and pentavalent arsenic are also examples of agents that can
selectively damage the GCN.
1.5.5 Toxic Responses of the Respiratory System
There is a vast array of materials that are known to produce lung diseases.
However, the responses to these agents can be divided into five broad categories
for practical consideration (Hook, 1980):
TOX-32
-------
DRAFT
1. Air passage Irritation
This response causes airway constriction, which may be followed by
edema. Secondary bacterial or viral infections may further complicate
the damage
2. Damage to Cells Lining the Air Passages
This will cause necrosis, edema, and increased permeability. There will,
in general, be accumulation of fluid and swelling within the air space
rather than within the cells lining the airways.
3. Fibrosis
If the fibrosis becomes massive, there will be a sharp decline in the
respiratory capacity of the lung. Localized fibrosis of the pleura may
occur, resulting in pain, irritation, and restriction of lung movement.
4. Allergic Response
As a consequence of response to complex organic material or simple
compounds acting as antigens (agents evoking antibody production) or
haptens (small molecules that combine with carrier molecules, often body
proteins, thereby becoming antigenic themselves) allergic alveolitis may
occur.
5. Tumoriqenesis
The production of primary lung tumors may occur as a consequence of
exposure to a procarcinogen or carcinogenic agent.
Exhibit TOX-12 lists these five responses and some agents encountered
occupationally that may elicit each response.
TOX-33
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-12. PULMONARY DISEASES AND SOME SELECTED
OCCUPATIONALLY INHALED AGENTS
Toxicant
Air Passage
Irritation
Air Passage
Necrosis
Fibrosis
Production
Allergic Carcino-
Response genesis
Asbestos
Ammonia
Chlorine
Chromium
Coal Dust
Hydrogen
fluoride
Phosgene
Silica
Sulfur
dioxide
Toluene
TOX-34
-------
DRAFT
1.5.6 Toxic Responses of the Blood
Toxicants which affect blood cells or the tissues and organs in which these cells are
produced can cause considerable damage or death to an exposed individual. This
discussion will consider the effects of toxicants on the hematopoietic (blood
forming) system and red blood cells (RBCs).
The bone marrow is an important source of blood cells because it contains the stem
cells, which are the the immature precursors of these cells. The pool of stem cells
is stimulated to form red blood cells (ervthrocytes), platelets (thrombocytes), or
white blood cells (several types of leukocytes). A decrease in the number of these
elements is termed anemia, thrombocytopenia, or leukopenia, respectively.
Factors present in the blood which stimulate the stem pool to form each type are
called "poietins," for which each element has its own type. Hence, the name
eruthropoietin describes the factor that stimulates RBC formation, etc. Organs or
tissues other than the bone marrow, such as the kidney, are responsible for
producing these poietins, and therefore regulation of cell production may be
affected by toxicants that damage tissues other than bone marrow.
Chemicals that are toxic to the bone marrow can cause a decrease in the number
of blood cells in the circulating blood. This systematic condition, called
pancytopenia, can be attributed to excessive exposure to ionizing radiation,
mustard type chemicals, arsenic, trinitrotoluene, and chloramphenicol (Harris and
Kellermeyer, 1970). If damage to the bone marrow is severe, stem cells may fail
to proliferate (aplastic anemia), but the marrow may have normal cellular content
or even greater numbers (hypercellularity) and still fail to produce the normal
numbers of circulating cells. The normal numbers of these cells in humans should
be approximately 4.9 x 106 erythrocytes per cubic millimeter, 5 to 10 x 104
leukocytes per cubic millimeter, and 250,000 platelets per cubic millimeter.
The binding or reacting with hemoglobin by a variety of agents may lead to a
condition where there is an inadequate supply of oxygen to the tissues (hypoxia).
TOX-35
-------
DRAFT
These agents produce a form of hemoglobin that is incapable of transporting
oxygen and, as a result, the PC>2 (oxygen pressure) in the arterial blood will be
lower than normal causing oxygen deficiency. Carbon monoxide is especially
potent in this regard, forming carboxyhemoglobin. Exposure to a gas mixture with
0.1 percent CO will result in half of the erythrocytes becoming saturated
(50 percent carboxyhemoglobinemia) at sea level.
When an oxidizing reagent reacts with heme iron, its valence may be elevated from
the ferrous state (Fe"1"1" or Hb"1"1") to the ferric state (Fe+++ or Hb+++). When this
occurs, a pigment (methemoglobin) of greenish brown to black color is produced
and this hemoglobin is unable to accept oxygen. Among the best know chemicals
that generate methemoglobin are sodium nitrite and organic hydroxylamines.
Sulfhemoglobin is a hemoglobin pigment generated by exposure of oxyhemoglobin
(normal hemoglobin) to high concentrations of hydrogen sulfide. This pigment plays
no role in acute hydrogen sulfide poisoning. Unlike carboxyhemoglovinemia and
methemoglobinemia, no mechanism is known for reversing sulfhemoglobinemia.
Therefore this condition is more of a toxic threat. However, this condition is
either self limiting or it may lead to production of Heintz bodies (denatured
hemoglobin). These bodies attach firmly to the cytosplasmic membrane, impairing
cellular transport systems. This causes hyperpermeability and cell lysis. Aromatic
amino (aniline) and nitro (nitrobenzene) compounds, phenols, and dichromate are
among the agents which appear to be capable of inducing Heintz body formation.
There are known ways to reverse or manage the hypoxic conditions described in the
preceding paragraphs. Carboxyhemoglobinemia can be treated by supplying oxygen
unless the dose and exposure time has been too great. For methemoglobin anemia,
methylene blue administered at one to two milligrams per kilogram (Gosselin et.
al., 1976) can provide protection, and administration of four atmospheres of oxygen
(Goldstein and Doull, 1971) may decrease mortality.
When there is a hemolytic disease caused by toxic agents or microbial agents,
spleen engorgement may occur because of a need to destroy damaged RBCs. Other
TOX-36
-------
DRAFT
reticuloendothelial systems are capable of performing this function in addition to
the spleen. Thus the presence of white cells and the enlargement of these organs
may be related to the presence of a hematotoxic response.
1.5.7 Toxic Responses of the Reproductive System
The exposure of the human reproductive system to toxic agents is a matter of
major health concern because of the consequence to future generations. Recently,
in California, male factory workers exposed to 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane were
reported to be sterile and to have a variety of sperm defects or reduced count
(Dixon, 1980). Factory workers handling the organic solvents toluene, benzene, and
xylene also have been observed to display low sperm counts, abnormal sperm, and
variable infertility. Diethylstilbesterol, cadmium, methylmercury, and a variety of
anticancer chemicals have been shown to cause genetic damage to male and female
reproductive organs (Lucier, et al., 1977; Habison and Dixon, 1978).
The following reproductive events and processes must function normally in order to
produce healthy progeny (Dixon, 1980):
1. Preservation of the germ line
2. Gametogenesis (germ cell production)
3. Release and transport of gametes
4. Fertilization
5. Preimplantation cleavage and blastocyst formation
6. Implantation
7 Maternal metabolism
8. Embryogenesis
9. Fetal development
10. Placental functions
11. Birth and postnatal adjustment
12. Lactation and postnatal care
13. Growth and maturation of offspring
TOX-37
-------
DRAFT
The testes are afforded some protection from systemic chemical toxicants by a
blood-testes (BTB) barrier similar to that which protects the brain. A series of
membranes and tubules forming layers around the tubes and germ cells, the BTB
greatly reduces the penetration of foreign substances. No blood-ovarian barrier
with comparable capabilities has been identified, but the ovary appears incapable
of metabolizing certain exogenous chemicals to toxic metabolites. Various
biotransformations can be made in the testes because they possess active
cytochrome, glutathione S-transferase, expoxide hydrase, and hydroxylase systems.
Thus, potentially genotoxic (active on DNA) metabolites may be produced, some of
which can cause cancer.
The following noninclusive list of agents may affect male reproduction:
1. Metals
Lead, mercury, cadmium.
2. Insecticides
DDT, dieldrin, chlordane, organophosphorus pesticides, carbamates,
phenoxyacetic acids (2,4-D and 2,4-T), paraquat, DBCP, and ethylene
dibromide.
3. Food Additives and Contaminants
DES, aflatoxin nitrofurans, and cyclamates.
4. Radiation
a, 8, y, and x-ray.
The following are some agents that may affect female reproduction:
TOX-38
-------
DRAFT
1. Steroids
Natural and synthetic estrogens, androgens, and progestins.
2. Pesticides
Chlordane, DDT, parathion, carbaryl.
3. Food Additives and Contaminants
DES, nitrofuran derivatives, nitrosamines.
4. Industrial Chemicals
PCS, phthalic acid esters.
Finally, it should be mentioned that mammalian systems are capable of repairing
damaged DNA. However, the repair systems are interrelated with such important
processes as recombination and the possibility exists for mutations to arise as well
as for the normal restoration of genetic damage.
1.6 Acceptable Exposures
Every year the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
(ACGIH) revises their publication Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances
and Physical Agents in the Workroom Environment with Intended Changes.
The current booklet on TLVs contains time-weighted average concentrations
(TWAs) for the 8-hour work day or 40-hour week and short-term exposure limits
(STELs) for excursions above the TWA. Other TLVs are found in the booklet
concerning carcinogens, nuisance dusts, and other physical agents.
TOX-39
-------
DRAFT
The TLVs are to be used by a trained industrial hygienist to ensure the proper
interpretation and application of these values. The TLV booklet states that TLVs
"are not intended for use or for modification for use
1. As a relative index of hazard toxicity,
2. In the evaluation or control of community air pollution nuisances,
3. In estimating the toxic potential of continuous, uninterrupted exposures or
other extended work periods,
4. As proof or disproof of an existing disease or physical condition..."
1.6.1 Time-Weighted Averages (TWAs)
The average chemical concentration most workers can be exposed to during a 40-
hour week of 8-hour days without adverse effects, chronic or acute, is designated
as the TLV-rwA-x; where x is the unit of time overwhich the concentration is
averaged. Eight hours is the unit of time which corelates to a typical workday
(TLV-ywA-s)- However, the time can vary, as in the case of TLVjwA-STEL which
is usually measured over a 15 minute exposure period. The TLVywAs are given in
parts per million and/or milligrams per cubic meter. In general, parts per million is
used for gases and vapors and milligrams per cubic meter for particulates, although
this is not always true.
The following is a sample calculation of the TWA of worker exposure to a
compound for comparison with the accepted TLV:
Given: Concentration'* Exposure Time"
C] = 15 ppm ti = 2.5 hr
C2 21 t2 = 2.5
C3 18 t3 = 2.5
TOX-40
-------
where i = 1,2,3,...,n TWA
DRAFT
[(Cj) (tj)]
TWA = [(C^t!)] + [(C2)(t2)] + [(C3)(t3)] + [(Cn)(tn)]
ti + t2 + t3 • + • • • tn
TWA = [(15H2.5)] + [(21)(2.5)] + [(18)(2.5)] + [(0)(.5)1
2.5 + 2.5 + 2.5 + .5
TWA = 37.5 + 52.5 + 45 + 0
8
TWA = 16.9 ppm
*AII units of concentration and time must be consistent.
This TWA must be compared with the TLV of the chemical to determine whether
conditions are acceptable.
1.6.2 TLVs Designated with "Skin" Notation
Various substances may be listed in the TLV booklet with the special designation "skin"
This is to draw attention to another effect of the substance that may be as harmful as
inhaling the substance. Direct skin contact with the substance should be avoided when
this designation is noted in the booklet. Some chemicals can be absorbed through the
skin and transported by the blood system to their respective target organ where the toxic
effect occurs. Documentation of TLVs, published by the ACGIH, should be consulted to
determine how and why the TLV for the skin was established in the booklet.
1.6.3 Excursions (STEL, TLV-C)
A TLV may be exceeded for a short period of time if the listed TLV is not designated
with "C" The C refers to the ceiling value of the TLV, otherwise referred to as the
TLV-C. This TLV-C cannot be exceeded at any time or for any reason because of the
inherent health risks. If no TLV-C exists, the TLV may be exceeded up to the time and
concentration limit designated in the TLV booklet as the Short Term Exposure
TOX-41
-------
DRAFT
Limit (STEL). If no STEL is given for that compound, then any excursion
attempted must be based on applicable industrial hygiene and toxicological data,
provided that the TLV-TWA-S is not exceeded.
STEL's are intended to provide guidance for planned excursions above the TLV. A
STEL based excursion above the TLV cannot exceed 15 minutes in duration and only
four excursions are permitted each day. At least one hour must elapse between
each excursion. The excursion exposure time and concentration must be
calculated into the TWA and must not exceed the TLV for the day.
Thus, any excursion, be it based on the STEL or other data, must be accompanied
by an excursion of equal magnitude below the TLV. It must be remembered that
any excursion limit given by the STEL is essentially the same as a TLV-C and
should not be exceeded.
1.6.4 Mixture TWA
For situations in which more than one substance may be in the working
environment, it is important to determine a mixture TWA. The first consideration
is the overall effect of the mixture on the worker. If the substances have the same
physiological or toxicological effects, then the TWA can be considered additive.
Such a TWA can be calculated as follows:
Concentration TLV
C-| = 400 ppm 1 1000 ppm
C2 = 150 ppm 2 = 200 ppm
63 = 100 ppm 3 = 200 ppm
C-| C2 03 en
TWA — + ,- + ,- • • • + T— .
TT T2 T3 Tn = 1
lo
TOX-42
-------
DRAFT
If the preceding sum (n) is equal to or greater than unity, then the TLV of the
mixture has been exceeded. If the value is one or less, then the value is within the
TLV for the mixture.
When the effects of the individual substances are known to be different, therefore,
not additive, the actual TWA of each substance must be compared to its own TLV
separately. An example might be a mixture of two gases, one having a narcotic
effect and the other simply acting as an irritant. To determine what kind of effect
the TLV is based on, one must refer to the ACGIH Documentation of TLVs. It
relates such information and cites references where more data may be found.
1.6.5 Mineral Dust and Nuisance Oust TLV
Dusts with less than one percent quartz content have a general TLV of 10
milligrams per cubic meter or 30 million parts per cubic foot. Such dusts are
considered a nuisance because they may be deposited in the ears, nasal passages,
and eyes. They may block visibility. Such dusts may also be collected in the lungs
but any damage is usually reversible. A list of nuisance dusts is found of the TLV
booklet.
Dusts with greater than one percent quartz composition are considered mineral
dusts and must be calculated using the formula for quartz in the TLV booklet.
Other mineral dusts include silica, silicates, and coal dusts, all of which have
formulas for TWA calculations. Mineral dusts can cause irreversible lung damage.
1.6.6 Physical Agents
A formula for determining a TWA value for heat stress to be compared with a TLV
is given in the booklet, but it is suitable only for light summer clothing. The
formula is not compatible with rain suits or full encapsulated clothing.
TOX-43
-------
DRAFT
Several other physical agents such as radiation (ionizing, ultraviolet, microwaves,
and noise) are also discussed. These factors certainly should be considered on a
working site. Noise is especially important when activity is prolonged around
heavy machinery or impact tools.
2.0 CARCINOGENS
2.1 Definitions
The following definitions will be useful in understanding the section on
carcinogenicity:
Carcinogen
A substance (chemical, physical, biological) with the ability to cause a neoplastic
transformation in an animal cell which could lead to the production of a solid
tumor or a leukemia.
Genotoxic Carcinogen
A carcinogen that causes a modification or change in DNA.
Epigenetic Carcinogen
A carcinogen for which no evidence of direct interaction with genetic material
(DNA) exists.
A listing of the classes of carcinogenic chemicals and information pertinent to
each class is presented as Exhibit TOX-13.
TOX-44
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT TOX-13. CLASSES OF CARCINOGENIC CHEMICALS
Type
Mode of Action
Example
Direct-acting or
primary
carcinogen
Procarcinogen or
secondary
carcinogen
Inorganic
carcinogen
Solid-state
carcinogen
Hormone
Immunosuppressor
Cocarcinogen
Promoter
Electrophile, organic compound,
genotoxic, interacts with
DNA
Requires conversion through
metabolic activations by
host or in vitro to
type 1
Not directly genotoxic, leads
to changes in DNA by selec-
tive alterations in fidelity
of DNA replication
Epigenetic
Exact mechanism unknown;
usually affects only mesen-
chymal cells and tissues;
physical form vital
Usually not genotoxic, mainly
alters endocrine system
balance and differentiation;
often acts as promoter
Usually not genotoxic; mainly
stimulates "virally in-
duced," transplanted
or metastic neoplasms
Not genotoxic or carcinogenic,
but enhances effect of type
1 or 2 agent when given
at the same time. May
modify conversions of type
2 to type 1
Not genotoxic or carcinogenic,
but enhances effect of
type 1 or type 2 agent
when given subsequently
Ethylene imine,
Bis (chloromethyl)
ether
Vinyl chloride,
benzo (a) pyrene,
2-naphthylamine
dimethylinitros-
amine
Nickel, chromium
Polymer or metal
foils, asbestos
Estradoil,
diethylstil-
bestrol
Azathioprine,
antilymphotocytic
serum
Phorbol esters,
pyrene,
catechol,
ethanol,
n-dodecane,
S02
Phorbol esters,
phenol, anthra-
lin, bile acids,
tryptophan
metabolites,
saccharin
TOX-45
-------
DRAFT
2.2 DNA as a Target for Carcinogens
The pnme effect of most carcinogens is on the genetic material that specifies all
cell functions and reproduction. There is evidence of the following:
1. Many carcinogens are, or can be metabolized into, chemicals that are
known to interact with DNA. In vitro studies with many carcinogens have
shown damage to DNA or modifications of the integrity of the genetic
code. These carcinogens stimulate DNA repair activities in tissue
cultures.
2. Many carcinogens are mutagens.
3. Defects in DNA repair, such as the genetic defect in xeroderma
pigmentosa, usually correlate with an increased incidence of cancer.
4. A variety of inherited chromosomal abnormalities can be correlated with
an increased incidence of cancer.
5. Neoplastic transformations in a cell are usually found in most, if not all,
progeny cells, indicating a heritable (can be inherited) change resulting
from a modification of DNA structure or expression.
6. Most cancer cells and cells in culture that have undergone a neoplastic
transformation display chromosomal abnormalities.
2.3 "Causes' of Cancer
Since cancer is a generic term encompassing a variety of neoplastic conditions and
very little is really understood concerning the molecular events involved in the
initiation or maintenance of a cancer, very little can be said concerning the cause.
At this point, it is sufficient to discuss those things that we can reasonably assume
to increase the risk of developing cancer.
TOX-46
-------
DRAFT
1. Environmental Cancers
A variety of items in our environment have been implicated as potential
carcinogens. These include iatrogenic carcinogens (carcinogenic side
effects of materials prescribed by a physician) and chemicals released or
effects from our "normal" activities such as tanning in the sun and
smoking.
2. Occupational Cancers
A variety of occupations expose individuals to a particular type of cancer.
A chemical or biological laboratory worker, especially one attempting to
determine the carcinogenicity of materials, is subject to many more
cancers than the average worker. The laboratory person and persons
involved with hazardous waste face the added danger that results from
the interaction of many agents.
3. Dietary Cancers
There are still many questions concerning the relationship of diet to
cancer. For example, 50 years ago, it was established that the
consumption of alcohol is related to the incidence of cancer of the mouth,
pharynx, larynx, and esophagus. It is still'unknown if it is the alcohol
itself that is responsible (possibly by solubilizing a specific agent) or some
other component of alcoholic drinks. The lack of research in this area
may be attributable to the fact that pure alcohol is not carcinogenic to
lab animals or to a natural distaste for investigations of the effects of
alcohol on human beings. Other dietary questions concern the ratio of
fiber and animal fat in one's diet and the incidence of cancer of the colon.
TOX-47
-------
DRAFT
4. Interaction of Agents
The synergism discussed in the toxicology section is also a factor in
carcinogenesis. Examples of this include the interaction of Hepatitis B
virus and aflotoxins in producing cancer of the liver; and, perhaps more
germane to laboratory personnel, the interaction of both asbestos and
ionizing radiation with smoking to produce cancer of the lung.
5. Viruses
There has been a tremendous amount of indirect evidence, both
epidemiological (e.g., Herpes Virus Type II and cervical cancer), and
biochemical (e.g., the detection of viral components or virally induced
enzymes in cancer cells). Cancer viruses have been identified in all
mammalian species with the exception of man. There is, however, a
growing body of evidence indicating that there may be cocarcinogenic
effect between viral genetic material and chemical carcinogens to
produce cancers.
6. Systemic Factors
There is some thought that the breakdown of systemic control and the
accumulation of cellular mutagenic from both natural mutation and
environmentally induced mutation (chemicals and radiation) may lead to
the development of cancer. Cancer has been called a disease of the aged
due to the greatly increased incidence of cancer with age. In addition to
the increase in genetic damage, there is a loss in the efficiency of the
immune system with age. Immunosurveillance is thought to be a factor in
protecting man from developing cancer. The relationship between
immunodeficiencies and certain cancers is well documented.
TOX-48
-------
DRAFT
7. Genetic Factors
When considering the causes of cancer, one must always consider the
effect of heredity on the likelihood of developing cancer. There are four
possibilities:
a. Genetic predisposition to cancer even in the absence of environmental
variation.
b. Predisposition imposed by environmental variation in the absence of
genetic variation.
c. Predisposition by both environmental and genetic factors.
d. Neither genetic nor environmental predisposition.
The first class is quite small, possibly one percent of the total number
of cancers. It is felt that the second and third classes combined are
responsible for 70 to 80 percent of all cancers. The fourth group
results from "spontaneous" or "background" mutations and represents
the endemic level of cancer within the population that cannot be
prevented. The main area of interest for this audience is classes a and
b above. Research data indicate that controllable elements in the
environment are involved in the development of most cancers.
TOX-49
-------
DRAFT
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PRINCIPLES
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 GENERAL PRINCIPLES RP-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION RP-1
1.2 ROUTES OF EXPOSURE RP-1
1.2.1 RESPIRATORY TRACT RP-1
1.3 TYPES OF INHALED TOXICANTS RP-7
1.4 OXYGEN DEFICIENCY RP-8
1.4.1 OXYGEN AND THE RESPIRATORY PROCESS RP-8
1.4.2 OXYGEN LEVELS/PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECT RP-9
1.5 PARTICULATE CONTAMINANTS-AEROSOLS RP-9
1.6 GASEIOUS CONTAMINANTS RP-12
1.7 EXPRESSING AIR CONTAMINANT CONCENTRATIONS RP-14
1.8 MEASURES OF RESPIRATORY HAZARDS RP-14
1.9 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION RP-16
1.10 EMERGENCY SIGNALS RP-19
2.0 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT RP-19
2.1 INTRODUCTION RP-19
2.2 GENERAL DECISION LOGIC FLOWCHART RP-20
2.3 SPECIFIC DECISION LOGIC CHARTS RP-25
2.4.1 SKIN ABSORPTION AND IRRITATION RP-25
2.4.2 POOR WARNING PROPERTIES RP-28
2.4.3 SORBENTS RP-31
2.4.4 EYE IRRITATION RP-37
2.4.5 IDLH RP-38
2.4.6 LOWER FLAMMABLE LIMIT AND FIREFIGHTING RP-46
2.4.7 PROTECTION FACTORS RP-47
2.4.8 VARIATIONS WITH 30 CFR 11 RP-47
2.4.9 ESCAPE RP-50
RP-ii
-------
DRAFT
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PRINCIPLES
EXHIBITS
NUMBER PAGE
RP-1 HUMAN RESPIRATORY SYSTEM RP-2
RP-2 INDUSTRIAL TOXICANTS THAT PRODUCE DISEASE RP-5
OF THE RESPIRATORY TRACT
RP-3 ATMOSPHERIC COMPOSITION RP-10
RP-4 PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF OXYGEN DEFICIENCY RP-10
RP-5 FORMAT FOR DETERMINING RESPIRATORY PROTECTION RP-21
RP-6 SELECTION OF RESPIRATORY EQUIPMENT RP-22
RP-7 ANSI Z88.2 PROPOSED RESPIRATORY MAXIMUM USE LIMITS RP-23
RP-8 SPECIFIC DECISION LOGIC CHART FOR RESPIRATORY RP-26
PROTECTION AGAINST GASES OR VAPORS
RP-9 SPECIFIC DECISION LOGIC CHART FOR RESPIRATORY RP-27
PROTECTION AGAINST PARTICULATES
RP-10 COMPARISON OF SELECTED ODOR THRESHOLDS AND TLVS RP-29
FOR CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS
RP-11 EFFECT OF SOLVENT VAPOR ON RESPIRATOR CARTRIDGE RP-35
EFFICIENCY
RP-12 IDLH LEVELS RP-39
RP-13 QUALITATIVE PROTECTION FACTORS RP-48
RP-iii
-------
DRAFT
1.0 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
1.1 Introduction
Since the lungs are not completely effective in protecting the body against
respirable chemical hazards, they must be protected from toxic gases, vapors, and
particulates. In addition, the body must be supplied with enough oxygen to
maintain a normal capacity to perform tasks. To do this, the function of the lungs
must be understood, along with types of respiratory protective devices and the
method of selecting which ones to use.
1.2 Routes of Exposure
1.2.1 Respiratory Tract
The respiratory tract is the only organ system with vital functional elements in
constant, direct contact with the environment. The lung also has the largest
exposed surface area of any organ—a surface area of 70 to 100 square meters
versus 2 for the skin and 10 for the digestive system. The lung is exposed by
inhalation and by exhalation of chemicals absorbed through other routes (ingestion,
skin).
The volume of air inhaled during "normal" activities is approximately
six liters/minute (l/min). The volume of air inhaled during brisk activity or during
periods of stress can go up to 75 l/min.
Air is inhaled through the nose and mouth and travels an extremely turbulent path
to the lungs (Exhibit RP-1). This turbulency results in the air impinging on many
sites, thus allowing the insoluble particulates to become impacted and soluble
particulates, vapors, and gases to become absorbed.
RP-1
-------
EXHIBIT RP-1
HUMAN RESPIRATORY SYSTEM
(PRITCHARD, JOHN, 1976)
DRAFT
Nasal Passages
Diaphragm
Pharym
Bronchiole
Terminal Bronchiole
Aveoli
RP-2
-------
DRAFT
The respiratory tract is divided into three regions:
1. Nasopharvngeal
This region extends from nose to larynx. These passages are lined with
ciliated epithelium and mucous glands. They filter out large inhaled
particles, increase the relative humidity of inhaled air, and moderate its
temperature.
2. Tracheobronchial
This region consists of the trachea, bronchi, and bronchioles and serves as
a conducting airway between the nasopharyngeal region and alveoli.
These passageways are lined with ciliated epithelium coated by mucus,
which serves as an escalator to move particles from deep in the lungs
back up to the oral cavity so they can be swallowed. These ciliated cells
can be temporarily paralyzed by smoking or using cough suppressants.
3. Alveolar
This is the basic functional unit in the lung and the primary location of
gas exchange. The alveolar region consists of small bronchioles which
connect to the alveoli. The alveoli, of which there are 100 million in
humans, contact the pulmonary capillaries.
The inhaled air passes through the pharynx, the common passageway for both food
and air, and enters the trachea at the larynx. The trachea (or windpipe) divides
into two bronchi, which lead to the two lungs. All of these organs are collectively
called the conducting tubes, since they lead the air to the alveoli,' the site of
gaseous exchange with the pulmonary capillaries (i.e., the blood).
RP-3
-------
DRAFT
Toxic substances can be absorbed at any point in the respiratory tract causing harm
as shown in Exhibit RP-2. The conducting tubes are lined with mucous and cilia.
Insoluble contaminants caught in the mucous are swept up to the esophagus by the
cilia and swallowed, thus causing an ingestion problem.
Not only can various chemicals affect the respiratory tract, but the tract is also a
route for chemicals to reach other organs. Solvents, such as benzene and
tetrachloroethane, anesthetic gases, and other compounds containing lead or
mercury can be asborbed through the respiratory tract and affect other organs.
It is important to remember how anatomy of the respiratory system may be related
to entry of a given material. The airway system is lined by a moist mucous layer.
Therefore, a substance such as a gas may be absorbed in the airways leading to the
lungs, especially at the entry points, such as the nose. Gases of high solubility,
such as sulfur dioxide (S02>, will, therefore, be absorbed mainly in the upper airway
provided the concentration is not too high. It is for this reason that SC>2 and gases
of similar solubility will predominantly affect the upper passages. Gases of low
solubility such as nitrogen dioxide (N02), will be absorbed rather evenly throughout
the system and may have the greatest effect on the thinner, smaller airway and
alveolar surfaces.
A description of the toxic responses of the respiratory system will be given later.
However, it should be recalled that oxygen enters the blood from the alveoli. It is,
therefore, easy to see how any inhaled gas may contact the blood, be absorbed,
and, because the blood is in contact with many tissues and organs, produce a
systemic effect.
Asphyxia (also called hypoxia or hypoxemia) can occur when there is a lack of
oxygen that is sufficient to endanger life. Any inert gas in high enough
concentrations can cause simple asphyxia if it causes the amount of oxygen to drop
below the critical level. However, a chemical asphyxiant, such as carbon monoxide
RP-4
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-2. INDUSTRIAL TOXICANTS THAT PRODUCE DISEASE OF THE
RESPIRATORY TRACT (SHEET 1 OF 2)
Toxicant
Chlorine
Chromium
(VI)
Site of Action
Acute Effect
Chronic Effect
Aluminum
Ammonia
Arsenic
Asbestos
Beryllium
Boron oxide
Cadmium
oxide
Carbides of
tungsten
titanium,
tatalum
Upper airways
Upper airways
Upper airways
Lung parenchyma
Alveoli
Alveoli
Alveoli
Upper, lower
airways
Cough, shortness
of breath,
irritation
Irritation, edema
Bronchitis, irrita-
tion, pharynigitis
—
Edema, pneumonia
Edema, hemorrhage
Cough, pneumonia
Hyperplasia,
metaplasia of
bronchial cells
Fibrosis, emphysema
Bronchitis
Cancer, bronchitis,
laryngitis
Fibrosis, cancer
Fibrosis,
ulceration
—
Emphysema
Fibrosis
Upper airways
Nasopharnyx
upper airways
Cough, irritation,
asphyxiation (by
muscle cramps in
larynx)
Nasal irritation,
bronchitis
Cancer
RP-5
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-2. INDUSTRIAL TOXICANTS THAT PRODUCE DISEASE OF THE
RESPIRATORY TRACT (SHEET 2 OF 2)
Toxicant
Site of Action
Acute Effect
Chronic Effect
Cobalt
Hydrogen
Iron oxides
Manganese
Nickel
Nickel
Pthalic
anhydride
Sulfur
dioxide
Tin
Toluene
Vanadium
Xylene
Lower airways,
alveoli
Upper airways
Alveoli, bronchi
Isocyanates Lower airways,
alveoli
Lower airways,
alveoli
Nasal mucosa,
bronchi
Alveoli
Lower airways,
alveoli
Upper airways
Bronchioles,
pleura
Upper airways
Upper, lower
airways
Lower airways
Asthma
Irritation, edema
Cough
Bronchitis,
pulmonary
edema, asthma
Pneumonia, often
fatal
Irritation
Edema
Fibrosis, inter-
stitial pneumonitis
Benign
pneumoconiosis
Recurrent pneumonia
Cancer
Bronchitis,
fibrosis,
pneumonia
Bronchitis, asthma Emphysema
Bronchoconstriction,
cough, tightness in
chest
Bronchitis, edema,
bronchospasm
Irritation, nasal
inflammation, edema
Edema, hemorrhage
Bronchitis,
nasapharyngitis
Widespread mottling
of X-ray without
clinical signs
(benign
pheumoconiosis)
Bronchitis
RP-6
-------
DRAFT
(CO), may react with hemoglobin (Hb) preventing this Hb from combining with
oxygen. As a result, oxygen is not available to various organs and toxic responses
will occur. Some of the more significant effects of CO are exerted on the central
nervous system (CNS).
1.3 Types of Inhaled Toxicants
Many chemicals used or produced in industry can produce acute or chronic diseases
of the respiratory tract when they are inhaled (Exhibit RP-2). The toxicants can
be classified according to how they affect the respiratory tract.
1. Asphyxiants
Gases that deprive the body tissues of oxygen.
a. Simple asphyxiants are physiologically inert gases that at high
concentrations displace air, leading to suffocation. Examples:
nitrogen, helium, methane, neon, argon.
b. Chemical asphyxiants are gases that prevent the tissues from getting
enough oxygen. Examples: carborv monoxide and cyanide. Carbon
monoxide binds to hemoglobin 200 times more readily than oxygen, and
cyanide prevents the transfer of oxygen from blood to tissues by
inhibiting the necessary transfer enzymes.
2. Irritants
Chemicals that irritate the air passages, causing constriction of the
airways and possibly leading to pulmonary edema (liquid in the lungs) and
infection. Examples: hydrogen fluoride, chlorine, hydrogen chloride, and
ammonia.
RP-7
-------
DRAFT
3. Necrosis Producers
Chemicals that result in cell death and edema. Examples: ozone and
nitrogen dioxide.
4. Fibrosis Producers
Chemicals that produce fibrotic tissue which, if massive, blocks airways
and decreases lung capacity. Examples: silicates, asbestos, and
beryllium.
5. Allergens
Chemicals that cause an allergic response characterized by
bronchoconstriction and pulmonary disease. Examples: isocyanates and
sulfur dioxide.
6. Carcinogens
Chemicals that cause lung cancer. Examples: cigarette smoke, coke
emissions, asbestos, and arsenic.
1.4 Oxygen Deficiency
1.4.1 Oxygen and the Respiratory Process
It is not the percentage of 02 in the air, but rather its partial pressure (p02>, that
is important in respiration. As one increases in altitude, the percentage of 02
stays constant, but pO2 drops. Additionally, as the percentage of 02 in the air
drops, so does its partial pressure. The chemical composition of normal air is
presented in Exhibit RP-2.
RP-8
-------
DRAFT
The "anatomic dead space volume" of the respiratory tract is about 150 ml. The
average breath draws in about 500 ml of air; this air is mixed with the air
remaining in the dead space from the previous exhalation, which has been depleted
in oxygen due to the normal respiratory process. The overall effect is a lowe' p02
in the respiratory tract as compared with the ambient air. The average respirator
adds about TOO ml of dead space to the respiratory system, which further lowers
the pC>2 in the respiratory system, causing a slight oxygen deficiency and adding to
the effort required to breath.
1.4.2 Oxygen Levels/Physiological Effect
The currently accepted National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(NIOSH) standards specify that if an atmosphere contains less than 19.5 percent by
volume 02 at sea level, then an atmosphere-supplying device must be used.
Note that as altitude increases, the percentage of 02 stays constant, but the
drops. There is currently no standard that accounts for the drop in pO2 with
altitude; the problem is currently under study by NIOSH.
The physiological effects of oxygen deficiency are indicated in Exhibit RP-3.
1.5 Paniculate Contaminants - Aerosols
Aerosol is a term used to describe particulates in air without regard to their origin.
Particulates are collected on the walls of the respiratory tract depending upon
their size as follows:
1. Pharynx - 10-30 pm
2. Trachea - 10 ym
3. Bronchus - 5-10 ym
4. Alveoli - 0.1-1 pm
RP-9
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-3. ATMOSPHERIC COMPOSITION
Gas
Volume Partial Pressure
(%) (mm Hg at sea level)
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Argon
Carbon Dioxide
78.9
20.95
0.93
0.04
594
159
7
0.03
EXHIBIT RP-4. PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF OXYGEN DEFICIENCY
02 Volume
Percentage
at Sea Level
Physiological Effect
16-12
14-10
10-6
Less than 6
Increased breathing volume.
Accelerated heartbeat.
Impaired attention and thinking.
Impaired coordination.
Very faulty judgment.
Very poor muscular coordination.
Muscular exertion causes rapid fatigue that may
cause permanent heart damage.
Intermittent respiration.
Nausea.
Vomiting.
Inability to perform vigorous movement, or loss
of all movement.
Unconsciousness, followed by death.
Spasmatic breathing.
Convulsive movements.
Death in minutes.
RP-10
-------
DRAFT
Participates less than 0.5 Mm may never be deposited in the respiratory tract and
may simply be exhaled.
Particulates are classified in two ways: by their physical classification and by the
effect they have on the body. The physical classifications of participates are as
follows:
1. Dust
A solid, mechanically-produced particle with sizes varying from sub-
microscopic to visible or macroscopic.
2. Spray
A liquid, mechanically-produced particle with sizes generally in the
visible or macroscopic range.
3. Fume
A solid condensation particle of extremely small particle size, generally
less than 1 micron in diameter.
4. Mist
A liquid condensation particle with sizes ranging from submicroscopic to
visible or macroscopic.
5. Fog
A mist of sufficient concentration to perceptibly obscure vision.
RP-11
-------
DRAFT
6. Smoke
A system that includes the products of incomplete combustion of organic
substances in the form of solid and liquid particles and gaseous products
in air. Smoke is usually of sufficient concentration to perceptibly
obscure vision.
Particles are produced by mechanical means by the disintegration processes of
grinding, crushing, drilling, blasting, and spraying or by physiochemical reactions
such as combustion, vaporization, distillation, sublimation, calcination, and
condensation.
1.6 Gaseous Contaminants
Gaseous contaminants are "filtered" to a small degree by the respiratory tract
before they reach the alveolar spaces. However, if the contaminants are soluble,
they can be directly absorbed through the walls of the respiratory tract.
Gaseous contaminants are classified by their chemical type and by the effect they
have on the body. The chemical types of gaseous contaminants are as follows:
1. Inert
Substances that do not react with other substances under most conditions
and create a respiratory hazard by displacing air and producing oxygen
deficiency (for example: helium, neon, and argon).
2. Acidic
Substances that are acids or that react with water to produce an acid. In
water they produce positively-charged hydrogen ions. They taste sour
RP-12
-------
DRAFT
and many are corrosive to tissues (for example: hydrogen chloride, sulfur
dioxide, fluorine, nitrogen dioxide, acetic acid, carbon dioxide, hydrogen
sulfide, and hydrogen cyanide).
3. Alkaline
Substances that are alkalies or that react with water to produce an alkali.
When in water solutions, they result in the production of negatively-
charged hydroxyl ions (OH~). They taste bitter, and many are corrosive
to tissues (for example: ammonia, amines, phosphine, arsine, and stiline).
4. Organic
These are the compounds of carbon. Examples are saturated hydrocarbons
(methane, ethane, butane), unsaturated hydrocarbons (ethylene,
acetylene), alcohols (methyl alcohol, propyl alcohol), ethers (dimethyl
ether, diethyl ether), aldehydes (formaldehyde), ketones (dimethyl
ketone), organic acids (formic acid, acetic acid), halides (chloroform,
carbon tetrachloride), amides (formamide, acetamide), nitriles
(acetonitrile), isocyanates (toluene diisocyanate), amines (methylamine),
expoxies (epoxyethane, propylene oxide), and aromatics (benzene,
toluene, xylene).
5. Organometallic
Compounds in which metals are chemically bonded to organic groups (for
example, tetraethyl lead).
6. Hydrides
Compounds in which hydrogen is chemically bonded to metals and certain
other elements (for example, diborane and lithium hydride).
RP-13
-------
DRAFT
1.7 Expressing Air Contaminant Concentrations
Any substances that are not normal components of breathing air (oxygen, nitrogen,
etc.) are considered to be contaminants. The respiratory threat posed by
contaminants is a function of the actual contaminant and its concentration in the
air. The concentration is expressed in a variety of ways, as listed below.
1. Particulates
a. mppcf - millions of particles per cubic foot.
b. ppcc - particles per cubic centimeter.
c. mg/m^ - milligrams per cubic meter.
2. Gases and Vapors
a. ppm - volumes per million volumes of air (parts per million).
b. ppb - volumes per billion volumes of air (parts per billion).
c. mg/m3 - milligrams per cubic meter.
d. Conversion of units. The following equation converts ppm to mg/m3,
24 45 T
ppm = ; r^ ^T— mg/mj, at 25 C and 760 mm Hg. This equation is
KK molecular weight
extremely useful for determining respiratory protection requirements.
1.8 Measures of Respiratory Hazards
Every contaminant contained in breathing air has a limit, above which it becomes a
threat to human health. These limits are determined either from animal studies or
from epidemiological data. Unfortunately, animal studies can only approximate
human responses and may vary widely for individual chemicals. Epidemiological
studies, although capable of providing a more precise forecast of human response
are limited by a lack of accurate records and a lack of controlled studies.
RP-14
-------
DRAFT
Therefore, the "safe" limits of various chemicals must be viewed only as guidelines.
Furthermore, these guidelines are primarily designed for the industrial situation
where an individual is being exposed to one or two well-defined substances. These
guidelines do not address the problems of synergism, potentiation, or allergic
response.
The guidelines used in measuring respiratory hazards are listed below.
1. Threshold Limit Value
The threshold limit value (TLV) is recommended by the American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) and is derived
from consensus review. It is a time-weighted average concentration set
for a particular substance that represents a level that almost all workers
can be exposed to for an 8-hr day (40-hr week) without suffering adverse
health effects. It is assumed that following each 8-hr exposure there will
be a 16-hr recovery period and that after 5 days there will be a 48-hr
recovery period. The TLV lists are revised on a yearly basis.
2. Permissible Exposure Limits
The permissible exposure limits (PELs) are set forth in the OSHA
Standards 29 CFR 1910.1000, Tables Z-\, 7.2, and Z%. These levels were
promulgated initially from the ACGIH TLV lists (1968). As part of the
law, they represent the legal maximum concentrations for personnel
exposure. They are not updated on a yearly basis, as is the TLV list.
Therefore, the most current ACGIH TLV list should be used in
determining respiratory protection, rather than the PEL listing. However,
the level selected must be in conformance with the PEL in order to
comply with OSHA regulations.
RP-15
-------
DRAFT
3. Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health.
30 CFR 11.3 defines conditions that are immediately dangerous to life and
health (IDLH) as "conditions that pose an immediate threat to life or
health or conditions that pose an immediate threat of severe exposure to
contaminants such as radioactive materials, which are likely to have an
adverse cumulative or delayed effect on health."
OSHA adds these criteria:
a. The worker must be able to escape without losing his life or suffering
permanent health damage within 30 minutes.
b. The worker must be able to escape without severe eye or respiratory
irritation or other reactions.
4. Lower Flammable Limit
The lower flammable limit (LFL) is the lowest concentration by volume of
a gas or vapor in air that will explode when there is an ignition source.
Lack of oxygen in high concentrations of flammable gases or toxic gases
generated during fires limit the types of respirators available for use in
these atmospheres.
1.9 Respiratory Protection
When it has been determined that the ambient atmosphere is hazardous, it becomes
necessary to protect the individual by--
1 Avoiding and/or minimizing exposure.
2. Applying engineering controls such as ventilation.
3. Using a respirator to either filter the ambient air or supply clean air.
RP-16
-------
DRAFT
The legal requirements for respiratory protection are summarized below.
1. Williams and Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
established standards that state that "approved or accepted respirators
shall be used when they are available."
2. 29 CFR 1910.134 gives legal requirements for the selection and use of
respiratory equipment as promulgated by OSHA and based on American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Z88.2, "American National
Standards Practices for Respiratory Protection." Standard Z88.2 is a
consensus standard, but now has been cited as a Federal regulation.
3. 30 CFR Part 11 describes tests for permissibility of respiratory protective
apparatus and updates or deletes approvals. 30 CFR Part 11 also cites
ANSI Z88.2 as the basis for respiratory protection.
According to 29 CFR 1910.134, employers will supply suitable respiratory
protection equipment and establish a respiratory protection program that
includes the following items:
1. Standard operating procedures for selection and use of respirators.
2. Proper selection of respirators on the basis of hazard.
3. Training of personnel in use and limitations.
4. Regular cleaning and maintenance.
5. Proper storage.
6. Routine monthly inspections and inspections before and after use.
RP-17
-------
DRAFT
7. Constant monitoring of work area for adverse conditions and worker
stress.
8, Continual evaluation of respiratory compliance program once in
operation.
9. Determination of medical fitness of potential user.
10. Use of only approved equipment and only after proper fit testing has been
performed.
Testing schedules for all respiratory equipment are listed in 30 CFR 11:
1. Subpart H - Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus - Schedule 13.
2. Subpart I - Gas Masks - Schedule 14.
3. Subpart J - Supplied Air Respirators - Schedule 19.
4. Subpart K - Dust, Fume, and Mist Respirators - Schedule 23.
5. Subpart L - Chemical Cartridge Respirators - Schedule 23.
This document also updates or deletes approval for respiratory equipment. Any
equipment that is altered, hybridized, or changed in any unapproved way loses its
approval. The approval number must be on the respirator or its container. NIOSH
publishes a list of all approved respirators titled the NIOSH Certified Equipment
List (1980).
The physiological/psychological limitations of respiratory equipment are listed
below.
1. Pulmonary problems
2. Cardiovascular problems
3. Skin sensitivity, diabetes, perforated eardrum
4. Claustrophobia, anxiety, discomfort
RP-18
-------
DRAFT
1.10 Emergency Signals
Verbal communications while wearing respirators are difficult because talking is
muffled and distorted by the face mask. A set of hand signals known to all site
personnel is essential for working together safely.
Typical emergency hand signals include:
Signal
Meaning
• Hand gripping throat:
• Grip partner's wrist or place
both hands around waist:
• Hands on top of head:
• Thumbs up:
• Thumbs down:
Out of air, can't breath.
Leave area immediately, no debate!
Need assistance.
OK, I'm all right, I understand.
No, negative.
2.0 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT
2.1 Introduction
The purpose of respirator decision logic is to ensure technical accuracy and
uniformity in the selection of respirators and to provide necessary criteria to
support this selection. The decision logic is a step-by-step elimination of
inappropriate respirators until only those that are acceptable remain. Judgment
by persons knowledgeable of inhalation hazards and respiratory protection
equipment is essential to ensure appropriate selection of respirators.
The primary technical criteria for what constitutes a permissible respirator are
based on the technical requirements of 30 CFR 11. Safety standards and NUS
policy will allow only respirators approved under 30 CFR 11. The referenced
Subparts of 30 CFR 11 give technical descriptions concerning each type or class of
respirators referenced in the decision logic; 30 CFR 11 should be used with the
RP-19
-------
DRAFT
decision logic in order to properly understand the criteria for the specification of
allowable respirators. Protection factors are criteria used in determining what
limiting concentrations are to be permitted for each respirator type that will
afford adequate protection to the wearer.
Throughout this text, reference is made to PELs. Prudent, accepted practice
dictates the use of the most restrictive between the current ACGIH TLVs, which
are updated each year, and the PEL, which is only periodically updated.
2.2 General Decision Logic Flowchart
The following material used in concert with the decision logic charts
(Exhibit RP-5, RP-6, and RP-7) provides a formalized selection guide for
respiratory protection.
1. Step 1 - Assemble Information on Substance
Assemble necessary lexicological, safety, and research information for
the particular contaminant. The following are required:
a. Permissible exposure limits specified in 29 CFR 1910.1000 (Tables Z-1,
2-2, and Z-3).
b. Warning properties if the substance is a gas or a vapor. Refer to
Section 2.4.2 below.
c. Eye irritation potential of the substance. Refer to Section 2.4.4
below.
d. LFL for the substance. Refer to Section 2.4.6 below.
e. IDLH concentration for the substance. Refer to Section 2.4.5 below.
RP-20
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-5
FORMAT FOR DETERMINING RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
QUESTIONNAIRE
GAS MASK AND RESPIRATOR RECOMMENDATION
Name and address of company
seeking recommendation
Name of individual.
His phone number.
1 Material—
a. Chemical name.
b. Trade name
c. Formula
d. TIV or TWA OSHA 1910.1000 Current ACGIH.
Form in which it will be used—
a. Liquid? b. Solid? c. Gaseous?
d. If gaseous, is it an organic vapor? or add gas?
other?
3. Maximum expected concentration—
a.__ parts per million, or
b milligrams per cubic meter
4. Will material be heated?
a. If so, to what temperature? °F.
5. What is the odor threshold of the material?
6. At what concentration is the material considered to be immediately dangerous to life or health?.
7. Can the substance be absorbed through the skin?
8. Irritant to ayes? respiratory tract?__ skin?
9. At what concentration is it an irritant?
10. If the substance is known to be flammable, what are the lower and upper flammable limits, in percent by volume?
11 What is the vapor pressure of the material?
12. Will material be mixed with other chemicals? If so, give details
13. Any possibility of oxygen deficiency?
14. Can good ventilation of the area be maintained?
15. Will exposure be continuous? or intermittent?
16. Will the respiratory device be used for routine exposures, or will it be used as an escape device?.
17 Provide as much detail as possible concerning exposure conditions.
RP-21
-------
"D
I
Aii
*IDUl
UI*
PltU
UfM
1
line w
see
id
*
t
U
1
»f* Qn*i
1
1
I
)
EXHIBIT RP-5
SELECTION OF RESPIRATORY EQUIPMENT (LUNDIN, A., 1979)
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-7
ANSI Z88.Z PROPOSED RESPIRATORY MAXIMUM USE LIMITS
RnptfAtOf
1 1/4 or 1/2 Facepiece
Particulate Rltar'
2. 1 /4 or 1-/2 Facepiece
Vapor Gar
3. Full Facepiece
Paniculate Filter"
4. Full Facepiece
Vapor Gas
5. Powered Air-Purifying
(Any Respiratory Inlet
Cover)'
Pwmmtd for Uu
m Atmatghtrn
0, Dif.
No
No
No
No
No
IDLH
No
No
No
No
NO
MUL Rnpmor Fit Indu According to Fitting Mtihod Uud
Qualmim
10
Lower of
10 or MUL-C
100
Lower of
100 or MUL-C
MUL-C
S»rra-Quamranv«
200
Lower of
200 or MUL-C
1000
Lower of
1000 or MUL-C
MUL-C
Qujnmaov*
As
Measured
on
Each
Parson
or
MUL-C
MUL-C IMUL of Caitndgt or CaitaM Ustdl
"UM High Effiatncy Filters for PamcuJnu win TLV Lja than .05 mq/mi
S. Air-Una (Demand)
1 /4 or 1 /2 Facepiece
7. Air-Una (Demand)
Full Facepiece
3 Line (Demand)
Facepiece with
Escape Provision
9. Hose Mask
Full Facepiece
10. Air-Line (Pressure
Demand or Constant
Flow)
1 1. Air-Uns (Pressure
Demand with
Escape Provision)
12. Air-Une (Constant
Flow with Escape
Provision)
No
No
Yas'
No
No
Yes*
Yes*
No
No
Yas
No
No
Yes
Yas
10
100
100
100
N/A
N/A
N/A
200
1000
1000
1000
N/A
N/A
N/A
As
Measured
an
Each
Person
N/A
N/A
N/A
'Escagt Provision Must S» an Auuliarv Self-Contained Air Supply
13. Demand SCBA
(Open or Closed
Circuit) Full Facepiece
or Mouthpiece
14. Pressure Demand
SCBA Half or
Yes
Yes
Full Facepieca
Yes
Yes
100
N/A
1000
N/A
As
Measured
on Each
Person
N/A
15. Combination Devices
Not Usted
Use Lowest MUL Usted
RP-23
-------
DRAFT
f. Any possibility of poor sorbent efficiency at IDLH concentration and
below. Refer to Section 2.4.3 below.
g. Any possibility of systemic injury or death resulting from absorbance
of the substance (as a gas or vapor) through the skin. Refer to Section
2.4.1 below.
h. Any possibility of severe skin irritation resulting from contact of the
skin with corrosive gases, vapors, or particulates. Refer to Section
2.4.1 below.
i. The vapor pressure of the substance (and equivalent ppm for saturated
air).
j. Any possibility of high heat of reaction with sorbent material in
cartridge or canister.
k. Any possibility of shock sensitivity of substance sorbed on sorbent of
cartridge or canister.
2. Step 2 - Determine Physical State of Substance
Determine the physical state(s) of the substance as it is likely to be
encountered in the occupational environment. It will be either a gas or
vapor; a particulate (dust, fume or mist); or a combination.
3. Step 3 - Assemble a Table of Permissible Respiratory Protection for
Substance
This is done using the material from Step 1 and the appropriate specific
decision logic chart from Section 2.3 below and respirator protection
factors. See Section 2.4.7 for a discussion of protection factors.
RP-24
-------
DRAFT
2.3 Specific Decision Logic Charts
Specific decision logic charts for respiratory protection against gases or vapors and
against particulates are shown in Exhibits RP-8 and RP-9, respectively.
2.4 Decision Logic Criteria
2.4.1 Skin Absorption and Irritation
Respirator selection criteria are based primarily on the inhalation hazard of the
substance. A supplied-air suit may protect the skin from extremely toxic
substances that may be absorbed through the skin or from substances which may
cause severe skin irritation or injury. Supplied-air suits are not covered in
30 CFR 11. Data are not available upon which to make recommendations for
supplied-air suits for all types of exposures.
Where information is available indicating systemic injury or death resulting from
absorbance of a gas or vapor through the skin or where severe skin irritation or
injury may occur from exposure to a gas, vapor, or particulate, the following
statement is included as a footnote to the respirator tables, and both the employee
and employer are cautioned in the appendices concerning their use:
• Use of supplied-air suit may be necessary to prevent skin contact and
respiratory exposure from airborne concentrations of (specific substance).
Supplied-air suits should be selected, used, and maintained under the
immediate supervision of persons knowledgeable in the limitations and
potential life endangering characteristics of supplied-air suits. Where
supplied-air suits are used above a concentration which may be IDLH
(concentration), an auxiliary positive-pressure, self-contained breathing
apparatus must also be worn.
RP-25
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-8. SPECIFIC DECISION LOGIC CHART
FOR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AGAINST GASES OR VAPORS
Condition
Selection Sequence
Routine use
Entry and escape from
unknown concentrations
Firefighting
Escape
Consider skin irritation and sorption of
material through the skin (see Section 2.4.1).
the
Poor warning properties - Eliminate all air-
purifying respirators (see Section 2.4.2).
Eye irritation - Eliminate or restrict use of half
mask respirators (see Section 2.4.4).
IDLH or LFL - Above this concentration eliminate
all but positive-pressure, self-contained breathing
apparatus and combination positive-pressure
supplied-air respirator with auxiliary positive-
pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus.
List all allowed respirators by condition and use
and type.
Use positive-pressure, self-contained breathing
apparatus or combination positive-pressure,
supplied-air respirator with auxiliary positive-
pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus.
Use positive-pressure,
apparatus.
self-contained breathing
Use gas mask or escape self-contained breathing
apparatus (see Section 2.4.3).
RP-26
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-9. SPECIFIC DECISION LOGIC CHART FOR
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AGAINST PARTICULATES
Condition
Selection Sequence
Routine use
Entry and escape from
unknown concentrations
Firefighting
Escape
Consider skin irritation or sorption of the
material through the skin (see Section 2.4.1).
Eye irritation - Eliminate or restrict use of half-
mask respirators (see Section 2.4.4).
Systemic poison - Eliminate single-use respira-
tors.
3
For permissible exposures less than 0.05 mg/m -
Eliminate dust, fume, and mist respirators except
with high-efficiency paniculate filter.
IDLH or LFL - Above this concentration eliminate
all but positive-pressure, self-contained breathing
apparatus and combination positive-pressure,
supplied-air respirator with auxiliary positive-
pressure self-contained breathing apparatus (see
Section 2.4.5).
List all allowed respirators by condition of use
and type.
Use positive-pressure, self-contained breathing
apparatus or combination positive-pressure,
supplied-air respirator with positive-pressure,
self-contained breathing apparatus.
Use positive-pressure, self-contained breathing
apparatus (see Section 2.4.6).
Use gas mask or escape self-contained breathing
apparatus (see Section 2.4.3).
RP-27
-------
DRAFT
The supplied-air suit statement is an advisory footnote. The decision as to whether
to include the footnote is made by the NIOSH/OSHA Review Committees on the
basis of available information. Since most information concerning skin irritation is
not quantitative but rather is presented in commonly used descriptive terms, such
as "a strong skin irritant, highly irritating to the skin" and "corrosive to the skin,"
the decision made by the committees concerning skin irritation is a judgmental
decision often based on nonquantitative information. As a guideline for inclusion
of the supplied-air suit statement for substances that are sorbed through the skin, a
single skin penetration LD5Q of 2 g/kg for any species is often used.
The footnote is advisory in nature and its inclusion does not make the use of
supplied-air suits mandatory. Further, employers may use supplied-air suits in any
situation where they provide adequate protection, whether there is an advisory
footnote in the respirator table or not. To ensure the health and safety of persons
using supplied-air suits, it is imperative that the the suits be used under the
immediate supervision of persons knowledgeable in the limitations and potential
life-endangering characteristics of supplied-air suits.
2.4.2 Poor Warning Properties (Refer to Exhibit RP-10)
It is important to realize that 30 CFR 11 approvals for air-purifying (organic vapor)
devices prohibit use against organic vapors with poor warning properties.
Specifically, 30 CFR 11.90 (b) (note 4) covers gas masks (canister respirators) and
30 CFR 11.150 (note 7) covers chemical cartridge respirators. The approvals in 30
CFR 11 thus are only for those organic vapors with adequate warning properties.
Warning properties include odor, eye irritation, and respiratory irritation. Warning
properties relying upon human senses are not foolproof. However, they provide
some indication to the wearer of possible sorbent exhaustion or of poor facepiece
fit or other respirator malfunction.
RP-28
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-10. COMPARISON OF SELECTED ODOR THRESHOLDS AND TLVS FOR
CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS
(SHEET 1 OF 2)
COMPOUNDS ODOR THRESHOLD (ppm) TLV (ppm)
Group 1 - Odor Threshold and TLV Approximately the Same
Arsine 0.21 0.05
Cyclohexane 300 300
Cyclohexanol 100 50
Ethyl benzene 200 100
Ethylene diamine 11 10
Hydrogen chloride 10 5
Methyl acetate 200 200
Methylamine 10 10
Methyl chloroform 500 350
Nitrogen dioxide 5 3
Propyl alcohol 200 200
Turpentine 200 100
Group 2 - Odor Threshold from 2 to 10 Times the TLV
Acrolein 0.2 0.1
Ally! alcohol 7 2
Crotonaldehyde 7 2
1,2 Dichloroethylene 500 200
Dichloroethyl ether 35 5
Dimethyl acetamide 46 10
Epichlorhydrin 10 2
Hydrogen selenide 0.3 0.05
Isopropyl glycidyl ether 300 50
Styrene monomer 200 50
Group 3 - Odor Threshold At Least 10 Times the TLV
Acrylonitrile 21 2
Bromoform 530 0.5
Camphor (synthetic) 1.6-200 2
Carbon disulfide (a) 10
Carbon tetrachloride 75 5
Chloroacetophenone 1 0.05
Chloroform 200 10
Chloropicrin 1 0.1
Diglycidyl ether 5 0.1
Dimethylformamide 100 10
Ethylene oxide 500 10
RP-29
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-10. COMPARISON OF SELECTED ODOR THRESHOLDS AND TLVS FOR
CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS (CONTINUED)
(SHEET 2 OF 2)
COMPOUNDS ODOR THRESHOLD (ppm) TLV (ppm)
Group 3 - Odor Threshold At Least 10 Times the TLV (Continued)
3
Mercury vapor (a) 0.1 mg/m
Methyl bromide (a) 5
Methyl chloride (a) 50
Methyl formate 2000 100
Methanol 2000 200
Methyl cyclohexanol 500 50
Phosgene 1.0 0.1
Toluene 2,4 diisocyanate 2 .005
RP-30
-------
DRAFT
Adequate warning properties can be assumed when the substance odor, taste, or
irritation effects are detectable and persistent at concentrations at or below the
permissible exposure limit.
If the odor or irritation threshold of a substance is more than three times greater
than the permissible exposure limit, this substance should be considered to have
poor warning properties. If the substance odor or irritation threshold is somewhat
above the permissible exposure limit (not in excess of three times the limit) and
there is no ceiling limit, consideration is given to whether undetected exposure in
this concentration range could cause serious or irreversible health effects. If not,
the substance is considered to have adequate warning properties. Some substances
have extremely low thresholds of odor and irritation in relation to the permissible
exposure limit. Because of this, these substances can be detected by a worker
within the facepiece of the respirator even when the respirator is functioning
properly. These substances are, therefore, considered to have poor warning
properties.
Though 30 CFR 11 does not specifically eliminate air-purifying respirators for
pesticides with poor warning properties, prudent practice dictates that a respirator
should not be used to protect against any substance with poor warning properties.
2.4.3 Sorbents
There are certain limitations involved with the use of sorbents in
cartridge/canister sorbents. When the following conditions occur, a sorbent
cartridge is not recommended:
1. Where supporting evidence exists of immediate (less than three minutes)
breakthrough time at the IDLH concentration and below for a cartridge or
canister sorbent, air-purifying devices shall not be allowed for any use,
escape or otherwise. See Exhibit RP-11.
RP-31
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-11.
EFFECT OF SOLVENT VAPOR ON RESPIRATOR CARTRIDGE
EFFICIENCY
Solvent
Time to Reach One Percent
Breakthrough
Aromatics
Benzene
Toluene
Ethyl benzene
m-Xylene
Cumene
Mesitylene
Alcohols
Methanol
Ethanol
Isopropanol
Allyl alcohol
n-Propanol
sec-Butanol
Butanol
2-Methoxyethanol
Isoamyl alcohol
4-Methyl-2-pentanol
2-Ethoxyethanol
Amyl alcohol
2-Ethyl-1-butanol
Monochlorides
Methyl chloride
Vinyl chloride
Ethyl chloride
Allyl chloride
1-Chloropropane
1-Chlorobutane
Chlorocyclopentane
Chlorobenzene
1-Chlorohexane
o-Chlorotoluene
1-Chloroheptane
3-Chloromethyl heptane
Dichlorides
Dichloromethane
Trans- 1,2-dichloroethylene
1 ,1-Dichloroethane
cis-1,2-Dichloroethylene
73
94
84
99
81
86
0.2
28
54
66
70
96
115
116
g7
75
77
102
76.5
.05
3.8
5.6
31
25
72
78
107
77
102
82
63
10
33
23
30
RP-32
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-11. EFFECT OF SOLVENT VAPOR ON RESPIRATOR CARTRIDGE
EFFICIENCY (CONTINUED)
Solvent
Time to Reach One Percent
Breakthrough
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloropropane
1,4-Dichlorobutane
o-Dichlorobenzene
Trichlorides
Chloroform
Methyl chloroform
Trichloroethylene
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
1,2,3-Trichloropropane
Tetra and Pentachlorides
Carbon tetrachloride
Perchloroethylene
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
Pentachloroethane
Acetates
Methyl acetate
Vinyl acetate
Ethyl acetate
Isopropyl acetate
Isopropenyl acetate
Propyl acetate
Allyl acetate
sec-Butyl acetate
Butyl acetate
Isopentyl acetate
2-Methoxyethyl acetate
1,3-Dimethylbutyl acetate
Amyl acetate
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate
Hexyl acetate
Ketones
Acetone
2-Butanone
2-Pentanone
3-Pentanone
4-Methyl-2-pentanone
Mesityl oxide
Cyclopentanone
3-Heptanone
2-Heptanone
54
65
108
109
33
40
55
72
111
77
107
104
93
33
55
67
65
83
79
76
83
77
71
93
61
73
80
67
37
82
104
94
96
122
141
91
101
RP-33
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-11. EFFECT OF SOLVENT VAPOR ON RESPIRATOR CARTRIDGE
EFFICIENCY (CONTINUED)
Solvent
Time to Reach One Percent
Breakthrough
Cyclohexanone
5-Methyl-3-heptanone
3-Methylcyclohexanone
Diisobutyl ketone
4-Methylcyclohexanone
Alkanes
Pentane
Hexane
Methylcyclopentane
Cyclohexane
Cyclohexene
2,2,4-Trimethylpentane
Heptane
Methycyclohexane
5-Ethylidene-2-norbornene
Nonane
Decane
Amines
Methyl amine
Ethyl amine
Isopropyl amine
Propyl amine
Diethyl amine
Butyl amine
Triethyl amine
Dipropyl amine
Diisopropyl amine
Cyclohexyl amine
Dibutyl amine .
Miscellaneous Materials
Acrylonitrile
Pyridine
1-Nitropropane
Methyl iodide
Dibromomethane
1,2-Dibromoethane
Acetic anhydride
Bromobenzene
126
86
101
71
111
61
52
62
69
86
68
78
69
87
76
71
12
40
66
90
88
110
81
93
77
112
76
49
119
143
12
82
141
124
142
RP-34
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-11. EFFECT OF SOLVENT VAPOR ON RESPIRATOR CARTRIDGE
EFFICIENCY (CONTINUED)
Sources for reprints of respirator cartridge efficiency studies (by G. 0. Nelson et
al.) are given below.
Ruch, W. E., G. 0. Nelson, C. L Lindeken, R. E. Johnsen, and D. J. Hodgkins:
Respirator Cartridge Efficiency Studies: I. Experimental Design. American
Industrial Hygiene Association Journal, 33, 105 (1972).
Nelson, G. O., and D. H. Hodgkins: Respirator Cartridge Efficiency Studies: II.
Preparation of Test Atmospheres. American Industrial Hygiene Association
Journal, 33, 110 (1972).
Nelson, G. O., R. E. Johnsen, C. L Lindeken, and R. D. Taylor: Respirator
Cartridge Efficiency Studies: III. A Mechanical Breathing Machine To Simulate
Human Respiration. American Industrial Hygiene Association Journal, 33, 745
(1972).
Nelson, G. 0., and C. A. Harder: Respirator Cartridge Efficiency Studies: IV.
Effects of Steady-State and Pulsating Flow. American Industrial Hygiene
Association Journal, 33, 797 (1972).
Nelson, G. 0., and C. A. Harder: Respirator Cartridge Efficiency Studies: V.
Effect of Solvent Vapor. American Industrial Hygiene Association Journal, 35, 391
(1974).
Nelson, G. O., C. A. Harder, and B. E. Bigler: Respirator Cartridge Efficiency
Studies: VI. Effect of Concentration, Lawrence Livermore Laboratory, Report
UCRL-76184 (November 1974).
RP-35
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-11. EFFECT OF SOLVENT VAPOR ON RESPIRATOR CARTRIDGE
EFFICIENCY (CONTINUED)
Nelson, G.O., A.N. Correia, and C.A. Harder: Respirator Cartridge Efficiency
Studies: VII. Effect of Relative Humidity and Temperature, Lawrence Livermore
Laboratory, Report UCRL-77390 (August 1975).
Nelson, G.O., and A.N. Correia: Respirator Cartridge Efficiency Studies: VIII.
Summary and Conclusions. American Industrial Hygiene Association Journal, 37, 9
(1976).
Note: The cartridge pairs were tested at 1000 ppm, 50 percent relative humidity,
22°C, and 53.3 l/min (equivalent to a moderately active workload). Time to
achieve a one percent breakthrough is noted for each cartridge pair.
Cartridges were preconditioned at room temperature and 50 percent
relative humidity for at least 24 hours prior to testing. MSA cartridges or
AO cartridges were used for most tests.
RP-36
-------
DRAFT
The purpose of establishing an IDLH exposure concentration is to ensure
that the worker can escape without injury or irreversible health effects
from an IDLH concentration in the event of failure of the respiratory
protective equipment. The IDLH is considered a maximum concentration
above which only highly reliable breathing apparatus providing maximum
worker protection is permitted. Since IDLH values are conservatively set,
any approved respirator may be used up to its maximum use concentration
below the IDLH.
2. Where there is reason to suspect that the cartridge sorbent does not
provide adequate sorption efficiency against a specific contaminant, use
of such sorbent is not to be allowed. However, where another sorbent
material has been demonstrated to be effective against a specific
contaminant, approved respirators using the effective sorbent material
are allowed.
3. Where there is reason to suspect that a sorbent has a high heat of reaction
with a substance, use of that sorbent is not allowed.
4. Where there is reason to suspect that a substance sorbed on a sorbent of a
cartridge or canister is shock sensitive, use of air-purifying respirators is
not allowed.
2.4.4 Eye Irritation
In addition to respiratory protection, it is quite important to consider a chemical's
potential for producing eye irritation or damage. The following guidelines deal
with eye protection:
1. For routine work operations, any perceptible eye irritation is considered
unacceptable. Therefore, only full facepiece respirators are permissible
in contaminant concentrations that produce eye irritation. Protection
may be required in certain concentrations of gases and vapors. For
RP-37
-------
DRAFT
escape, some eye irritation is permissible if it is determined that such
irritation would not inhibit escape and such irritation is reversible.
2. Where quantitative eye irritation data cannot be found in literature
references, and theoretical considerations indicate that substance should
not be an eye irritant, half-facepiece respirators are allowed.
3. Where a review of the literature indicates a substance causes eye
irritation but no eye irritation threshold is specified, the data will be
evaluated to determine whether quarter- or half-facepiece respirators can
be used.
2.4.5 IDLH
The definition of IDLH provided in 30 CFR 11.3(t) is as follows:
"Immediately dangerous to life or health" means conditions that pose an immediate
threat to life or health or conditions that pose an immediate threat of severe
exposure to contaminants, such as radioactive materials, which are likely to have
adverse cumulative or delayed effects on health.
In establishing the IDLH concentration the following factors are considered:
1. Escape without loss of life or irreversible health effects. Thirty minutes
is considered the maximum permissible exposure time for escape.
2. Severe eye or respiratory irritation or other reactions that would prevent
escape without injury.
IDLH should be determined from the following sources:
1. Specific IDLH provided in the literature, such as the AIHA Hygienic
Guides or Exhibit RP-12.
RP-38
-------
Chemical Name
IDLH Level
Chemical Name
IDtH Level
33
T>
GJ
CO
Acelaldehyde
Acelic acid
Acelic anhydride
Acetone
Acelonilrile
Acetylene letrabromide
Acrolein
Acrylamide
Acrylonilrile
Aldrin
Ally! alcohol
Ally! chloride
Allyl glycidyl ether
2-Aminopyridine
Ammonia
Ammonium cullamale
n-Amyl acelale
sec-Amy! acetate
Aniline
Anisidine lo.p isomersl
Antimony and compounds
ANTU
Arsine
Azinphos-melhyl
Barium soluble
Benzene
Benzoyl peroxide
Benzyl chloride
Boron oxide
Boron Irifluoride
10.
1.
1.
20.
4.
4.
5.
4.
9.
2.
1.
000 ppm
000 ppm
000 ppm
000 ppm
000 ppm
10 ppm
5 ppm
NA
000 ppm (Ca)
100 mg/m3
150 ppm
300 ppm
270 ppm
5 ppm
500 ppm
000 mg/m3
000 ppm
000 ppm
100 ppm
50 mg/m3
80 mg/m3
100 mg/m3
6 ppm
5 mg/m3
250 mg/m3
000 ppm
000 mg/m3
10 ppm
NA
100 ppm
Bromine
Bromolorm
Butadiene
2-Bulanone
2-Buloxyl elhanol
sec~Butyl acetate
lerl-Bulyl acetate
Butyl acetate
sec-Butyl alcohol
ten-Butyl alcohol
Butyl alcohol
terl-Butyl chromate
n-Bulyl glycidyl ether
Butyl mercaptan
Bulylamine
p-(erl-Butyl toluene
Cadmium dust
Cadmium fume
Calcium arsenale
Calcium oxide
Camphor
Carbaryt (sevin)
Carbon black
Carbon dioxide
Carbon disulfide
Carbon monoxide
Carbon telrachloride
Chlordane
Chlorinated camphene
Chlorinated diphenyl
oxide
20
3
10
8
10
10
8
8
3
2
2
1
50
1
10
.000
.000
700
.000
.000
.000
.000
.000
.000
.500
.500
.000
.000
40
40
100
250
200
625
.000
500
.500
300
500
200
5
ppm
NA
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
?
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
NA
ppm
ppm
ppm
0
X
LEVELS
m
X
DC
CO
H
7)
TJ
to
ppm (Cal
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
O
33
-------
Chemical Name
IDLH Level
13
1
Chlorine
Chlorine dioxide
Chlorine Irifluoride
1-Chloro-l-nitropropane
Chloroacelaldehyda
alpha-Chloroacetophenone
Chlorobenzene
o-Chlorbenzylidene molononitrile
Chlorobromome thane
Chlorodiphenyl (4?% chlorine)
Chloroform
Chloropicrm
Chloroprene
Chromic acids and chromates
Chromium metal and insoluble
sails
Chromium as soluble chromic
and chromous salts
Coal lar pitch volaliles
Cobalt metal fumes and dust
Copper dusls and mists
Copper fume
Cotton dust (raw)
Crag herbicide
Ctesofl
Crolonaldehyde
Cumene
Cyanide
Cyclohexane
Cyclohexanol
Chemical Mama
2
2
5
1
5
B
10
3
25
10
20
.000
250
100
,400
2
.000
10
.000
4
400
30
500
250
400
20
500
.000
250
400
.000
50
.000
.500
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
mg/m3
ppm
mg/m3
ppm
mg/m3 (Cal
ppm (Ca)
ppm
ppm (Cal
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
mg/m3
NA
NA
mg/m3
mg/m1*
mg/m~
prig/m3
ppm
mg/m^
ppm
ppm
CycloheNanone
Cyclopentadiene
2.4 -D
DDT
Decaborane
Demelon
Diacelone alcohol
Diazomelhane
Diborane
Oibulyl phosphate
Dibulylphthalate
1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroelhane
1.3~Dichloro'5,5~dimethvlhvdanloin
o- Die hloroben zone
p-Dichlorobenzene
Dtchlorodilluoromethane
1.1-Dichloroelhane
Dichloroethyl ether
1.2~Dichloroethylene
Dichlorornonofluoromethane
Dichloroletrafluoroelhane
Dichlorvos
Dieldrin
Dielhylamine
Dielhylamino ethanol
Difluorodibromomethane
Diglycidyl ether
Diisobulyl kelone
Diisopropylamine
Dimethyl acelamide
IDLH Level
5.000 ppm
2.000 ppm
500 mg/m3
NA
20 ppm
20 mg/m3
2.100 ppm
10 ppm
40 ppm
125 ppm
9,300 mg/m3
150 ppm
5 mg/m3
1,700 ppm
1,000 ppm
50,000 ppm
4,000 ppm
250 ppm
4.000 ppm
50.000 ppm
50.000 ppm
200 mg/in3
450 mg/m3
2,000 ppm
500 ppm
2,500 ppm
85 ppm
2,000 ppm
1,000 ppm
400 ppm
DRAFT
-------
m
Chemical Norn*
lOLHLevel
Cyclohenene
Dimethyl-t.2-dibromo-
2.2-dichloroethyl phosphate
Dimelhylamina
Dimelhylaniline
1.1-Dime! hylhydrazino
Dimethylphlhalale
Dimethylsulfate
Oinilro-o-cresol
Dinilrobeniene
Dinitrotoluene IDNT)
Oio>ane
Diphenyl
Dipropylena glycol methyl ether
Endrin
Epichlorohydrin
EPN
Elhanolamine
2-Elhoxyelhanol
2-Ethoxyethvlacelale
Ethyl acelate
Ethyl acrylale
Ethyl benzene
Ethyl bromide
Ethyl butyl Irelone
Elhyl chloride
Elhyl ether
Ethyl formate
Elhyl mercaptan
Elhyl silicate
tihylamme
Chemical Name
10.00 ppm
1.800
2.000
100
50
9.300
10
5
200
200
200
300
200
100
50
1.000
6.000
2.500
10.000
2.000
2.000
3.500
3.000
20.000
19.000
8.000
2.500
1.000
4.000
mg/m3
ppm
ppm
ppm
mg/m^
ppm
mg/m^
mg/m'
mg/m^
ppm (Ca|
mg/m*
NA
mg/m-*
Ppm
mg/m^
Ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
Ppm
Ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
Ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
Dimethyl lormamide
Elhylene dibromide
Elhylene dichloride
Ethylone glycol dinitrale
(niiioglycerin)
Elhylene onide
Elhylenediamine
n-Ethylmorpholine
Ferbam
Ferroranadium dust
Fluoride dust
Fluorine
Fluorolrichlorome thane
Formaldehyde
Formic acid
Furfural
Furfuryl alcohol
Glycidol
Graphite, natural
Hafnium and compounds
Heptachlor
Heptane
HeMachlorelhane
Hexachloronaphthalene
Henane
2-He«anone
He^one
iec-He«yl acetate
IDLH Level
3.500 ppm
400 ppm
1.000 ppm
80 ppm
800 ppm
2.000 ppm
2.000 ppm
NA
500 mg/m3
500 mg/m3
25 ppm
10.000 ppm
100 ppm
100 ppm
250 ppm
250 ppm
500 ppm
NA
250
100
4.250
300
2
5.000
5.000
3.000
4.000
mg/m3
mg/m3
ppm
ppm
mg/m3
ppm
ppm
PPm
ppm
O
33
-------
>p
O i
m
3§
C 23
Chemical Name
IOIH Laval
Chemical Name
IOLH Level
3D
t)
Ethylene chlorohydrin
Hydrogen bromide
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen cyanide
Hydrogen fluoride
Hydrogen peroxide
Hydrogen selenide
Hydrogen sulfide
Hydroquinone
Iodine
Iron oxide fume
Isoamyl ncelale
Isoamyl alcohol
Isobulyl acelale
Isobutyl alcohol
Isophonone
Isopropyl acetate
Isopropyl alcohol
Isopropyl glycidyl
Isopropylamine
Isopropylether
Kelene
Lead and inorganic
lead compounds
Lead arcenale
Lindane
Lithium hydride
10 ppm
50 ppm
tOO ppm
50 ppm
20 ppm
75 ppm
2 ppm
300 ppm
200 mg/m3
10
3.000
8.000
7.500
8.000
800
16.000
20.000
1.500
4.000
10.000
NA
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
Ppm
25 ppm
variable
300 mg/m3
1.000 mg/m3
50 ma/m3
Hydrazino
Magnesium oxide lume
Malathion
Maleic anhydride
Manganese
Mercury
Mesityl oxide
Methoxychlor
o-Methylcyclohexanone
Melhyl(n-amyl)kelone
5-Melhyl'3-heplanone
Methyl acetate
Methyl acetylene
Melhylacelv1ene~Dropadiene
mixture (based on LFL)
Methyl acrylale
Methyl alcohol
Methyl bromide
Methyl cellosolve
Methyl cellosolve acetate
Methyl chloride
Methyl chloroform
Methyl formate
Methyl iodide
Methyl itobulyl carbinol
Methyl isocyanate
Methyl mercaptan
Methyl melhacrylate
Alpha~methyl styrene
80
5.000
10,000
28
5.000
7.500
2.500
4.000
3.000
10.000
11.000
20.000
1.000
25.000
2.000
2.000
4.500
10.000
1.000
ppm
NA
mg/m3
NA
ppm
mg/m3
ppm
mg/m3
Ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
5.000 ppm
800 ppm
2.000 ppm
20 ppm
400 ppm
4.000 ppm
5.000 ppm
a
33
-------
Q
m
33
T3
Chemical Name
IDLH Level
LPG (Liquified petroleum
gas)
Melhylcyclohexane
Melhylcyclohe xanol
Melhylene bisphenyl isocyonole
Malhylene chloride
Mica
Molybdenum soluble compounds
Molybdenum insoluble compounds
Monomelhyl amiline
-p Monomelhyl hydrazine
~P Morpholine
4^
00 Naphthalene
Naphtha, coal tar
Nickel carbonyl
Nickel metal and soluble
compounds
Nicotine
Nitric acid
Nitric oxide
p-Nilroaniline
Nitrobenzene
p-Nilrochlorobenzene
Nilroelhane
Nilrogen dioxide
Nitrogen trilluoride
Nilromelhane
1-Nilropropane
Nitrololuene
19.000 ppm
10.000 ppm
10.000 ppm
10 ppm
5.000 ppm
NA
NA
NA
100 ppm
5 ppm
8.000 ppm
SOO ppm
10.000 ppm
0.001 ppm (Ca)
NA
Chemical Name
35
100
too
300
200
.000
,000
50
000
300
300
200
mg/m*
ppm
ppm
mg/m3
Ppm
ppm
Ppm
Ppm
Ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
Methylal
Melhylamine
di-sec-Octyl phlhalale
Oil mist, mineral
Organo (alkyl) mercury compounds
Osmium lelroxide
Oxalic acid
Oxygen difluoride
Ozone
Paraquat
Paralhion
Penlaborane
Penlachloronaphlhalene
Penlachlorophenol
Pentane
2-Penlanone
Perchloromethyl mercaplan
Perchloryl fluoride
Petroleum distillates mixture
(naphtha)
Phenol
Phenyl ether
Phenyl elher-biphenyl mixture
Phenyl glycidyl ether
p-Phenylene diamine
Phenyl hydrazine
Phosdrin
Phosgene
Phosphine
Phosphoric acid
IDLH Level
10.000 ppm
100 ppm
NA
NA
10 mg/m3
1 mg/m3
500 mg/m3
0.5 ppm
10 ppm
1 .5 mg/m3
20 mg/m3
3 ppm
NA
ISO mg/m3
5.000 ppm
5.000 ppm
10 ppm
385 ppm
10,000 ppm
100 ppm
25 mg/m3
250 ppm
40 mg/m3
2 ppm
200 ppm
NA
O
3J
-------
Chemical Name
30
TJ
I
Oclachloronaphlhalene
Octane
Phosphorus trichloride
Phosphorus, yellow
Phlhalic anhydride
Picric acid
Pival
Platinum soluble sails
Portland cement mixture
Propane
n-Propyl acetate
Propyl alcohol
n-Propyl nitrate
Propylene dichloride
Propylene imine
Propylene o»ide
Pyrethrum: (mixtures)
Pyridine
Quinone
Rhodium metal fume and dusts
Rhodium soluble salts
Ronnel
Rolenone (commercial)
Selenium compounds
Selenium hexafluoride
Silica, amorphous
Silica, cryslaline
Silver metal, soluble compounds
IDUH Level
Chemical Name
IOLH Level
200 mg/m3
3.750
SO
10.000
100
200
20.000
8.000
000
000
000
500
000
000
3.600
ppm
ppm
NA
ppm
mg/m3
mg/m3
NA
NA
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
mg/m3
ppm
75 ppm
NA
NA
5.000 mg/m3
5.000 mg/m3
100 mg/m3
5 ppm
NA
NA
NA
Phosphorus penlachloride
Phosphorus pentasulfide
Sodium hydroxide
Slibine
Sloddard solvent
Strychnine
Slyrene
Sulfur dioxide
Sulfur monochloride
Sulfur penlafluoride
Sulfuric acid
Sulfuryl fluoride
2.4.5-T
Talc
Tantalum metal, oxide dusls
TEDP
Tellurium, compounds (as tellurium)
Tellurium hexalluoride
TEPP
Terphenyls
1.1.2.2-Telrachloro-1.2-
difluoroelhane
1.l.2.2-Tetrachloro-2.2-
difluoroelhane
1.1.2.2-Telrachloroethane
Telrachloroelhylene
Telrachloronaphihalene
Telraelhyl lead
Tetrahydrofuran
Telramalhyl load
5
5
1
5
3
200 mg/m3
750 ma/m3
200 mg/m3
40 ppm
.000 ppm
3 mg/m3
.000 mg/m3
100 ppm
10 ppm
1 ppm
80 mg/m3
,000 ppm
.000 mg/m3
NA
NA
35 mg/m3
NA
1 ppm
10 mg/m3
.500 mg/m3
15.000 ppm
15.000 ppm
150 ppm
500 ppm
20 mg/m3
40 mg/m3
20.000 ppm
40 mg/m3
O
30
-------
(Cal - NtOSH has recommended thai the substance be treated as en occupational carcinogen.
m
en m
5<
m
m r—
2 W
Chemical Name
IOLH level
Soapslone
Sodium lluoroacetate
Tetryl
Thallium compounds, soluble
Thiram
Tin compounds, inorganic
Tin compounds, organic
Titanium dioxide
Toluene
Toluene-2.4-diisocyanale
o-Toluidine
Tribulyl phosphate
1.1.2-Trichloro-1.2.2-
IriMuoroelhane
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
Trichloroethvlene
Trichloronaphthalene
1.2.3-Trichloco propane
Trielhylamine
Trifluoromonobromo methane
Trinitrotoluene (TNT)
NA
5 mg/m^
NA
20 mg/m^
1,500 mg/m3
400 mg/m3
200 mg/m3
NA
2.000 ppm
10 ppm
100 ppm
1.300 mg/m3
4,500 ppm
500 ppm
1.000 ppm
50 mg/m3
1.000 ppm
1.000 ppm
50.000 ppm
NA
Chemical Name
T«lramalhyl tuccinonilrile
Telranilromethana
Triorlhocresyl phosphate
Triphenyl phosphate
Turpentine
Uranium and insoluble compounds
Uranium and soluble compounds
Vanadium penloxide dust
Vanadium penloxide fume.
Vinyl toluene
WarUrin
Xylene (xylol)
Xylidine
Yttrium and compounds
Zinc chloride fume
Zinc oxide fume
Zirconium compounds
IOLH Level
5 ppm
5 ppm
40 mg/m3
NA
1.900 ppm
30 mg/m3
20 mg/m3
70 mg/m3
70 mg/m3
5.000 ppm
200 mg/m3
10.000 ppm
150 ppm
NA
2.000 mg/m3
NA
500 mg/m3
O
3)
>
31
-------
DRAFT
2. Human exposure data.
3. Acute animal exposure data.
Where such data are lacking, acute toxicological data from analogous substances
may be considered.
The following guidelines should be used to interpret toxicological data reported in
the literature for animal species:
1. Where acute animal exposure data are available (30-min to 4-hr
exposures), the lowest exposure concentration causing death or
irreversible health effects in any species is determined to be the IDLH
concentration.
2. Chronic exposure data may have no relevance to the acute effects and
should be used in determining the IDLH concentration only upon
competent toxicologic judgment.
3. Where there is no toxicologic evidence of an IDLH concentration, 500
times the permissible exposure limit shall determine the upper limit above
which only highly reliable breathing apparatus providing maximum worker
protection is used.
2.4.6 Lower Flammable Limit and Firefighting
In addition to toxic chemicals and irritants, it is necessary to consider flammable
substances. In any atmosphere where there is a likelihood of a chemical fire, there
is the risk of creating toxic vapors in the fire or of asphyxiation caused by
reduction of oxygen content in the air by the products of combustion.
RP-46
-------
DRAFT
Contaminant concentrations in excess of the LFL are considered to be IDLH. At or
above the LFL, the use of respirators is limited to those devices that provide the
maximum protection (i.e., positive-pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus
(SCBA) and the combination positive-pressure, supplied-air respirators with
auxiliary positive-pressure SCBA).
Firefighting is defined by ANSI Z88.5-1971 as being immediately dangerous to life.
For firefighting, the only device providing adequate protection is the positive-
pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus.
2.4.7 Protection Factors
The protection factors of respiratory protection devices are a useful numerical tool
to assist in the choice of a protective system. Protection factors are a measure of
the overall effectiveness of a respirator. Filtering efficiency is a part of the
protection factor and becomes a significant consideration for less efficient air-
purifying respirators.
The protection factor of a given respirator for a specific user times the PEL (or
TLV) for a given substance is the maximum allowable concentration for that
substance for which the respirator may be used. For example, say the protection
factor for a full-face mask respirator is 100. For substance X with a PEL (or TLV)
of 10 ppm, the full-face mask respirator will provide protection up to 1000 ppm.
Note that there is a difference between "quantitative" protection factors and
"qualitative" protection factors. The correct protection factor must be used in
determining the maximum allowable concentration. Exhibit RP-13 lists qualitative
protection factors for several types of respirators.
2.4.8 Variations with 30 CFR 11
The Type A supplied-air respirator is allowed in 30 CFR 11 for use in IDLH
atmospheres. However, the air flow requirement of 50 l/min is insufficient to
maintain a positive pressure in the facepiece under all working conditions.
RP-47
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-13. QUALITATIVE PROTECTION FACTORS
Type Respirator
Facepiece
Pressure
Protection
Factor
Air-purifying
A. Particulate-removing
Single-use, dust
Quarter-mask, dust
Half-mask, dust
Half- or quarter-mask, fume
Half- or quarter-mask, high-
efficiency
Full-facepiece, high-
efficiency
Powered, high-efficiency, all Positive
enclosures
Powered, dust or fume, all Positive
enclosures
B. Gas and vapor-removing
Half-mask
Full-facepiece
Atmosphere-supplying
A. Supplied-air
Demand, half-mask
Demand, full facepiece
Hose mask without blower, full-
facepiece
Pressure-demand, half-mask Positive
Pressure-demand, full-facepiece Positive
Hose mask with blower, full-facepiece
Continuous flow, half-mask Positive
Continuous flow, full-facepiece Positive
Continuous flow, hood, helmet, Positive
or suit
B. Self-contained breathing apparatus
Open-circuit, demand, full-facepiece
Open-circuit, pressure-demand, Positive
full-facepiece
Closed-circuit, oxygen tank-type,
full-facepiece
5
5
10
10
10
50
1,000
Indeter-
minate
10
50
10
50
50
000
000
50
000
000
2,000
50
10,000
50
RP-48
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RP-13. QUALITATIVE PROTECTION FACTORS
(Continued)
Facepiece Protection
Type Respirator Pressure Factor
Combination respirator
A. Any combination of air-purifying and
atmosphere-supplying respirator Use minimum protection
factor listed above
B. Any combination of supplied-air for type and mode of
respirator and an SCBA operation
RP-49
-------
DRAFT
Therefore, this device should have the same protection factor as applied to other
air-purifying and atmosphere-supplying respirators having a negative pressure in
the facepiece (see Appendix I). 30 CFR 11 will require a revision to eliminate
approval of Type A supplied-air respirators for IDLH atmospheres.
Protection factor requirements are not contained in 30 CFR 11. Protection factors
are used in the decision logic. A future amendment to 30 CFR 11 is planned to
include protection factor requirements for specific air-purifying respirators.
In addition, 30 CFR 11 does not permit the use of an escape gas mask against acid
gases or organic vapors with poor warning properties. A change to 30 CFR 11 is
necessary to permit the use of an escape gas mask against substances with poor
warning properties.
2.4.9 Escape
The employer shall provide and ensure that employees carry an escape respirator
where exposure may occur to extremely toxic substances. (An extremely toxic
substance is defined as a gas or vapor having an LC of less than 10 ppm.)
The cartridge pairs were tested at 1000 ppm, 50 percent relative humidity, 22 C,
and 53.3 l/min (equivalent to a moderately achieve a 1 percent breakthrough is
noted for each cartridge pair. Cartridges were preconditioned at room
temperature and 50 percent relative humidity for at least 24 hours prior to testing.
MSA cartridges or AO cartridges were used for most tests.
RP-50
-------
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION WORKSHOP
CONTENTS
DRAFT
SECTION
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2.0
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
AIR-PURIFYING RESPIRATORS
INTRODUCTION
TYPES OF AIR-PURIFYING RESPIRATORS
DONNING OF RESPIRATORS
ESCAPE MASK USE
RESPIRATOR FIT TESTING
STAGE I
POSITIVE-PRESSURE SEALING CHECKS FOR
AIR-PURIFYING RESPIRATORS
NEGATIVE-PRESSURE SEALING CHECK FOR
AIR-PURIFYING RESPIRATORS
STAGE II
PROCEDURES FOR ODOR TEST
PROCEDURES FOR THE IRRITANT SMOKE TEST
FIT-TESTING RESPIRATOR EXERCISE
OBJECTIVE
PROCEDURE
SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS
INTRODUCTION
INSPECTION OF POSITIVE-PRESSURE,
SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS
SCBA EXERCISE
OBJECTIVE
SCBA CHECKOUT
SCBA FIELD EXERCISE
RECHARGING SCBA AIR CYLINDER EXERCISE
PROCEDURE
CARE AND CLEANING OF RESPIRATORS
INSPECTION
CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
REPAIRS
STORAGE
PAGE
RPW-1
RPW-1
RPW-3
RPW-4
RPW-4
RPW-5
RPW-7
RPW-7
RPW-8
RPW-8
RPW-8
RPW-10
RPW-12
RPW-12
RPW-12
RPW-14
RPW-14
RPW-15
RPW-20
RPW-20
RPW-20
RPW-21
RPW-22
RPW-22
RPW-23
RPW-24
RPW-25
RPW-31
RPW-31
RPW-ii
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBITS
NUMBER PAGE
RPW-1 COLOR CODE FOR CARTRIDGES AND GAS MASK CANISTERS RPW-2
(ANSI K13.1-1973)
RPW-2 FIT-TEST RECORD RPW-13
RPW-3 SCBA EXERCISE RPW-21
RPW-4 AIR MANIFOLD RPW-21
RPW-5 ULTRA-TWIN RESPIRATOR RPW-26
RPW-6 MSA AIR MASK MODEL 401 RPW-28
RPW-7 MSA AIR MASK MODEL 401 REMOVAL AND CLEANING RPW-29
PROCEDURE
RPW-iii
-------
DRAFT
1.0 AIR-PURIFYING RESPIRATORS
1.1 Introduction
The following basic facts are important for the use of the air-purifying respirator:
1. Air-purifying respirators filter air with mechanical filters and/or
sorbents.
2. Air-purifying respirators must not be used in atmospheres that are oxygen
deficient (less than 19.5 percent 0~ at sea level).
3. Air-purifying respirators must not be used in atmospheres that are
immediately dangerous to life and health.
4. The specific contaminant must be identified, both qualitatively and
quantitatively. (A tabulation of specific atmospheric contaminants and
the colors assigned to cartridges and gas mask canisters used to protect
against such contaminants is presented as Exhibit RPW-1.)
5. Monitoring of the atmosphere must be performed while an air-purifying
respirator is used.
6. A respirator fit test must be performed and passed before the specific
respirator can be used. The fit of the respirator changes with the growth
of facial hair, weight loss/gain, dental work, etc. The biggest cause of
leakage is facial hair.
7. Protection factors must be used to determine if a specific respirator can
be used in a given atmosphere.
RPW-1
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RPW-1. COLOR CODE FOR CARTRIDGES AND GAS MASK
CANISTERS (ANSI K13.1-1973)
Atmospheric Contaminants
To Be Protected Against Color Assigned
Acid gases White
Organic vapors Black
Ammonia gas Green
Carbon monoxide gas Blue
Acid gases and organic vapors Yellow
Acid gases, ammonia, and organic vapors Brown
Acid gases, ammonia, carbon monoxide, and organic vapors Red
Other vapors and gases not listed above Olive
Radioactive materials (except tritium and noble gases) Purple
Dusts, fumes, and mists (other than radioactive materials) Orange
Notes:
1. A purple stripe shall be used to identify radioactive materials in
combination with any vapor or gas.
2, An orange stripe shall be used to identify dusts, fumes, and mists in
combination with any vapor or gas.
3. Where labels only are colored to conform with this table, the canister or
cartridge body shall be gray or a metal canister or cartridge body may be
left in its natural metallic color.
4. The user shall refer to the wording of the label to determine the type and
degree of protection the canister or cartridge will afford.
RPW-2
-------
DRAFT
1.2 Types Of Air-purifying Respirators
There are many different types of respirators for use in various circumstances:
1. Disposable dust respirators are only for use with dusts.
2. Mouthbit respirators
a. Only used as an escape device.
b. Not useful for hazardous waste work.
3. Quarter-mask respirators
a. Not for use with hazardous chemicals.
b. High degree of leakage.
4. Half-mask respirators
a. Can be used in restricted conditions with hazardous chemicals.
b. High degree of leakage.
c. Only 50 percent of population can get a satisfactory fit.
5. Full-face-mask respirators
a. Cover entire face from under the chin to above the eyes, thus
providing eye protection as well as respiratory protection.
b. Provide much better respirator protection than previously mentioned
respirators, since full-face respirators tend to give a better fit.
c. Are usually made of either butyl, neoprene, or silicone rubber.
RPW-3
-------
DRAFT
6. Powered air-purifying respirators are more effective than standard air-
purifying respirators.
7 Gas masks are more effective than chin-cartridge, air-purifying respirators
due to the larger sorbent capacity.
1.3 Donning Of Respirators
The respirator is placed over the face, and the straps are drawn securely. The
bottom straps are secured first. The mask should not be so tight as to cause
discomfort or headache. Once the respirator is secured, positive and
negative-pressure tests are conducted.
1.4 Escape Mask Use
Response personnel may have to carry escape masks when on sites presenting
potential respiratory hazards. These masks are used when IDLH atmospheres are
encountered, breakthrough is noticed when using a respirator, or someone in the
work party shows symptoms of respiratory distress. Escape masks are to only be
used for escape, not rescue or regular work tasks.
Procedure for donning a typical escape mask is listed below:
1. Open case.
2. Pull out air capsule. (Mask should be packed so that it can be pulled
forward out of case.)
3. Unfold hood.
4. Pull start ring.
5. Remove and discard other respirator (if one is being worn).
RPW-4
-------
DRAFT
6. Slip hood over head starting from back of head.
7. Pull drawstring tight and adjust elastic neck band.
2.0 RESPIRATOR FIT TESTING
Only approved or accepted National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health/Mine Safety and Health Administration (NIOSH/MSHA) air-purifying
respirators can be used. Those with full-face masks provide maximum eye and skin
protection. Air-purifying respirators can be used for work in an atmospheres that
are known to contain adequate oxygen (above 19.5 percent 02) and contaminants
with good warning properties and that are not immediately dangerous to life and
health because of the presence of toxic contaminants. Several manufacturers
(Wilson, Norton, MSA, Scott, etc.) carry these respirators which are suitable for
use. Each company manufactures one or more types of air-purifying
cartridge/canister respirator. Each make and model has a slightly different fit.
Although each manufacturer designs his facepieces to fit as broad a section of the
working population as possible, no respirator marketed will fit everyone.
Conditions that affect a good facepiece fit include: growth of beard, sideburns, a
skull cap that projects under the facepiece, temple pieces on glasses, facial scars,
facial injuries, and presence or absence of dentures. Several manufacturers should
be used so that each employee can take advantage of the different fitting
characteristics to find a respirator that fits properly. Also, the opportunity to
select from various manufacturers allows the wearer to choose a respirator that is
reasonably comfortable while providing good protection. It is in the process of
matching the respirator to the individual user that a fit-testing procedure is
needed.
OSHA regulations (29 CFR Part 1910.134) requires that each person who wears a
respirator shall have it properly fitted, test the facepiece for face seal, and wear it
in a test atmosphere. In compliance with this regulation, each respirator user must
use a fit test to determine his ability to obtain a satisfactory fit with a "negative
pressure", air-purifying respirator. The results of the fit test will be used to select
RPW-5
-------
DRAFT
the specific type, make, and model of "negative pressure", air-purifying respirator
for use by the wearer.
The following policies will also be adhered to in the fitting and use of the
respirators:
1. An employee must have passed the fit test in order to use a respirator.
2. If it is found that an employee cannot obtain a good respirator-to-face
seal because of facial or medical characteristics, that employee will not
use and/or enter an atmosphere that will require the use of a respirator.
3. Facial hair such as beards, sideburns, or certain mustaches that may
interfere with the fit test are not allowed.
4. Persons requiring corrective lenses shall be provided with specially
mounted lenses inside the full-face mask. Under no circumstances will
contact lenses and/or glasses be worn while using respirators.
5. Although fit testing for positive-pressure self-contained breathing
apparatuses is not required as described in ANSI 288.2 (revision 1980), a
less-than-acceptable respirator-to-face seal will increase the use of air
via leakage and therefore reduce effective breathing time. Such leaks
may pose a hazard to the user if sufficient air is not available to reach an
uncontaminated air supply.
6. A person may only use the specific make(s) and model(s) of air-purifying
respirators for which he has obtained a satisfactory fit via the qualitative
fit-testing procedures. Under no circumstances shall a person be allowed
to use any make or model respirator that has not been previously fit
tested or that has failed a fit test.
RPW-6
-------
DRAFT
In the fulfillment of the commitment to comply with the fit-testing requirement,
usually qualitative rather than quantitative fit-testing procedures are selected.
This selection is made because the two-stage, cross-checking procedures described
below will afford the necessary quality assurance that the user of an air-purifying,
cartridge/canister respirator is properly fitted in a hazardous atmosphere. During
any fit test, the respirator headstraps must be as comfortable as possible.
Overtightening the straps will sometimes reduce or increase facepiece leakage, but
the wearer may not be able to tolerate the mask for any period of time. Passing a
qualitative fit test allows the respirator wearer to enter atmospheres up to the
TLV or PEL times the protection factor.
Qualitative fit-test procedures involve two stages of testing. Stage I involves a
simple respirator positive and negative-pressure sealing check for facepiece fit.
Stage II involves the exposure of the respirator wearer to a test atmosphere. This
will include two separate atmosphere tests to double-check the adequate fit of the
respirator.
2.1
2.1.1 Positive-Pressure Sealing Check for Air-Purifying Respirators
This test is very much like the negative-pressure sealing check. This test is
performed after donning an air-purifying respirator that contains an exhalation and
inhalation valve. The test is conducted by closing off the exhalation valve and
exhaling gently. The fit of a respirator equipped with a facepiece is considered to
be satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the facepiece for
at least 10 seconds without detecting any outward leakage of air between the
sealing surface of the facepiece and the respirator wearer's face.
This test is made only as a gross determination of fit when the respirator is to be
used in relatively toxic atmospheres. Nonetheless, this test shall be used just prior
to entering any toxic atmosphere.
RPW-7
-------
DRAFT
2.1.2 Negative-Pressure Sealing Checks for Air-Purifying Respirators
The wearer can perform this test by himself or herself in the field or office after
donning the air-purifying respirator. The test consists of closing off the inlet of
the cartridge(s) to prevent the passage of air. The test is performed by closing off
the inlet opening of the respirator cartridge(s) by covering it with the palm of the
hand(s) so that it will not allow the passage of air, inhaling gently, and holding the
breath for at least 10 seconds. If a facepiece collapses slightly and no inward
leakage of air into the facepiece is detected, it can be reasonably assumed that the
fit of the respirator to the wearer is satisfactory.
This test, like the positive-pressure sealing check, is to be used only as a gross
determination of fit when the respirator is to be used in relatively toxic
atmospheres. (Both the positive and negative-pressure sealing checks can be used
on the SCBA air mask to determine the gross fit characteristics.) This test shall be
used just before entering any toxic atmosphere.
A person wearing an air-purifying respirator will be exposed to two test agents:
isoamyl acetate—an odorous vapor—and stannic chloride—an irritant smoke. An
air-purifying respirator is used equipped with an air-purifying cartridge which
effectively removes the test agents from respired air. If the respirator wearer is
unable to detect penetration of the test agent into the respirator, he has achieved
a satisfactory fit.
2.2.1 Procedures for the Odor Test
Isoamyl acetate is a chemical that produces a pleasant banana-smelling organic
vapor. It is an easily detectable odor. The isoamyl acetate fit test will be
conducted by using a plastic garbage bag as a test hood covering hung from the
ceiling over a coat hanger suspended by twine. Inside the plastic bag, a piece of
cloth saturated with isoamyl acetate is attached to the top portion of the bag.
RPW-8
-------
DRAFT
This procedure will produce a rough concentration of approximately TOO ppm in the
test atmosphere inside the plastic bag. Most people can detect isoamyl acetate at
1 to 10 ppm. The permissible TLV exposure is 100 ppm.
The following isoamyl acetate fit test will be performed as follows:
1. The wearer puts on the respirator in a normal manner. If it is an air-
purifying device, it must be equipped with a cartridge specifically
designed for protection against organic vapors.
2. The wearer enters the test enclosure, so that his head and shoulders are
well inside the bag.
3. If the wearer smells banana oil, he returns to clean air and readjusts the
facepiece and/or adjusts the headstraps without unduly tightening them.
4. The wearer repeats the second step. If he does not smell banana oil, he is
assumed to have obtained a satisfactory fit. If he smells the vapor, an
attempt should be made to find the leakage point. If the leak cannot be
located, another respirator of the same type and brand should be tried. If
this leaks, another brand of respirator with a facepiece of the same type
should be tried.
5. After satisfactory fit is obtained, if the respirator is an air-purifying
device, it must be equipped with the correct filter, cartridge, or canister
for the anticipated hazard.
During the test, the subject makes movements that approximate a normal working
situation. This may include the following:
1. Normal breathing.
2. Deep breathing, as during heavy exertion.
RPW-9
-------
DRAFT
3. Side-to-side and up-and-down head movements. These movements should
be exaggerated, but should approximate those that take place on the job.
4. Talking. This is most easily accomplished by reading a prepared text
and/or reciting the alphabet loudly enough to be understood by someone
standing nearby.
5. Other exercises may be added depending upon the situation. For example,
if the wearer is going to spend a significant part of his time bent over at
some task, it may be desireable to include an exercise approximating this
bending.
The major drawback of the isoamyl acetate test is that the odor threshold varies
widely among individuals. Furthermore, the sense of smell is easily dulled and may
deteriorate during the test so that the wearer can detect only high vapor
concentrations. Another disadvantage is that isoamyl acetate smells pleasant,
even in high concentrations. Therefore, a wearer may say that the respirator fits
although it has a large leak. Therefore, these test results must be checked
carefully and confirmed by the next test atmosphere.
2.2.2 Procedures for the Irritant Smoke Test
This qualitative test is similar to the isoamyl test in concept. It involves exposing
the respirator wearer to an irritating smoke. Sealed glass tubes, approximately 12
cm long by 1 cm in diameter, filled with pumice impregnated with stannic chloride
are used to produce the smoke. When the tube ends are broken and air is allowed
to enter, the material inside reacts with the moisture in the air to produce a dense.
highly-irritating smoke.
As a qualitative means of determining respirator fit, this test has a distinct
advantage in that the wearer usually reacts involuntarily to leakage by coughing or
sneezing. The likelihood of his giving a false indication of proper fit is reduced.
However, because this smoke is very irritating, it can cause problems for the test
RPW-10
-------
DRAFT
applicators or other persons in the same room. Therefore, it is advisable to have
good ventilation in the room in which the testing is to be conducted.
The irritant smoke test will be conducted by using a plastic garbage bag as a test
hood. The bag shall be hung from the ceiling over a coat hanger suspended by
twine. A small hole is made in the top portion of the bag so that the irritant smoke
can be dispensed into the bag when the test subject has entered the bag.
The air-purifying respirator to be used in this test must be equipped with a high-
efficiency, particulate filter.
The irritant smoke fit test will be performed as follows:
1. The wearer puts on the respirator normally, taking care not to tighten the
headstraps uncomfortably. Once the respirator is on, the subject is to
enter the suspended bag so that his head and shoulders are well inside the
bag hood.
2. Once the subject is inside the bag, the tester may increase the smoke
density, still remaining alert to the wearer's reactions.
3. If the wearer detects no leakage, the tester may increase the smoke
density, still remaining alert to the wearer's reaction.
4. At this point, if no leakage has been detected, the wearer may cautiously
begin the head movements and exercises mentioned in the isoamyl acetate
test. The tester should remain especially alert and be prepared to stop
producing smoke immediately and remove the subject from the bag.
5. If a leakage is detected at any time, the tester should stop the smoke and
let the wearer out of the bag to readjust the facepiece or headstrap
tension. The tester should then start the test at the second step.
RPW-11
-------
DRAFT
6. If at the end of all the movements and exercises the wearer is unable to
detect penetration of the irritant smoke into the respirator, the respirator
wearer has a satisfactory fit.
7. After the test is completed, the subject should be removed from the test
atmosphere.
2.3 Fit-Testing Respirator Exercise
2.3.1 Objective
Participants learn to fit-test a full-face, air-purifying respirator with procedures
suitable for field use.
2.3.2 Procedure
1. Instructor demonstrates proper fit-testing with isoamyl acetate and
irritant smoke.
2. Each person must successfully fit-test at least one participant. It is
desirable for each person to fit-test a full-face mask using both methods
of testing.
3. Each participant must be fit-tested until a full-face mask is found that
provides a good 'face seal.
4. Fill out Fit-Test record (Exhibit RPW-2.)
RPW-12
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RPW-2
FIT-TEST RECORD
Name:
Location:
Signature:
Date:
Name of Fit-Tester:
Signature:
Date:
TYPE OF TEST
Type of Mask:
Manufacturer:
Model:
ISOAMYL
ACETATE
Pass/Fail
IRRITANT
SMOKE
Pass/Fail
Type of Mask:
Manufacturer:
Model:
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Type of Mask:
Manufacturer:
Model:
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Type of Mask:
Manufacturer:
Model:
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Type of Mask:
Manufacturer:
Model:
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Comments:
RPW-13
-------
DRAFT
3.0 SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS
3.1 Introduction
The self-contained breathing apparatus is the most effective of the protective
breathing devices. SCBAs are used if the nature of the respiratory hazard is
unknown or if the concentration of toxic pollutants is too high to allow the use of
air-purifying respirators. There are two types of SCBAs: open-circuit and
closed-circuit.
1. Closed-circuit is a rebreathing system that adds fresh oxygen.
2. Open-circuit has a supply of breathing air; exhaled air is returned to the
ambient atmosphere.
The SCBA has two modes of operation: demand and pressure-demand.
1. Demand. Negative-pressure is created inside the facepiece and breathing
tubes upon inhalation.
2. Pressure-Demand. Positive-pressure is maintained inside the face-piece
and breathing tubes at all times.
Only pressure-demand SCBAs are approved for use in IDLH atmospheres.
Maintenance of SCBA regulators must be performed by personnel trained and
certified by the manufacturer. Because the use of SCBAs places physiological and
psychological burdens on the user, personnel must be medically fit and extensively
trained.
RPW-14
-------
DRAFT
3.2 Inspection of Positive-Pressure, Self-contained Breathing Apparatus
The following checklist is to be used by students whenever they have to check out
an SCBA. (Note: Any discrepancy found should be cause to set the unit aside until
it can be repaired by a certified repair-person.)
1. Preliminary inspection. Check to ensure that
a. High-pressure hose connector is tight on cylinder fitting.
b. Bypass valve is closed.
c. Mainline valve is closed.
d. There is no cover or obstruction on regulator outlet.
e. Pressure in the tank is at least 1800 psi.
2. Backpack and harness assembly
a. Straps
(1) Visually inspect for complete set.
(2) Visually inspect for frayed or damaged straps that may break
during use.
b. Buckles
(1) Visually inspect for mating ends.
(2) Check locking function.
c. Backplate and cylinder lock
(1) Visually inspect backplate for cracks and for missing rivets or
screws.
RPW-15
-------
DRAFT
(2) Visually inspect cylinder hold-down strap and physically check
strap tightener and lock to ensure that it is fully engaged.
3. Cylinder and cylinder valve assembly
a. Cylinder
(1) Physically check cylinder to ensure that it is tightly fastened to
backplate.
(2) Check hydrostatic test date monthly to ensure that it is current.
(3) Visually inspect cylinder monthly for large dents or gouges in metal.
b. Head and valve assembly
(1) Visually inspect cylinder valve lock monthly for presence.
(2) Visually inspect cylinder gauge monthly for condition of face, needle,
and lens.
(3) Open cylinder valve and listen or feel for leakage around packing. (If
leakage is noted, do not use until repaired.) Note function of valve
lock.
4. Regulator and high-pressure hose
a. High-pressure hose and connector
Listen or feel for leakage in hose or at hose-to-cylinder connector.
(Bubble in outer hose covering may be caused by seepage of air through
hose when stored under pressure. This does not necessarily mean a faulty
hose.)
RPW-16
-------
DRAFT
b. Regulator and low-pressure alarm
(1) Cover outlet of regulator with palm of hand. Open mainline valve and
read regulator gauge (must read at least 1800 psi and not more than
rated cylinder pressure).
(2) Close cylinder valve and slowly move hand from regulator outlet to
allow slow flow of air. Gauge should begin to show immediate loss of
pressure as air flows. Low-pressure alarm should sound between 650
and 550 psi. Remove hand completely from outlet and close mainline
valve.
(3) Place mouth onto or over regulator outlet and blow. A positive
pressure should be created and maintained for 5 to 10 sec without any
loss of air. Next, establish a slight negative pressure in regulator and
hold for 5 to 10 sec. Vacuum should remain constant. This tests the
integrity of the diaphragm. Any loss of pressure or vacuum during this
test indicates a leak in the apparatus.
(4) Open cylinder valve.
(5) Place hand over regulator outlet and open mainline valve. Remove
hand from outlet and replace in rapid movement. Repeat twice.
Air should escape when hand is removed each time, indicating a
positive pressure in chamber. Close mainline valve and remove hand
from outlet.
(6) Ascertain that no obstruction is in or over the regulator outlet. Open
and close bypass valve momentarily to ensure flow of air through
bypass system.
RPW-17
-------
DRAFT
c. Don backpack.
5. Facepiece and corrugated breathing tube
a. Facepiece
(1) Visually inspect head harness for damaged serrations and
deteriorated rubber. Visually inspect rubber facepiece body for
signs of deterioration or extreme distortion.
(2) Visually inspect lens for proper seal in rubber facepiece, retaining
clamp properly in place, and no cracks or large scratches.
(3) Visually inspect exhalation valve for visible deterioration or
buildup of foreign materials.
b. Breathing tube and connector
(1) Stretch breathing tube and visually inspect for deterioration and
holes.
(2) Visually inspect connector to ensure good condition of threads and
for presence and proper condition of "0" ring or rubber gasket seal.
(3) Negative/positive-pressure test on facepiece
(a) Don facepiece.
(b) Stretch breathing tube to open corrugations and place thumb
or hand over end of connector.
RPW-18
-------
DRAFT
(c) Inhale. Negative pressure should be created inside mask,
causing it to pull tightly to face. This negative pressure
should be maintained for 5 to 10 seconds. If negative-pressure
leaks down, the facepiece assembly is not adequate and should
not be worn.
(d) Exhale. Positive pressure should be created inside mask
causing it to press away from face. This positive pressure
should be maintained for 5 to 10 seconds. If positive-pressure
leaks down, the facepiece assembly is not adequate and should
not be worn.
3.3 SCBA Exercise
3.3.1 Objective
Participants become more familiar with the proper techniques of inspection,
donning and doffing, and use of the SCBA. The students wear SCBA and become
more confident in using it by performing various tasks at exercise stations.
3.3.2 SCBA Checkout
Checkout exercises are designed to give the student experience in identifying
faults commonly found in SCBAs and in remedying the faults.
1. Participants leave the room while the instructor alters the SCBAs.
2. Participants return, check out their SCBAs, note any problems, determine
cause, and restore their SCBAs to proper working order.
3. Participants on SCBAs and facepieces.
4. Participants connect breathing hose and turn on mainline valve.
RPW-19
-------
DRAFT
3.3.3 SCBA Field Exercise
The respiratory protection field exerc'se is designed to give the student the
experience of actually using a self-contained breathing apparatus and performing a
variety of activities while wearing it. Those activities will include:
1. Simple movements such as walking, bending, reaching, walking up and
down hills, climbing over obstacles, and maneuvering in confined areas
(Exhibit RPW-3.)
a. Start in garage with one minute step-ups on core boxes.
b. Run jogging course and up the bank using a rope.
c. Jog to the tires, run through the tires (tallest first) and the ropes, at
the end form a human tunnel at the flags.
d. Carry cooler to the top of hill and back.
e. Walk down the bank using a rope, jog around the building to the
driveway, run up driveway to finish at garage. People with air
remaining jog around the parking lot until air is used up.
2. Change air tanks using the buddy system.
3. Refill air tanks using a cascade system.
4. Perform strenuous exercise.
5. Use the emergency bypass as a source of breathing air.
6. Exhaust the tank to experience the low-air alarm and the feelings
associated with a loss of air.
RPW-20
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RPW-3
SCBA EXERCISE
EXHIBIT RPW-4
AIR MANIFOLD
START
Tires
Human Tunnel
4} \ N
1 ' (•-•
£ i -? '
> H 1*?
— . 1 . 'ffl
d.' Flags 1 I
3' f 1 1
1 Rope Hll| Climb,
[sicTooir^v \_
1 min. Stap-upa
on Core Boxes
\ *
1
1 Garage
1
1- _— — -
LAB BLDG.
••» ^^•^-••t ^BBi
* r
\
j f
1 flope 4 v^. ^> ••-. __ _ •* — — *
Around Bldg. — • — — — — __ ___ _
to Garage
Carry Coolers Up & Back
RPW-21
-------
DRAFT
7. Participate in team sports such as soccer or volleyball to demonstrate
how rapidly air can be exhausted from the tank by exertion.
3.4 Recharging SCBA Air Cylinder Exercise
The air cylinder of an SCBA can supply air for up to 30 or 60 minutes, depending on
the units rating. Then the cylinder must be removed and refilled, either by an air
compressor or a cascade system. A cascade system consists of several large air
cylinders and a filling system. This system is used almost exclusively on sites. All
persons who must wear a SCBA should be familiar with the proper procedures for
recharging the cylinder.
3.4.1 Procedure
The recharging system operates on the principle of cascading—(the equalization of
pressure between the supply cylinders and the apparatus cylinder in sequence). The
proper procedure (Exhibit RPW-4) for SCBA recharging is as follows:
1. Open and close the valve on each supply cylinder (check all to make sure
Grade D air) to find its air pressure relative to other supply cylinders.
2. Mark supply cylinders from in order of least pressure to highest pressure.
3. Attach high pressure hose from cascade manifold to SCBA cylinder valve.
4. Check pressure in SCBA cylinder.
5. Slowly open valve on SCBA cylinder.
6. Slowly open valve on high pressure hose from cascade manifold.
RPW-22
-------
DRAFT
7. Determine which supply cylinder should be used to begin the cascading
operation. The supply cylinder with the lowest pressure, but greater
pressure than that in the SCBA cylinder should be used first.
8. Slowly open the valve on this supply cylinder #1.
9. When pressure on the manifold gauge stabilizes, pressure in the two
cylinders has equalized.
10. Close the supply cylinder valve.
11. If apparatus cylinder has not reached desired pressure, repeat procedure
using the next highest pressure cylinder.
12. If the final supply cylinder does not fully recharge apparatus cylinder,
remove supply cylinder #1 and replace with a full cylinder.
13. Return to Step #7,
14. Once apparatus cylinder is at desired pressure, close all values in system
and disconnect apparatus cylinder from cascade high pressure hose.
15. Mark any empty supply cylinders for recharge.
Each participant recharges at least one air cylinder according to the method
described.
4.0 CARE AND CLEANING OF RESPIRATORS
Any organization using respirators on a routine basis must have a program for their
care and cleaning. The purpose of such a program is to ensure that air respirators
RPW-23
-------
DRAFT
are maintained at their original effectiveness. If they are modified in any way,
their protection factors may be voided. Usually one person in an organization is
trained to inspect, clean, repair, and store respirators.
The program should be based on the number and types of respirators, working
conditions, and hazards involved. In general, the program should include:
1. Inspection (including a leak check)
2. Cleaning and disinfection
3. Repair
4. Storage
4.1 Inspection
Respirators should be inspected after each use. Respirators that are kept ready for
emergency use must be inspected once a month to ensure that they will perform
satisfactorily.
All connections on air-purifying respirators should be thoroughly checked for
gaskets and "0" rings and for proper tightness. In addition, the condition of the
facepiece and all its parts, the connecting air tube, and headbands should be
checked, and rubber or elastomer parts should be inspected for pliability and signs
of deterioration.
Inspecting SCBA (Monthly)
a. Check cylinder label for current hydrostatic test date.
b. Inspect cylinder for large dents or gouges in metal.
c. Inspect cylinder gauge for any damage to the face, needle, and lens.
d. Inspect SCBA through full check out procedure.
e. Fill out appropriate records with results and recommendations.
RPW-24
-------
DRAFT
A record should be maintained of each respirator inspection, including the date, the
inspector, and any unusual conditions or findings.
4.2 Cleaning and Disinfection
Respirators are to be collected at a central location. Employees required to wear
respirators should be briefed on the respirator program and assured that they will
always receive a clean and sanitized respirator. Such assurances can boost morale.
Respirators should be cleaned and disinfected as follows:
1. Air-Purifying Respirators (Exhibit RPW-5)
a. Remove acetate shield from facepiece lens and discard.
b. Remove both cartridges and cartridge receptacle gaskets.
c. Unscrew cartridge receptacles from inhalation valve seats.
d. Remove inhalation valves and inhalation valve seats from face mask.
e. Remove exhalation valve cover.
f. Remove nosecup, unscrew retainer ring, and remove speaking
diaphragm and speaking-diaphragm gasket.
g. Wash entire mask and all parts in cleaner/sanitizer powder mixed with
warm water, preferably at 120 to 140 F, and let soak for three to five
minutes.
h. Remove all parts from wash water and rinse twice in clean, warm
water.
RPW-25
-------
EXHIBIT RPW-5
ULTRA-TWIN RESPIRATOR
DRAFT
458173
Head harness
466202 Facepiece blank, black
466203 Facepiece blank, green
96677 Lens
96662
Buckle assembly
(3 required)
457190 Buckle assembly
with D-ring (2 required)
78584
Inhalation valve (2 required)
459711 Inhalation valve seat
(2 required)
460184
Cartridge receptacle
(2 required)
464358 Lens ring kit assembly
462709 Lens ring (2 required)
61765
Nut (2 required)
60532 Screw (2 required)
Q
461958
Exhalation
valve seat
78703
Exhalation
flapper valve
458212 Clamp,
band
96666 Retainer ring
83635 Speaking diaphragm
83630 Speaking diaphragm gasket
459035 Cartridge receptacle
gasket (2 required)
462185
Valve and
seat assembly
o
449507
Speaking diaphragm housing
with bonded plug
82382
Exhalation valve
cover
459058 •
Speaking
diaphragm and
housing assembly
RPW-26
-------
DRAFT
i. Air-dry parts in a designated clean area. Speaking diaphragm only
may be dried immediately using a warm-air source such as a hair dryer
or radiator grill.
j. Re-assemble entire unit when parts are dry and replace acetate shield
on the face mask lens.
k. Make sure unit is working properly before using.
2. MSA Air Mask (Exhibit RPW-6)
a. Remove acetate shield from lens.
b. Remove breathing hose from adapter assembly.
c. Unscrew adapter assembly from speaking-diaphragm housing and
remove valve spider and disc valve.
d. From inside face mask, remove retaining ring, speaking diaphragm,
and speaking-diaphragm gasket.
e. Remove and clean exhalation valve only as necessary as described in
Exhibit RPW-7.
f. Clean entire mask following the same procedure as outlined for air-
purifying respirators.
g. Re-assemble entire unit when parts are dry and replace acetate shield
on the face mask lens.
h. Make sure unit is working properly before using.
RPW-27
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RPW-6
MSA AIR MASK MODEL 401
4SJ173 HARNESS
- MM1 SUCKLE ASS-r (3 REQ'D)
•) *«!70I LENS SING (2 REQ'D)
_ 'NOSECUP ASST
(SHOWN IN POSITION)
Ultravue Facepiece
Pressure Demand Type, Complete
U.S. Patent Hot. 3,323,135 and 3.348,537
*4M19I
LENS Rim
REPLACEMENT KIT
UU9 SPEAKING DIAPHRAGM
• (MM GASKET
• 96S72 INHALATION SPEAKING
DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY
WII1J EXHALATION
VALVE
17 INHALATION
SPEAKING DIAPHRAGM
(SECTION VIEW)
• MM1 DISC VALVE
• MMt GASKET AND
VALVE SPIDER
441(64 EXHALATION VALVE
ASS7 COMPLETE
It VALVE SEAT 12 REQ'O)
INHALATION
DISC VALVE
12 REQ'DI
4J713S NOSECUPASS7
lACCESJCHY ONin
NOTE: This damp is to be
checked and tightened
prior to each use of
truSCB A.
' 37MI CLAMP
„ 73«l COUPLING
- T340I BREATHING
TUBE
INSERT
RPW-28
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RPW-7
MSA AIR MASK MODEL 401 REMOVAL AND CLEANING PROCEDURE
Cleaning Instructions
General: Moisture in the breath, saliva, and perspira-
tion adhering to the valve create a bonding effect on
the valve which may cause it to stick on the first ex-
haled breath. The following procedure is recommended
to clean the valve on a periodic basis.
1. Remove the valve from the Ultravue* facepiece by
unscrewing the nut. Part Number 461610, inside the
facepiece with the special wrench supplied with the
apparatus. Remove the valve from the Clearvue* face-
piece by removing the clamp, Part Number 57909.
CAUTION: Whan performing the next step
do not stretch or deform the spring which I*
Inside the valve. Handle the sest spring and
reive stem assembly carefully. DO NOT
scratch or nick the valve seats.
2. Disassemble the valve by removing the four screws
shown in figures 1 and 2 with the proper size screw-
driver.
3. Clean the valve seat and rubber flapper on the valve
stem assembly with a soft cloth or soft bristle brush.
See figures 3 and 4. Use warm water and MSA*
Cleaner-Sanitizer, Part Number 34337 (12 2 oz. pkgs.
per canon). Add one package (2 oz.) of powdered
Cleaner Sanitizer to a gallon of warm water (about
120°F.). It is not necessary to clean the compression
spring. Rinse parts thoroughly with warm clear water.
CAUTION: Cleaning and sanitising at the re-
commended 120"F temperature will avoid
overheating and distortion of parts which
would necessitate replacement.
4. Dry all the parts by air drying or blowing clean dry
breathable compressed air over the parts.
Flgura 1 — Rwnovlng 3cr««i»
BODY AND SEAT
VALVE STEM ASSY.
COVER
Figure 2 — DlMiMflibtod Vilv*
Flgura 3 — Body uid SMC
Flgura 4 — Rubbw Flappw
on V.tv»St«m AnvnMv
RPW-29
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT RPW-7
MSA AIR MASK MODEL 401 REMOVAL AND CLEANING PROCEDURE (CONTINUED)
5. Reassemble the valve by setting the valve body on
a clean surface with the seat side up. see figure #5.
Insert the stem of the valve stem assembly into the
guide hole of the body, set the spring in place on the
valve stem assembly and insure that spring seats in
the guide socket inside the cover. Install the four
screws. The last one or two turns of the screws will
have greater resistance to turning. This is the self
locking feature of the screw. Damaged screws should
be discarded and replaced with new ones.
*6. Install the valve assembly in the facepiece and
insure that the nut is firmly tightened.
7. Don mask and test for leaks as per the apparatus
instructions.
8. Before storage, the valve must be forced air dried.
Do this by disconnecting the breathing tube from the
facepiece, hold the end of the tube over the exhalation
valve inside the facepiece and blow air through the
valve, by opening the BY PASS valve slightly. Make
sure air passes through the valve for about one-half
minute.
After Each Use: The facepiece should be washed,
rinsed and wiped dry. Before the facepiece is stored,
the valve must be forced air dried as described in
Step #8. The purpose of this procedure is to insure
the valve is stored in a dry condition.
Storage: Store the mask in the plastic bag furnished
with the apparatus.
» Om Ultravm fan»Mca mil. Nr dam frapra tigkw 57901
IMPORTANT NOTE: When you install the valve assem-
bly in the Ultravue facepiece (Step 6), it is recom-
mended that you rub a small amount of Never-Seez
compound (Part Number 29527) on the threads of
' the valve.
SOCKET TO HOLD SPRING
COVER
Figun B —
VALVE STEM ASSY.
GUIDE HOLE
Figure 6
RPW-30
-------
DRAFT
Most respirator manufacturers market their own cleaners/sanitizers as dry
mixtures of a bactericidal agent and a mild detergent. One-ounce packets for
individual use and bulk packages for quantity use are usually available.
Only a trained person with proper tools and replacement parts should work on
respirators. No one should ever attempt to replace components or to make
adjustments or repairs beyond the manufacturer's recommendations. It may be
necessary to send high-pressure-side components of SCBAs to an authorized
facility for repairs.
Repairs should be made as follows:
1. Disassemble and hand clean pressure-demand and exhalation valve
assembly (SCBAs only). Exercise care to avoid damage to rubber
diaphragm.
2. Replace all faulty or questionable parts or assemblies. Use only parts
specifically designed for the particular respirator.
3. Re-assemble entire respirator, visually inspect completed assembly, and
test completed assembly to ensure proper operation.
4. Insert new filters, cartridges, or canisters, as required. Make sure that
gaskets or seals are in place and tightly sealed.
4.4 Storage
Follow manufacturer's storage instructions, which are always furnished with new
respirators or affixed to the lid of the carrying case. The following general
instructions may also be helpful:
RPW-31
-------
DRAFT
1. After respirators have been inspected, cleaned, and repaired, store them
so that they are protected against dust, excessive moisture, damaging
chemicals, extreme temperatures, and direct sunlight.
2. Do not store respirators in clothes lockers, bench drawers, or tool boxes.
Place them in a sealed bag, wall compartments at work stations, or in a
work area designated for emergency equipment. Store them in original
carton or carrying case.
3. Draw clean respirators from storage for each use. Each unit can be
sealed in a plastic bag, placed in a separate box, and tagged for
immediate use.
4. Storage of SCBA units. Check to ensure that
a. Cylinder is refilled as necessary and unit is cleaned and inspected.
b. Cylinder valve is closed.
c. High-pressure hose connector is tight on cylinder.
d. Pressure is bled off high-pressure hose and regulator.
e. Bypass valve is closed.
f. Mainline valve is closed.
g. All straps are completely loosened and laid straight.
h. Facepiece is properly stored to protect against dust, sunlight, heat,
extreme cold, excess moisture, and damaging chemicals.
RPW-32
-------
DRAFT
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION PC-1
2.0 SKIN PC-1
2.1 STRUCTURE PC-1
2.2 NATURAL DEFENSE PC-3
2.3 ABSORPTION CHARACTERISTICS PC-3
3.0 CONSIDERATIONS FOR SELECTION OF PC-9
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
4.0 TYPES OF PROTECTIVE MATERIALS PC-10
5.0 CHARTS REFLECTING RESISTANCE OF MATERIALS PC-11
TO CHEMICAL DEGRADATION
6.0 TYPES OF PROTECTIVE CLOTHING PC-11
7.0 PROTECTIVE LEVELS PC-13
7.1 LEVEL 1 DERMAL PROTECTION PC-13
7.2 LEVEL 2 DERMAL PROTECTION PC-14
7.3 LEVEL 3 DERMAL PROTECTION PC-15
7.4 LEVEL 4 DERMAL PROTECTION PC-15
EXHIBITS
NUMBER PAGE
PC-1 CROSS-SECTION OF HUMAN SKIN PC-2
PC-2 COMMON INDUSTRIAL METALS PC-6
PC-3 HAZARD OF COMMON METAL TREATMENT PROCESSES PC-8
PC-4 CHEMICAL PROTECTION OF CLOTHING MATERIALS BY PC-12
GENERIC CLASS
PC-ii
-------
DRAFT
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Protective clothing is necessary to ensure the health and safety of field personnel
involved with hazardous substances. Specific protective garments are selected on
the basis of a variety of criteria. An overall protective clothing scheme providing
various levels of protection is a convenient means of selecting protective clothing.
Levels A, B, and C are used to denote degrees of respiratory protection; In order to
distinguish respiratory protection levels from protective clothing levels below the
fully encapsulating suit, this training module will discuss protective clothing in
terms of Levels 1, 2, 3, and 4.
2.0 SKIN
The skin is, in terms of weight, the largest single organ of the body. It provides a
barrier between the environment and other organs (except the lungs and eyes), and
therefore is a defense against many chemicals. A cross-section of human skin is
presented as Exhibit PC-1.
2.1 Structure
The skin consists of the epidermis and the dermis. In the dermis are sweat glands
and ducts, sebaceous glands, connective tissue, fat, and blood vessels. Hair
follicles penetrate both the epidermis and dermis. Chemicals can penetrate the
epidermis, sweat glands, sebaceous glands, or hair follicles.
Although the follicles and glands may permit a small amount of chemicals to enter
almost immediately, most pass through the epidermis, which constitutes the major
surface area. The top layer is the stratum corneum, a thin cohesive membrane of
dead surface skin. This layer turns over every two weeks by a complex process of
cell dehydration and polymerizations of intracellular material. The epidermis plays
the critical role in skin permeability, and abrasion can lower the skin's defenses
dramatically. Below the epidermis lies the dermis, a collection of cells providing a
porous, watery, nonselective diffusion medium.
PC-1
-------
INJURED BY:
o
K>
Stratum I Disjunctum
Corneum «
[ Conjunctum
Stratum Granulosum
Stratum Spinsoum<—
Stratum Germantivum
Sweat duct
Sebaceous1
gland
Sweat gland
Blood vessel
Connective tissue
Fat
Hair follicle
Capillary
Soap, solvents, alkalies, and
hot water.
Alkalies, detergents, solvents.
keratolytic chemicals, trauma,
and certain internal diseases.
O
•33
O
CO
w
!H
S?
c -
2
C/i
S
Z
Trauma (physical, mechanical.
chemical) and internal diseases.
O
3D
-------
DRAFT
2.2 Natural Defenses
Intact skin has a number of natural defenses:
1. Epidermis
Prevents absorption of chemicals and is a physical barrier to bacteria.
2. Sebaceous glands
Secrete fatty acids that are bacteriostatic and fungistatic.
3. Melanocytes (skin pigment)
Prevent damage from ultraviolet radiation in sunlight.
4. Sweat Glands
Regulate heat,
5. Connective Tissue
Provides elasticity against trauma.
6. Lymph-blood System
Provides immunologic responses to infection.
2.3 Absorption Characteristics
The ability of skin to absorb foreign substances depends on:
1. Properties and health of skin.
PC-3
-------
DRAFT
2. Chemical properties of the substances.
3. Environment (vehicle).
Absorption is enhanced by:
1. Breaking top layer of skin.
2. Increasing water content of skin.
3. Increasing temperature of skin, which
a. Causes sweat cells to open up and secrete sweat, which dissolves
solids.
b. Causes more blood to flow to the skin.
4. Increasing concentrations of the substance.
5. Altering skin's normal pH of five.
6. Decreasing particle size of substance, thereby increasing the amount of a
chemical (absorbed to the paniculate) delivered to the site as the number
of particles increases.
7. Adding surface-active agents or organic chemicals. Solvents for example.
can act as a carrier of the substance.
8. Inducing ion movement by an electrical charge.
Absorption of a toxic chemical through the skin can lead to:
1. Local effects such as irritation and necrosis.
2. Systemic effects.
PC-4
-------
DRAFT
Many chemicals can cause a reaction with the skin resulting in an inflammation
called dermatitis. These chemicals can be divided into three categories:
1. Primary Irritants
Act directly on normal skin at the site of contact if the chemical is in
sufficient quantity for a sufficient length of time. Skin irritants include
acetone, benzyl chloride, carbon disulfide, chloroform, chromic acid,
other soluble chromium compounds, ethylene oxide, hydrogen chloride,
iodine, methyl ethyl ketone, mercury, phenol, phosgene, styrene, sulfur
dioxide, picric acid, toluene, and xylene.
2. Photosensitizers
Increase sensitivity to light, which results in irritation and redness.
Photosensitizers include tetracyclines, acridine, creosote, pyridine,
furfural, and naphtha.
3. Allergic Sensitizers
Produce allergic-type reaction after repeated contact. They include
formaldehyde, phthalic anhydride, ammonia, mercury, nitrobenzene,
toluene diisocyanate, chromic acid and chromates, cobalt, and benzoyl
peroxide.
Exhibit PC-2 lists industrial metals that may be of serious consequences if contact
with the skin occurs. The hazards of specific metal treatment processes are
presented in Exhibit PC-3.
PC-5
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT PC-2. COMMON INDUSTRIAL METALS
(SHEET 1 OF 2)
Metal
Skin Irritant
Allergic
Sensitizer
Comments
Aluminum Yes, the soluble
aluminum salts (ace-
tates and fluorides)
and aluminum
chlorhydroxide
Antimony Yes, antimony
trioxide, anti-
mony trifluoride
and andimony
trichloride
Arsenic Yes, arsenic
trioxide which is
enhanced by moisture
Beryllium Yes, possible
irritant
Chromium Yes, most chro-
mates - character-
istic lesion the
"chrome hole".
Yes, aluminum
chloride
None reported
None reported
None reported
Metallic aluminum and
insoluble compounds
considered nontoxic
Chief hazard is
chronic granulom-
atous disease of
the lungs.
Yes, hexavalent
chromium compounds -
chromium trichloride,
chromium chloride,
sodium dichromate,
potassium
dichromate
Cobalt Yes, metallic
cobalt dust
Copper Yes, concentrated
copper salts -
sulfates, oxides
and cyanides
Yes
None reported
PC-6
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT PC-2. COMMON INDUSTRIAL METALS
(SHEET 2 OF 2)
Metal
Skin Irritant
Allergic
Sensitizer
Comments
Mercury
Nickel
Yes, mercuric
salts and organic
mercurials.
None reported
Phosphorous Yes, white, or
yellow phosphorous
Yes, mercuric salts,
and organic mercurials.
Most common are mercury
bichloride and ammoniated
mercury
Zinc
Yes, zinc chloride
Yes
None reported
Rare sensitizer
Red or Black phosphorous
does not cause dermatitis.
PC-7
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT PC-3
HAZARD OF COMMON METAL TREATMENT PROCESSES
Metal Treatment
Hazards that May Injure the Skin
Anodizing
Electroplating
Forging and iron
working
Foundry operations
Galvanizing
Grinding, polishing,
buffing
Metal cleaning
Metal inspection
Soldering
Welding
Exposure to acid and acid bath mist (chromic, sulfuric,
or oxalic).
Exposure to acid mist (chromic) and contact allergens:
nickel, chromates, and cobalt.
Exposure to high temperatures and infrared.
Exposure to excessive heat, possible reaction to resin
used to bond sand.
Exposure to strong irritant: zinc chloride
Exposure to cutting oils and coolants skin may be
abraded, phenolic resin binding agents may be
sensitizers.
Exposure to corrosive agents, some of which are also
sensitizers, exposure to degreasing solvents.
Exposure to solvents, fluorescent dyes may sensitize
and possible photodermatitis from prolonged exposure
to black light and contact with substances such as
germicidal agents in soap.
Exposure to irritants: zinc chloride and hydrochloric
acids; allergic sensitizers: rosin, turpentine and
hydrazine compounds. In silver: soldering possible
exposure to corrosives.
Fumes of various metals may cause dermatitis,
ultraviolet exposure.
PC-8
-------
DRAFT
3.0 CONSIDERATIONS FOR SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
The choice of protective clothing is a function of hazard potential and task
requirements. The following factors are taken into consideration:
1. Performance Requirements
Clothing must be able to withstand a variety of physical abuses. The
advantages and disadvantages of disposable versus reusable clothing must
be considered,
2. Construction Requirements
The construction requirements of any garment depend on the intended use
of the garment. The material that the garment is made of is selected
because of its effectiveness as a barrier against specific hazards—there is
no such thing as "universal" protection.
a. The physical construction of the garment must prevent penetration
(e.g., location of seams and zippers, size of clothing).
b. The material that the garment is constructed of must resist
penetration at the molecular level. In many instances, it may be
necessary to layer protective clothing to achieve the desired
protection.
3. Permeation Rate
Permeation rate is affected by a combination of the base material, the
nature of the chemicals to which the material is exposed, and the duration
and nature of exposure. Most materials allow some degree of permeation.
PC-9
-------
DRAFT
4. Ease and Cost of Decontamination
Considerations that should be made upon purchasing garments are the
ability and degree to which the garment can be decontaminated and the
cost of decontamination. Disposable clothing may be advantageous in
some situations; however, such clothing is rather expensive in the long
run. In most instances, field personnel will use a combination of
disposable and reusable clothing.
4.0 TYPES OF PROTECTIVE MATERIALS
The following materials are generally available for a variety of garments:
1. Cellulose or paper
2. Natural and synthetic fabrics
a. Tyvek
b. Nomex
3. Elastomers
a. Polyethylene
b. Saran-Dow-Product
c. Polyvinyl chloride
d. Neoprene
e. Butyl rubber
f. Chlorapel
g. Viton
PC-10
-------
DRAFT
5.0 CHARTS REFLECTING RESISTANCE OF MATERIALS
TO CHEMICAL DEGRADATION
Charts are available which indicate the effectiveness of materials to resist
degradation (Exhibit PC-4). Note that degradation is not an indication of the
material's permeability.
6.0 TYPES OF PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
The selection of appropriate gear is based on the level of protection needed. The
following gear forms the basis of the protective clothing scheme.
1. Hard Hats
Regulated by 29 CFR 1910.135; specified in ANSI Z89.1, Safety
Requirements for Industrial Head Protection (1969).
2. Face Shields and Safety Glasses
Regulated by 29 CFR 1910.133(a); specified in ANSI Z87.1, Eye and Face
Protection (1968).
3. Foot Protection
Regulated by 29 CFR 1910.136; specified in ANSI Z41.1, Safety Toe
Footwear (1967).
4. Hand Protection
Not specifically regulated.
PC-11
-------
DRAFT
EXHIBIT PC-4. CHEMICAL PROTECTION OF CLOTHING
MATERIALS BY GENERIC CLASS
Generic Class
Alcohols
Aldehydes
Amines
Esters
Ethers
Fuels
Halogenated
hydrocarbons
Hydrocarbons
Inorganic acids
Inorganic bases
and salts
Ketones
Natural fats
and oils
Organic acids
Butyl
Rubber
E
E-G
E-F
G-F
G-F
F-P
G-P
F-P
G-F
E
E
G-F
E
Polyvinyl
Chloride
E
G-F
G-F
P
G
G-P
G-P
F
E
E
P
G
E
Neoprene
E
E-G
E-G
G
E-G
E-G
G-F
G-F
E-G
E
G-F
E-G
E
Natural
Rubber
E
E-F
G-F
F-P
G-F
F-P
F-P
F-P
F-P
E
E-F
G-F
E
Key: E, excellent; F, fair; G, good; P, poor.
Source: "Survey of Personnel Protective Clothing and Respiratory Apparata.
September 1974, DOT, USCG, Office of Research and Development.
PC-12
-------
DRAFT
5. Respiratory Protection
Regulated by 29 CFR 1910.134; specified in ANSI Z88.Z, Standards for
Respiratory Protection (1976).
6. Overall body protection (e.g., fully encapsulating suits, aprons). Not
specifically regulated.
7.0 PROTECTIVE LEVELS
7.1 Level 1 Dermal Protection
Level 1 dermal protection (a fully encapsulating suit) is used when percutaneous
hazards exist or when there is no known data that positively rule out percutaneous
hazards. Since Level 1 dermal protection is extremely physiologically and
psychologically stressful, the decision to use this protection must be carefully
considered. The following conditions suggest a need for Level 1 dermal protection:
1. Confined facilities where probability of skin contact is high.
2. Sites containing known percutaneous hazards.
3. Sites with no established history to rule out percutaneous hazards.
4. Atmosphere immediately dangerous to life and health, either via
inhalation or skin absorption route.
5. Site exhibiting signs of acute mammalian toxicity (e.g., dead animals,
illnesses associated with past entry into site by humans).
6. Sites at which sealed drums of unknown material must be opened.
PC-13
-------
DRAFT
The following items constitute Level 1 dermal protection:
• Totally encapsulating suit
• Gloves, inner (surgical type)
• Gloves, outer, chemical protective
• Boots, chemical protective, steel toe and shank
• Radiation detector
• Thermal-luminescent dose (TLD) badge
• Communications
7.2 Level 2 Dermal Protection
The Site Manager must select Level 2 dermal protection when the highest level of
respiratory protection is needed, but hazardous material exposure to the few
unprotected areas of the body (i.e., the back of the neck) is unlikely.
Personal Protective Equipment for Level 2 includes:
• Chemical protective
- Overalls and long-sleeved jacket
- Coveralls
• Gloves, inner (surgical type)
• Gloves, outer, chemical protective
• Boots, chemical protective, steel toe and shank
• Radiation detector
PC-14
-------
DRAFT
• TLD badge
• Communications optional
7.3 Level 3 Dermal Protection
Level 3 is the basic work uniform.
Personal Protective Equipment for Level 3 includes:
• Coveralls
• Safety boots/shoes
• Safety glasses
• Hard hat with optional faceshield
• Radiation detector
• TLD badge
7.4 Level 4 Dermal Protection
Level 4 dermal protection is used when radioactivity above 10 mr/hr is obtained on
a hazardous waste site. Procedure is to immediately evacuate to a safe distance (2
mr/hr level). Radiological safety experts must be consulted to determine adequate
safety and sampling equipment, protective gear, monitoring methods, handling
procedures, and remedial options.
Personal Protective Equipment for Level 4 typically includes:
• Coveralls
• Air purifying respirator
• Time limits on exposure
• Appropriate dermal protection for type of radiation present
• Radiation dosage monitoring
PC-15
-------
12
-------
DRAFT
EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 OBJECTIVE EO-1
2.0 EXERCISE: USING AIR MONITORING INSTRUMENTS EO-1
2.1 OBJECTIVE OF EXERCISE: EO-1
2.2 EXERCISE PROCEDURE EO-1
2.2.1 STATION 1: RADIATION SURVEY INSTRUMENTS EO-1
2.2.2 STATION 2: OXYGEN AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS EO-2
INDICATORS
2.2.3 STATION 3: COLORIMETRIC TUBES AND PUMPS EO-2
2.2.4 STATION 4: ORGANIC VAPOR DETECTORS EO-2
3.0 DRAEGER TUBE AIR GRAB SAMPLER EO-4
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION EO-4
OF THE INSTRUMENT
3.2 OPERATION OF THE INSTRUMENT EO-5
3.3 LIMITATION AND WARNINGS EO-6
4.0 MSA MODEL 260 COMBUSTIBLE GAS/OXYGEN ALARM EO-7
4.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF THE EO-7
INSTRUMENT
4.2 CALIBRATION EO-8
4.3 OPERATION EO-8
4.4 LIMITATIONS AND WARNINGS EO-9
4.5 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE EO-10
5.0 DREAGER-ECOLYZER COMBUSTIBLE GAS/OXYGEN MONITOR EO-11
5.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF THE EO-11
INSTRUMENT
5.2 CALIBRATION EO-11
5.3 OPERATION EO-12
5.4 LIMITATIONS AND WARNINGS EO-13
5.5 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE EO-14
6.0 VICTOREEN MODEL 490 THYAC III SURVEY METER EO-15
6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION EO-15
6.2 USE AND OPERATION EO-15
6.3 MAINTENANCE EO-16
EO-ii
-------
DRAFT
EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
(CONTENTS CONTINUED)
SECTION PAGE
7.0 SOLAR ELECTRONICS RADIATION ALERT-MINI EO-16
7.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION EO-16
7.2 USE AND OPERATION EO-16
7.3 MAINTENANCE EO-17
EO-iii
-------
DRAFT
1.0 OBJECTIVE
The student becomes acquainted with use of and problems associated with the
operation of site monitoring instruments.
2.0 EXERCISE: USING AIR MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Objective of Exercise
The participants operate several air monitoring instruments and interpret the data
generated.
2.2 Exercise Procedure
The exercise has been divided into four stations. The instructor will move with
each group of students from station to station explaining the instruments
operations and limitations. The group will then be split into teams of two students
each. Each team will be responsible for taking readings with the instruments from
radioactive sources, unknown atmospheres contained in gas sampling bags, spiked
soil and water samples, and completing the answer sheet provided.
2.2.1 Station 1: Radiation Survey Instruments
At the station, there are numbered radioactive sources that may emit alpha, beta,
gamma, or a combination of radiation.
Using the equipment provided, identify the type of radiation and the intensity.
Record your results on the answer sheet provided.
EO-1
-------
DRAFT
2.2.2 Station 2: Oxygen and Combustible Gas Indicators
Three gas sampling bags contain mixtures of flammable gas/vapors in different
concentrations of oxygen. Sample each bag with each of the instruments provided.
Record the results on the answer sheet.
2.2.3 Station 3: Colorimetric Tubes and Pumps
Two gas sampling bags contain mixtures of toluene and ethanol. Using the
colorimetric indicator tubes and pump, measure the concentrations and record
them on the answer sheet.
2.2.4 Station 4: Organic Vapor Detectors
At this station, a Century Organic Vapor Analyzer (OVA), and a HNU system
photoionizer (HNU), are provided. One gas sampling bag, two spiked sample jars,
and one VOA vile and a gas-tight syringe are provided. Each pair of students will
be required to operate and record the concentrations of gases/vapors in the bag and
head spaces.
2.2.4.1 Procedure for Operation of the HNU PI 101
(1) Before attaching the probe, check the function switch on the control panel to
make sure it is in the off position. Attach the probe by plugging in the 12 pin
plug to the interface on the readout module.
(2) Turn the six position function switch to the battery check position. The
needle on the meter should read within or above the green battery arc on the
scale. If not, recharge the battery. If the red indicator light comes on, the
battery should be recharged.
EO-2
-------
DRAFT
(3) Turn the function switch to any range setting. Do not stare into the the end
of the probe for any length of time as UV light can damage your eyes. The
instrument is now ready for operation.
(4) To zero the instrument, turn the function switch to the standby position and
rotate the zero potentiometer until the meter reads zero. Clockwise rotation
of the span pot produces a downscale deflection while counter clockwise
rotations yields an upscale deflection.
Note: No zero gas is needed since this is an electronic zero adjustment. If
the span adjustment setting is changed after the zero is set, the zero should
be rechecked and adjusted, if necessary. Wait 15 to 20 seconds to ensure that
the zero reading is stable. If necessary, readjust the zero.
2.2.4.2 Procedure for Operation of the OVA
The following is the procedure for using the OVA (Model 128) in the survey mode as
a portable total hydrocarbon analyzer.
;1) Assemble the instrument by connecting the Probe/Readout connectors
(electrical and Swagelock) to the Side Pack Assembly. Connect the
appropriate probe to the Probe/Readout Assembly.
2) Turn the PUMP switch ON and leak-check the flow system by plugging the
end of the probe momentarily. The SAMPLE FLOW RATE indicator should
drop to zero. Turn PUMP switch OFF.
3) Move INSTR switch ON and allow 5 minutes for warmup.
4) Turn PUMP switch ON and verify that the battery is charged.
5) Check SAMPLE FLOW RATE indicator for proper flow.
EO-3
-------
DRAFT
(6) Set CALIBRATE switch to X10; use CALIBRATE knob and set meter to read
0.
(7) Place BACKFLUSH and INJECT valves in UP position.
(8) Open H2 TANK VALVE and H2 SUPPLY VALVE.
(9) Depress IGNITER button. If unit is in proper working order, the FID will
ignite in 1 to 6 seconds. Do not depress the button longer than 6 seconds. If
the instrument does not light, allow the unit to run for several minutes and
repeat ignition.
NOTE: It is especially important the the INJECT VALVE be in the UP position.
When this valve is in the DOWN position, ambient air is directed through the
activated charcoal filter before going to the detector. Consequently, many
volatile contaminants would be "scrubbed out," and the OVA would indicate
background levels unless methane was the primary contaminant.
Following is the shut-down procedure:
(1) Close H2 SUPPLY VALVE and H2 TANK VALVE (Don't overtighten valves).
(2) Turn INSTR switch OFF.
(3) Wait 10 seconds and turn PUMP switch OFF.
3.0 DRAEGER TUBE AIR GRAB SAMPLER
3.1 General Description and Application of the Instrument
The Draeger tube air grab sampler consists of a bellows pump for drawing air
through detector tubes that are chosen depending on the material to be identified.
The detector tubes are available for a variety of gases and concentration ranges.
EO-4
-------
DRAFT
"he use of the tubes may be best described as a semi-quantitative method. There
ire detector tubes available for gases that are not detected by the organic vapor
nalyzer and that would actually react with the filament of the explosimeter and
ixygen indicator. Examples include hydrogen sulfide, sulfur dioxide, sulfur
rioxide, hydrogen chloride, hydrogen cyanide and chlorine. The presence of any of
hese would obviously affect the level of protection needed on the site. However,
here must be sufficient background information to determine the identity of the
ubstances so that the proper tube could be selected.
'he test is performed by drawing air through the detector tube and observing a
olor change or stain in the tube. Scale markings on the tube enable determination
f subsurface concentration.
.2 Operation of the Instrument
Jthough the operating principles are quite simple, the operator's technique must
e correct to be effective.
1) Break off both tips of the Draeger tube in the break-off eyelet or in the
break-off husk.
I) Insert the tube tightly into the pump head with the arrow pointing toward the
pump.
3) Fully compress the bellows.
I) Straighten the fingers. The suction process takes place automatically and is
completed when the limit chain is taut. (The bellows is calibrated to draw in
100 cm3 of air per stroke. Since the suction of the pump is caused only by
the relaxation of the springs, any subjective influence is excluded.)
5) Repeat the suction process as often as specified in the Tube Operating
Instructions. (The nature of the tube filling will vary the resistance of the air
EO-5
-------
DRAFT
coming through the tube, and the "opening time" of the bellows is therefore
affected. The range of time is 3 to 40 sec).
(6) Evaluate the indication on the tube as described in the tube operating
instructions.
(7) Remove the spent tube and properly dispose of it on the site.
(8) Before putting the bellows pump away, flush it out with uncontaminated air
by making a few strokes without a detector tube in a clean environment.
3.3 Limitation and Warnings
The following principles are important in the correct use of the equipment:
(1) Try to establish from background information (interviews, etc.) the nature of
the site contaminants so that an intelligent selection of a Draeger tube may
be made.
(2) Relative standard deviation can range from 5 to 40 percent.
(3) When drawing air into a tube, keep your eyes on the tube to note any color
change or stain development. For example, if you have selected a hydrogen
sulfide tube with a sensitivity range of 0.5 to 1.5 ppm, requiring 10 strokes,
and you are in an atmosphere of much higher concentration, the tube will
quickly become fully developed after only one or two strokes.
(4) Read the tube immediately on completion of the last stroke. Elapsed time
may affect the true reading.
(5) Some tubes require that an ampule within the tube be broken to release a
reagent before air is drawn through.
EO-6
-------
DRAFT
(6) Because the tubes contain silica gel, high humidity may affect results.
(7) Many types of tubes are also sensitive to substances other than the primary
contaminant and will therefore give incorrect readings in atmospheres
containing substances other than the gas for which the tube was developed.
4.0 MSA MODEL 260 COMBUSTIBLE GAS/OXYGEN ALARM
4.1 General Description and Application of the Instrument
The MSA Model 260 Combustible Gas and Oxygen Alarm is a hand-carried, battery-
operated, compact instrument. It has been designed to sample atmospheres for
combustible gases or vapors and oxygen content and warn the user when
predetermined concentrations of either are reached.
The oxygen and combustible gas indicators are operated simultaneously. Each
indicator has an alarm warning light which provides a visual alarm signal. An
alarm signal on either unit will energize an audible alarm as well. A switch allows
the audible alarm to be turned off if so desired. The alarm lights will stay on until
the reset button is pushed after the concentration returns to the predetermined
level.
The oxygen analyzer is a galvanic type cell containing dissimilar metal electrodes
in a special electrolyte. The cell is sealed with a membrane which allows oxygen
to diffuse into the active area. The current generated by the cell is proportional to
the oxygen partial pressure in the atmospheric sample passing over the face of the
membrane. The generated current passes through a resistance to provide a voltage
input signal for an amplifier. The output of the amplifier drives the oxygen
indicating meter and also serves as an input to the alarm comparator circuitry.
The flammable properties of combustible gases are used as a basis of detection for
the combustible gas indicator. The sensor consists of a pair of pelletized filaments
called "pelements" arranged in an electrically balanced bridge circuit. The
EO-7
-------
DRAFT
detector pelement is treated with a special catalyst. The catalyst causes the
combustible gases to combine with oxygen at much lower temperatures than would
be required for normal burning. The inactive compensator pelement is also exposed
to the sample flow and acts to offset any electrical changes caused by flow
conditions, sample temperature, pressure and/or humidity.
Combustible gases in the sample combine with oxygen at the surface of the
catalyzed detector pelement. Heat is liberated by this chemical reaction
increasing the temperature of this pelement causing an associated increase in the
pelement electrical resistance.
Increased resistance of the detector pelement unbalances the bridge causing a
voltage change in the mid-point connection between the detector pelement and
compensating pelement. This voltage signal is applied to an amplifier which drives
the combustible gas indicating meter and provides an input for an alarm
comparator circuit.
4.2 Calibration
To calibrate the instrument a small gas tank of known concentration is attached to
the inlet. A pot inside the instrument is then adjusted with a screwdriver to bring
it into calibration.
4.3 Operation
The Model 260 should be checked and "zeroed" in an uncontaminated atmosphere.
EO-8
-------
DRAFT
(1) Open the instrument lid. Turn the center ON-OFF control to the far right
HORN-OFF position. Both meter pointers will move and one or both alarm
lights may light.
(2) If the percent oxygen meter pointer stabilizes at a value other than 20.8
percent, the pointer should be set to 20.8 percent by using the CALIBRATE
02 control.
(3) The percent LEL meter pointer should be set to zero by adjusting the ZERO
LEL control.
(4) If either the alarm lights are lighted press the Alarm Reset button.
(5) Momentarily place a finger over the sample inlet fitting or the end of the
sample line probe. Observe that the flow indicator float drops out of sight
indicating no flow. If the float does not drop, check out the flow system for
leaks as described under Section VII.
(6) Press the CHECK button and observe the percent LEL meter. The pointer
must read at 80 percent LEL or higher as marked by the BATTERY zone on
the meter. If the pointer reading is less, the batteries must be recharged.
No tests should be attempted as the instrument will not perform properly.
(7) If it is desired that the audible alarm sound for combustible gas or low oxygen
concentrations, turn the center ON-OFF control back one position to the ON
setting.
(8) Accessory equipment such as sampling lines, probes, carrying harness, filters
or line traps should be attached as required.
(9) The instrument is ready for atmospheric sampling.
EO-9
-------
DRAFT
4.4 Limitations and Warnings
It is important that the instrument response be appraised by someone skilled or
experienced in properly interpreting the instrument readings with respect to
particular conditions, on-going operations and safe practices. For example, an
atmosphere that shows no flammability hazard can still be toxic.
The Model 260 is designed to measure combustible gas or vapor content in air. It
will not indicate the combustible gas content in an inert gas background, furnace
stack or in a reducing atmosphere. Further, this instrument should not be used
where the oxygen concentration exceeds that of fresh air (oxygen enriched
atmospheres).
Proper readings are obtained only when the battery has a sufficient level of charge.
(1) The battery charge level should be checked occasionally throughout a testing
period.
(2) Upon receiving a new Model 260, it is recommended that the battery be
charged for at least 16 hours.
(3) As a regular monthly maintenance item for optimum battery service, the
Model 260 should be run for 8 to 10 hours and then fully charged for 24 to 36
hours.
(4) After each day of use or if the indicator has not been used for more than 7
days, the battery should be charged for a minimum of 16 hours.
(5) Do not operate Model 260 while it is charging.
(6) Recharging must be done in a non-hazardous location, known to be free of
combustible gases or vapors.
EO-10
-------
DRAFT
4.5 Standard Operating Procedures
(1) If the percentage of LEL is less than 10, complete the onsite inspection.
(2) If the percentage of LEL is between 10 and 25, continue onsite inspection
with extreme caution.
(3) If the percentage of LEL is more than 25, withdraw from area immediately.
(4) If the oxygen level is less than 19.5 percent, continue the inspection with a
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) and identify the oxygen-deficient
area.
(5) If the oxygen level is more than 25 percent, discontinue inspection in that
area.
5.0 DREAGER-ECOLYZER COMBUSTIBLE GAS/OXYGEN MONITOR
5.1 General Description and Application of the Instrument
The ECOLYZER Combustible Gas/Oxygen Monitor is portable, battery powdered,
and designed to monitor a work area continuously for at least 8 hours. Audible and
visual alarms warn of the presence of combustible gases or vapors and oxygen
deficiency. They also indicate instrument malfunctions. The meters indicate
explosibility in terms of L.F.L (Lower Flammability Limit) and oxygen in percent
of one atmosphere. L.F.L represents the lowest concentration of gas in air which
can be ignited by a source of ignition and cause an explosion.
A separate audible alarm is also provided in the probe assembly for remote
warning. The unit also features a unique security "beep" which gives an audible
indication that the instrument is operating. An internal control is provided to
adjust the volume of the security "beep," or to turn it off if it is not desired.
EO-11
-------
DRAFT
The instrument is powered by a rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery pack which
provides more than 8 hours of continuous operation, and is highly reliable and
economical to maintain.
5.2 Calibration
The oxygen analyzer section of this instrument is calibrated by the operator to 20.9
percent in good air. Special calibration procedures are not necessary. With the
Sensor Assembly in good air, calibrate the oxygen meter by rotating the CAL
OXYGEN control until the oxygen meter indicates exactly 20.9 percent oxygen, (
symbol on meter).
The combustible gas detector is calibrated at the factory. Meter indications are
given in terms of percent LF.L. The abbreviations L.F.L stands for Lower
Fiammability Limit, and represents the lowest concentration of gas in air which
can be ignited by a source of ignition and cause an explosion. L.F.L. is also called
the Lower Explosive Limit (LE.L). Model 400 is calibrated before shipment to
indicate directly percent L.F.L. of methane in air. The L.F.L. of methane is 5
percent by volume. That is, a concentration of 5 percent methane will indicate 100
percent L.F.L. Other combustible gases will be indicated approximately correctly
in terms of explosibility. However, for maximum accuracy, calibration curves for
various gases should be used.
The gas detector section of this instrument requires periodic calibration with a
standard gas sample. With the ECOLYZER Calibration Kit No. 60-460, use the
following procedure:
(1) Disassemble case by removing the five retaining screws.
(2) Allow the instrument to warm up for 15 minutes.
(3) Assemble the calibration gas tank and delivery tube.
EO-12
-------
DRAFT
(4) Carefully open the valve on the gas tank to bathe the sensor with just enough
gas to cause the needle on the LF.L meter to move.
(5) Adjust the LF.L. CAL control until the percent LF.L meter indicates
exactly the correct LF.L as shown on the calibration gas cylinder.
5.3 Operation
(1) Turn the power switch to the ON position. Both meters will indicate. Red,
yellow, and green lights with audible alarms will activate briefly, indicating
they are operable.
(2) Allow one minute for warmup. After one minute, the green light will come
on to indicate that the unit is ready to be calibrated. DO NOT CALIBRATE
OR ZERO UNTIL THE GREEN LIGHT COMES ON (approximately one
minute).
(3) With the Sensor Assembly in normal atmospheric air, calibrate the oxygen
meter by rotating the CAL. OXYGEN control until the oxygen meter reads
exactly 20.9 percent oxygen. (
-------
DRAFT
(6) Place the probe assembly in the environment to be tested. If an ALARM
occurs (red light and wailing siren), personnel should LEAVE THE AREA.
(7) If an instrument malfunction occurs (yellow light and sinking audible tone),
personnel should LEAVE THE AREA until the problem is corrected.
5.4 Limitations and Warnings
The operational temperature range is -18° to 49°C (0 to 120°F.)
Prolonged exposure to tetraethyl lead or silicone vapors causes poisoning of the
filaments. Avoid leaded gasoline and silicone vapors. Testing of the gas detector
element should be done with methane test gas. An element which responds to
methane will respond to other combustibles. Elements which have reduced
sensitivity or do not respond to methane are probably poisoned and must be
replaced. The warning systems of the No. 400 give no indication of a poisoned
filament. To detect a poisoned filament, the operator must test it with methane
test gas.
Most commonly encountered gases will not affect or interfere with accurate
readings of oxygen content when present in normal concentrations as found in
industrial atmospheres. However, any gas permeable to the Teflon membrane and
which can be reduced at 0.8 volts may add to the meter readings to the extent it is
present. (Gases such as carbon dioxide do not reduce at 0.8 volts and will not
affect the sensor regardless of concentration). The following gases will interfere
when present in unusually high concentrations: sulfur dioxide, fluorine, chlorine,
bromine, iodine, and oxides of nitrogen. No one should enter a confined space in
which such concentrations (as little as one quarter of a percent) of these gases are
present without special respiratory protection.
EO-14
-------
DRAFT
5.5 Standard Operating Procedures
(1) If the percentage of LEL is less than 10, complete the onsite inspection.
(2) If the percentage of LEL is between 10 and 25, continue onsite inspection
with extreme caution.
(3) If the percentage of LEL is more than 25, withdraw from area immediately.
(4) If the oxygen level is less than 19.5 percent, continue the inspection with a
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) and identify the oxygen-deficient
area.
(5) If the oxygen level is more than 25 percent, discontinue inspection in that
area.
6.0 VICTOREEN MODEL 490 THYAC III SURVEY METER
6.1 General Description
The Model 490 is a pulse-count ratemeter and power supply. With the pancake
detector probe, it acts as a survey meter for alpha-beta-gamma radiation. Its
range of operation is 0-80,000 cpm or 0-200 mREM/hr approximate radiation
intensity with appropriate detector.
6.2 Use and Operation
This instrument should be used only by persons who have been trained in the proper
interpretation of its readings and the appropriate safety procedures to be followed
in the presence of radiation. Failure to follow instructions may result in
inaccurate readings and/or user hazard. Indicated battery and operational
(checksource) tests must be performed before each use to ensure that the
instrument is functioning properly. Failure to conduct periodic performance tests
EO-15
-------
DRAFT
in accordance with ANSI N323-1978, paragraphs 4.6 and 5.4, and to keep records
thereof in accordance with paragraph 4.5 of the same standard, could result in
erroneous readings of potential danger. Do not connect or disconnect any detector
while the instrument is on. Wait 2 minutes after it is turned off before connecting
or disconnecting any detector. Transistor failure will occur if these instructions
are not followed.
The ratemeter is designed for 100 hours of continuous use on two "D" cell batteries
and longer with intermittent use. Trained personnel are required to interpret
readings. Be sure to read the instruction manual before the equipment is used.
The instrument is in a weatherproof case, which contains the two operating
controls, the function switch and the response switch.
A low-intensity beta checksource is provided on the case. Temperature limits are
30 to +50°C (limits for batteries may be different). The checksource may be used
with a headset or an audio speaker. It may be put in a plastic bag, when
appropriate, to prevent contamination.
6.3 Maintenance
The instrument must not be stored with the batteries inside. Batteries must be
replaced as indicated during the battery check performed before each use, and the
instrument should be recalibrated periodically.
7.0 SOLAR ELECTRONICS RADIATION ALERT-MINI
7.1 General Description
The Radiation Alert-Mini is a miniature ionizing-radiation detector with selectable
audible alarms and LED level indicators. It is one of several ultra-small units that
can be carried conveniently in your pocket or clipped on your belt for hands-free
operation. It's range of operations is 0.1 mR/hr to 30 mR/hr.
EO-16
-------
DRAFT
7.2 Use and Operation
As with all geiger-counter-type instruments, the Radiation Alert-Mini (RAM) is
calibrated to Cesium-137 gamma and is not calibrated for other isotopes. Its dose,
however, serves as a good relative indicator for other isotopes. The RAM functions
with the left-hand switch in either the on or audio position. In audio, you will hear
each incoming geiger count as a beep or click. Audible alarms will sound in both
the on and the audio positions at higher radiation levels. The yellow count light
displays all incoming geiger counts. Random flashing of the count light verifies
that the unit is operating. At lower elevations, the light will normally display 10 to
20 random counts every minute due to natural background radiation.
The range switch at the right selects the radiation levels indicated by the alarm
lights and audible alarm:
• In the XI range, the left light indicates at least 0.1 mR/hr and the right
alarm light indicates 0.3 mR/hr. A two-second alarm tone sounds every
45 seconds above the 0.1 mR/hr range in the X1 range.
• In the X10 range, the two alarm lights indicate 1 and 3 mR/hr
respectively. In this range, the alarm tone sounds above 1 mR/hr.
• In the X100 range, the two alarm lights indicate 10 and 30 mR/hr
respectively. In this range, the alarm tone sounds above 10 mR/hr.
If both the alarm lights are lit in one of the lower ranges, change to the next higher
range.
7.3 Maintenance
The RAM remains calibrated as long as the count light is functioning. The 9 volt
alkaline battery needs replaced when the count light dims. Battery life is up to
2,000 hours continuous use at normal background rates.
EO-17
-------
EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
EXERCISE ANSWER SHEET
Station 1
Source
Number
Total
Exposure
Rate
Type Of
Emission
O, 6,5)
Station 2
Bag Number
1
2
3
0?%
LEL%
Station 3
Bag Number
1
2
Concentration
Compound
Station 4
Bag Number
1
Sample Number
2
3
4
Concentration
OVA
Concentration
HNU
-------
13
-------
REPORT ON
ACME RECLAIMING CORPORATION
Acme Reclaiming Corporation (ARC) is an abandoned hazardous waste
facility, located near Nashville, Ohio. In 1980, a series of citizen
complaints led the State Board of Health's Division of Waste
Management to identify ARC as a waste facility. The complaints
stemmed from heavy Spring rains that caused a severe flood episode,
inundating two ARC waste lagoons that were situated on the Minnesota
Creek flood plain. Citizens reported that this occured every 5 to 8
years, but could not explain why they did not report these earlier
flooding problems. The State forced ARC to reinforce the lagoon
berms and to increase their heights to stabilize the structures and
increase their freeboard. In a later action, the state required the
installation of monitoring wells and the analysis of waters from
these wells. During late April 1980, after the well installation
phase, the owners of ARC abandoned the facility and fled the state
without notifying the State Department of Health of their new mailing
addresses.
Site Description
A. Operational History
Operations at the site were initiated by the Tar Corporation of
America (TCA) as a wood treating facility in 1930. TCA utilized
creosote and other coal tar by-products to preserve railroad ties and
other wood products such as foundation piles and utility poles. The
creosote and coal tar by-products were produced in New Chicago at a
coking facility and transferred by truck to ARC. During the course
of operation, TCA installed three lagoons; Lagoon #1 near the main
production facility, and Lagoons #2 and #3 on the flood plain of
Minnesota Creek (see Figure 1). In addition to the lagoons, TCA had
landfilled in a 20-foot deep sand pit along the southwestern boundary
of the site. In 1957, the pit was filled with by-products and
covered with asphalt and used as a parking area for autos. There are
no records of exactly what was placed in landfill or the amount.
Excluding the access road, the parking area defines the perimeter of
the former pit, according to written statements of former TCA
employees.
I
-------
A)/) stfvttt.tr, Off i&
Li/mr$ OF
-------
The facility continued operation through February 1974. In early
March 1974, TCA ceased operations and dismantled all buildings and
storage tanks with the exception of the main building. In January
1975, TCA sold the property to ARC. Although ARC had no use for the
lagoons, they purchased the complete property in anticipation of
future expansion and storage needs.
By May 1975, ARC had completed the remodeling and installation of
distillation units and began accepting solvents for recycling. Waste
solvents were received by bulk tanker and in 55-gallon drums. Drums
of materials to be recycled were stored on the ground in an unstaged
manner, while bulk tanker materials were stored in old railroad
tanker cars (minus wheel assemblies) on the northeast side of the
main building. Still bottoms were also placed in 55-gallon drums and
stored near the northeastern perimeter of the facility. There were
periodic complaints of odors emanating from these storage areas, but
by the time the local Health Department arrived, there were no
lingering odors. As stated earlier, the conditions were brought to
the attention of the State after flooding inundated lagoons #2 and #3
during mid-March 1980. During the subsequent State inspection, the
State ordered ARC to improve the lagoon berms, develop closure plans
for the lagoons, complete a bermed concrete pad with an overhead
covering for the storage of the drums, install four monitoring wells
around the drum storage area, and analyze groundwater samples from
the shallow aquifer. ARC completed the berm improvements and the
monitoring well installation by the end of the third week of April
1980. The owners reported that the lagoons would fill up with water
during rain storms but would dry up in a matter of days.
During the final week of April 1980, the owners of ARC ceased
operations, abandoned the facility, and fled the State. During May
1980, the state took volatile organic samples from the four wells,
results of which are presented in Table I. The well samples
indicated the presence of 1,1 dichloroethane, 1,2 dichloroethane,
TCE, benzene, acetone, xylene, and ethyIbenzene.
In September I960, the owners of ARC were located in Miami, Florida
and the State initiated legal action to force them to clean up the
-------
site. In order to gain additional funds, the owners of TCA were also
sued to remediate the site. As a result of excessive procedural
delays and legal manipulation, the court wants additional sampling to
clarify the problems at the site. The responsible parties have indi-
cated that they do not feel responsible and may not be around when
the court makes its decision. As a result, the USEPA and the State
want to pursue this facility as a potential Superfund site as of
September 1983.
B. Local Geology
Figure 2 is a map depicting the area which surrounds the site and
includes homes, cities, waterways, municipal wells, and municipal
surface water intakes. The whole area is located on a Pleistocene
outwash plain composed of interbedded sand and sand/gravel units.
Minnesota Creek is incised through the Pleistocene unit. Underlying
this surficial unit is bedrock where the uppermost unit is lower
interbedded shale and shaly dolomitic limestone member at base of the
Platteville Dolomite. The Hartford River cuts all the way to the
bedrock. The river bed consists of alluvium. In this area, the
Glenwood Formation is not found below the Platteville. The unit
below the Platteville which appears below is the St. Peter Sandstone,
a regional aquifer. The bedrock units have a 1% dip to the south-
east.
The surficial glacial unit has a variable thickness, ranging from 15'
thick in the valleys to 35' thick in the adjoining flat plains.
Using well drilling logs submitted to the State, the Platteville has
been identified as being 12 to 13 feet thick in the area. The St.
Peter has a vertical extent in excess of 250 feet. No wells in the
area have penetrated to the Shakopee Formation. Drill cores of the
Platteville indicate that in the city of New Chicago the unit is
significantly fractured, although this structural feature was not
identified in Nashville where it appears to be an unfractured and
continuous unit. However, two wells in New Bliss Heights report the
presence of the fractured Platteville Unit.
C. Populations and Water Usage
Table 2 is a summary of populations of the various cities and towns
in the area around the ARC facility. Data is also given on water
usage for both city and rural residents.
3
-------
NNIl.es
-------
TABLE 1
SAMPLE RESULTS FROM
ACME RECLAIMING CORPORATION
NASHVILLE, OHIO
Data in ug/1 or ppb
Parameter
1,1 dichloroethane
1,2 dichloroethane
benzene
TCE
ethylbenzene
acetone
xylene
duplicate
well #1 well #2 well #3 well #4 Well #4 Blank
60
ND
25
40
26
ND
26
18
35
30
ND
21
ND
18
35
40
47
ND
15
ND
ND
38
19
200
ND
37
80
24
ND
17
ND
ND
35
ND
11
11.2
15.1
ND
10
12
ND
12
-------
TABLE 2
MUNICIPALITY DESCRIPTIONS AND DEMOGRAPHIC INFORMATION
Nashville - Located approximately one (1) mile downstream of the
ARC facility at the confluence of Little Detroit Creek and Minnesota
Creek. According to the 1980 census, 268 people reside in the town.
The town derives all its drinking water from four (4) small diameter
rauncipal wells which are screened in the St. Peter Formation.
New Chicago - Located approximately two (2) miles northwest of
the ARC facility along Little Detroit Creek. According to the 1980
census, 2,101 people reside in the town. The town's drinking water
is provided by a muncipal system which obtains water from Little
Detroit Creek and two (2) wells screened in the St. Peter Formation.
The water system serves the total population of the town and totally
integrates both sources into the system.
New New York - Located approximately seven (7) miles downstream
of the ARC facility at the confluence of Minnesota Creek and the
Hartford River. According to the 1980 census, 15,010 people reside
in the city. The city obtains its water from Minnesota Creek from
intakes 2.5 miles upstream of the city's bordens.
Old New Bedford - Located across the river from New New York.
According to the 1980 census 10,171 people reside in the city. The
total population is served by a water system which is obtained from
four (4) high capacity wells screened in the St. Peter Formation.
New Las Vegas - Located approximately 4.5 miles east of the ARC
Facility. According to the 1980 census, 853 people reside in the
town. 175 homes lie west of the Hartford River and are served by a
community water system which obtains its water from the St. Peter
Formation. The remaining 60 homes are located east of the river and
are also served by a system which draws from the St. Peter.
New Bliss Heights - a new housing development located in an
unincorported area south of the ARC Facility and southeast of
Nashville. The homes are situated around a recreational area. The
I 10 people obtain their water from wells which are screened in the
surficial glacial unit.
5
-------
TABLE 2 - (Continued)
New Hartford - Located approximately one-half (1/2) mile down-
stream from New Las Vegas on the Hartford River is New Hartford.
This city has a population of 8,000, according to the 1980 census.
The total population is served by high-capacity shallow wells
screened in the surficial glacial unit.
Rural Properties - There are numerous homes scattered throughout
the area and all use well water. According to the State Geological
Survey approximately 60% of these wells are screened in the St. Peter
with the remainder in the surficial unit.
-------
REPORT ON GOOD EARTH NUTRIENTS, INC.
Good Earth Nutrients, Inc. (GEN), a manufacturer of fertilizer
additives, is located about 30 miles west of Capital City in Owl
Valley, New Mexico (Paso County). The site, owned by Ralph Rooney of
Boise, Idaho, occupies 14.5 acres of land situated in the western
foothills of the Silver Mountains. This property lies on a bench one
mile east of State Highway 85 and is bordered on the north by Bates
Valley Road, on the south and west by the Union Pacific Railroad, and
on the east by the mountains. GEN is located about 1.5 miles
southeast of Settlers' Park, a subdivision housing approximately 500
residents. There are two wells located about one mile due west and
downgradient of the site which supply these homes with water. There
are approximately a dozen additional houses on a lower bench about
one-half mile to the northwest. Just 0.1 miles north of the site is
Fazio's chicken feed operation.
From 1968 to 1977, GEN was owned and operated by Fixative Chemicals,
a fertilizer manufacturer in Texas. In June 1977, the Bob Recycling
Company purchased GEN from Fixative and has been operating it on and
off since then. As of January 1980, GEN announced plans to close due
to economic hardship.
Good Earth's feed stock is emmission control dust generated by and
purchased from Allegheny Steel of Dry Ridge, Arizona; Glyton Steel of
Nebraska, and Oreton, Utah; Midstate Steel of California; and Apache
Steel of Montana and Phoenix, Arizona. Good Earth receives this
waste and transports their product via the Union Pacific Railroad.
This dust contains high zinc concentrations and is then palletized,
bagged and sold to fertilizer manufacturers as a micronutrlent
additive. After processing, if the product does not meet the
specifications of 20 percent zinc, it is then piled on-site as a
waste. These wastes have the potential of being sold to other
companies for metal reclamation. In the past, GEN also accepted
dried electroplating sludge from Applications, Inc. This sludge had
been mixed with sludge from Saumur's Stockpile Division prior to GEN
purchasing it. GEN orginally purchased this sludge, which is
allegedly nonhazardous, with the hopes of extracting nickel and
tungsten from it; however, it remains piled on-site.
-------
GEN reported storing of 4,000 tons of dust in piles on-site annually.
Some of this dust is their raw material and some is processed mate-
rial which did not meet their final product specifications. Good
Earth's analysis of the dust showed high concentrations of total
chromium, lead and cadmium.
In May 1977, Fixative Chemicals felt they might be forced to close
down because of poor economic conditions and they proposed mixing the
waste on-site with lime to fix the metals and then burying it. This
disposal method was never used. At this time, they were cited with
numerous violations including not maintaining records or required
plans on-site, and not controlling wind and water erosion, leachate
and runoff from their waste piles.
In June 1977, Good Earth was sold to Bob Recycling. At this time,
they planned to extract metals from the dust in addition to producing
the fertilizer additive. This process was never implemented. They
were again cited with the same violations as in May.
In February 1979, the State sampled the incoming dust and the off-
spec waste piles. Analysis for total metals again showed very high
levels of chromium, lead and cadmium.
Throughout the Fall of 1979, GEN was cited several times with plans
and records violations, as well as noncompliance with storage and
security standards. Although GEN attempted to comply and cooperate
with the State and EPA, the plans they submitted were inadequate.
In November 1979, GEN shut down operations once again. Finally, in
January 1980, they informed the State that they were planning to
close the facility because they could no longer afford to operate and
comply with the State's hazardous waste regulations.
According to Kyle Kerrick of the State Department of Health, the
wastes remaining on-site include approximately 3,000 to 5,000 tons of
both the unprocessed dust and the off-spec product. Of these wastes,
1,000 tons are scheduled to be sold to Base Metals Corporation of
-------
Moxie, Washington. Caustic Solutions, Inc. of Hanford, California,
is purchasing 400 tons of the dust. Margaret Chemical Company
appears to be a potential buyer of GEN's waste sulfuric acid. After
these are sold, the wastes remaining to be resold and disposed of
include the Applications, Inc., residue and approximately 2,000 addi-
tional tons of the dust residue. The cost for disposing of these
wastes at National Waste Deposit, Inc. (NWDI), located about 50 miles
west of the site, is estimated at $200,000.
On Wednesday, 16 February 1980, State representatives Charles Chang
and Cindy Court, accompanied by Chloe Clump of EPA Region VIII and
Carl Chorapers of the State Department of Health, visited the GEN
facility. They were met on-site by David Dole (GEN President), Edwin
Eaders (GEN Vice President), and Fred Fling (Paso County Planning
Director).
The State's trip report said there were five structures on site: one
office building; two round storage bins; a rectangular storage build-
ing; and a building housing the pug mill. On the east side, there
was a structure housing their water supply, which flowed from a
spring located south of the site. Along the north border, there were
two small piles of orange colored residue from Applications Inc.
There was a large black pile of unprocessed dust in the northwest
corner and two very large piles of off-spec dust residue on the south
side. All the waste piles were uncovered and there appeared to be
both a wind and water erosion problem. The surrounding land surface
was darkened due to the migration of these wastes. Several dirt
piles and scrap heaps were scattered on-site near the southeast
section. The eastern border was partially fenced and berraed to
prevent water coming down off the foothills from running over the
property. There was also a dirt berra along the west side between the
site and the railroad; however, there was no fence posted on this
side. There were about 30 drums stored in the northeast corner, six
containing the Applications residue and the rest containing caustic
soda solution.
-------
/TV^ ^j^ ; j'Vy Capprx^^oit boorjdarics ) j
// / Si ' ' » V iJ>VVfe '• I -"
ecology and environment, inc.
, CO
i.^rtlfl : . U5CAL. ' • Topo Hop
-7-6 FW.O. Jo-its
-------
ecology and environment, inc.
HlOS Cavt Flor.io.xAvt,
-------
ecology and environment, inc.
"110*3 £ofct Fhy.du AV
-------
% / / *•« * \
IDEALIZED CROSS-SECTION
AT
GOOO CARTH fi
vA_tey MM
Ecology & Environirent Feb. 1984
From Gates (1962)
-------
DIRECTION OF GROUNOWATER FLOW
Ecology 4 Environment
From Gates (1962)
-------
POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE
PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
PART 1 • SITE INFORMATION AND ASSESSMENT
I. IDENTIFICATION
01 STATE;
NM
Dlllllllll
II. SITE NAME AND LOCATION
01 SITE NAME LW «
Good Earth Nutrients, Inc.
02 STBEET ROUTE NO OR SPECIFIC LOCATION IDENTIFIER
Bat's Canyon Road
03 CITY
Owl Valley
04 STATE
NM
05 ZIP CODE
00000
06 COUNTY
Paso
• c o j*>
root
99
99
09 COORDINATES LATITUDE
98 7 6 5 A 3
LONGITUDE
34567890
i0 DIRECTIONS TO SITE siting ir0m *„,»,.• Dlrf
North on Hwy 92 to County Road 13 (Bat'-s Canyon Rd.) . Turn right and 3.265 miles
further is the site. Entrance on left.
Ml. RESPONSIBLE PARTIES
01 OWNER >•.««»«
Ed Eaders, Vice President
231 Eagle's Nest Road
03 CITY
Owl Valley
04 STATE
NM
05 ZIP CODE
00000
Of TELEPHONE NUMBER
999 illl-llll
37 OPERATOR (H«no»n wxj gtfit'fni iiorf o
10 STATE II ZIP CODE
1 2 TELEPHONE NUMBER
( I
3 TYPE OF OWNERSHIP.c«.f.
BY icice* «r '*•( wo'r'
C A EPA C B EPA CONTRACTOR ~ C STATE
C E LOCAL HEALTH OFFICIAL C F OTHER _
D 0 OTHER CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR NAMElSI
02 SITE STATUS rO-cio™
D A ACTIVE f. B INACTIVE
O C UNKNOWN
03 YEARS OF OPERATION
1971
1980
D UNKNOWN
04 DESCRIPTION Of SUBSTANCES POSSIBLY PRESENT KNOWN OR ALLEGED
Unprotected storage piles of flue dust from
electrostatic precipators containing heavy metals. Flue dust is a designated
hazardous waste (K061) from steel production facilities. Sulfuric acid and caustic
are also known to be present,
05 DESCRIPTION OF POTENTIAL HAZARD TO ENVIRONMENT AND OR POPULATION
Potentials for wind dispersion off-site
and percolation to ground water are high. Ground water is used for drinking water
and irrigation downgradient of the site.
V. PRIORITY ASSESSMENT
01 PRIORITY P
D A HIGH
E B MEDIUM
O C LOW
D D. NONE
VI. INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROM
01 CONTACT
Carl Chompers
02 OF I40*ncr OfQ«w«jonj
NM Dept. of Health
03 TELEPHONE NUMBER
'999'321-0123
04 PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOfl ASSESSMENT
Cindy Court/Charles Chang
05 AGENCY
USEPA
0« ORGANIZATION
FIT
07 TELEPHONE NUMBER
dll 1999-8888
08 DATE
3 ,14 .80
EPA FORM 2070-12 I?-61)
-------
fl r-TIA POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE
V>tir\ PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
PART 2 - WASTE INFORMATION
(.IDENTIFICATION
01 STATE 02SlTENUMBtR
NM Dllllllin
H. WASTE STATES. QUANTITIES. AND CHARACTERISTICS ~
01 PMYSJCAL STATES .C'>.-t*in««>i», 02 WASTE QUANTITY AT SITE
lM»ttv'tt or ••!!• ouJnMWI
C*A SOLID C E SLURRY ""•" »•"«••«»»"
,_ B POWDER FINES ._ F LIQUID TONS 5000 tOHE
G C SLUDGE . G GAS
CUBIC YARDS
-j 0 OTHER
ha=nly wind blown
iSfrtt, NO OF DRUMS
03 WASTE CHARACTERISTICS <£»•» »m«laM»>;
3CA TOXIC C E SOLUBLE C I HIGHLY VOLATILE
LXB CORROSIVE D F INFECTIOUS C J EXPLOSIVE
L C RADIOACTIVE L G FLAMMABLE I- K REACT VE
C 0 PERSISTENT L H CNITABLE G L INCOMPATIBLE
LJ M NOT APPLICABLE
HI. WASTE TYPE
GATE GOBY
SLU
OlW
SOL
PSD
OCC
IOC
ACC
BAS
MES
SUBSTANCE NAME
SLUDGE
OILY WASTE
SOLVENTS
PESTICIDES
OTHER ORGANIC CHEMICALS
INORGANIC CHEMICALS
ACIDS
BASES
HEAVY METALS
01 GROSS AMOUNT
5000
02 UNIT OF MEASURE 03 COMMENTS
tons
IV. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES $.. ^r.~-. ..-nou «.«.«., ».ac.•,
CATEGORY 01 FEEDSTOCK N»ME
FDS
FDS
FDS
FDS
02 CAS NUMBER
CATEGORY 01 FEEDSTOCK NAK-£
FDS
FDS
FDS
FDS
o: CAS NUMBED
VL SOURCES OF INFORMATION c.. u>«c« ..'..»~»i • « rarauu unM»i»,u »P»TI ,
Manifests, limited wastes analyses and company correspondences. Discussions
with State officials, State trip report.
EPAFORM2070 12 17 811
-------
SEPA
POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE
PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
PART 3 • DESCRIPTION OF HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS
I. IDENTIFICATION
01 STATE
NM
02 SITE NUMBe"
minimi
II. HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS
01 _ * GROUNOWATER CONTAMINATION
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
2500
02 ~ OBSERVED IDATE
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
3 POTENTIAL
- ALLEGE;
Heavy metals may be leaching to the groundwater which is used for drinking/
irrigation purposes.
01 Z B SURF ACE WATER CONTAMINATION
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED .
02 r OBSERVED (DATE
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
C POTENTIAL
_ ALLEGES
No surface waters are proximent to the site.
01 I C CONTAMINATION OF AIR
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
~ 600
02 H" OBSERVED.DATE
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
". POTENTIAL
JC ALLEGED
Unsubstantiated reports are on file of fugitive dust problems,
100 people within 1/4 mile and 500 within 1.5 miles
There are approximate
0110 FIRE EXPLOSIVE CONDITIONS
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
02 1 OBSERVEDIOATE
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
POTENTIAL
1 ALLEGED
None reported nor anticipated.
01 1 E DIRECT CONTACT
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
600
02 J OBSERVED (DATE
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
2? POTENTIAL
_ ALLEGED
Site is unfenced and materials are easily blown off-site.
01 _ F CONTAMINATION OF SOIL _
03 AREA POTENTIALLY AFFECTED 100
02 3 OBSERVED (DATE
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
.X POTENTIAL
Heavy metals, if leaching from the storage piles, could be accumulating in the
soil column.
01 _ G DRINKING WATER CONTAMINATION _ 2500
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
02 1. OBSERVED IDATE
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
JC POTENTIAL
. ALLEGED
Downgradient wells about 1.5 miles away are used for drinking water by up to 2500
individuals.
01 1 H WORKER EXPOSURE INJURY
03 WORKERS POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
02 Z OBSERVED IDATE
O4 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
^POTENTIAL
- ALLEGED
None reported. However.probable that workers are exposed through breathing
fugitive dust and possibly direct contact.
01 ol POPULATION EXPOSURE INJURY
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
2500
02 G OBSERVED (DATE
O4 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
$ POTENTIAL
L- ALLEGED
Fugitive dusts may be easily transported off-site exposing anyone in the area.
Add in groundwater exposure.
A FORM 2070.12(7
-------
^ __.- POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE
CVHHA PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
PART 3 • DESCRIPTION OF HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS
1. IDENTIFICATION
0! STATE
NM
02 SITE NUMBED
Dlllllllll
II. HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS ,<:«*„»„.<,.
01 Z J DAMAGE TO FLORA
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
02 3 OBSERVED (DATE
. ) ED POTENTIAL
C ALLEGED
Surrounding vegetation appears blackened by blowing dust. No adverse impacts
have been documented to date.
01 Z K DAMAGE TO FAUNA
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION ««»«c« . , i,«r.»i um»•«<»<• ••»«
Same as Part 2 Section VI.
EP>FOflH2070 12(7 -811
-------
BACKGROUND OF SAMPLING ACTIVITES AT
FLAMING GLORY AIRPORT LAKE,
BROKEN RIDGE, OKLAHOMA
I. BACKGROUND
On 30 June 1980, Andy Anchovy and Arlene Alebrew, Division of Waste
Management, State Department of Health, attended a public meeting
before the Flatte County Commissioners. One of the issues raised at
this meeting was the possible pesticide contamination of surface
waters resulting from disposal of waste pesticides into a shallow
pond on county property near the Flaming Glory Airport over the past
twenty years. The pond, which is located north of the airport, was
thought to drain into a canal which flows into the National Wildlife
Refuge and eventually into the Dry Wash River. The area surrounding
the pond was reported to be littered with empty barrels and other
refuse. Mr. Spider Nasturtium, State Agriculture Plant and Insect
Specialist, took samples of the pond and canal waters on 13 June
1980. Laboratory results indicate low pesticide levels (Dieldrin,
DDP and Malathion) in the water at some location samples. The data
sheets for the samples collected in this area by the Department of
Health are attached. A phone call to Arlene Alebrew clarified the
laboratory results on the data sheets. These data are contained in
Table 1.
The State Department of Health notified EPA Region VIII of the
potential problem at the Flaming Glory Airport Lake and indicated
that inspectors from the State Health area office would perform a
Preliminary Assessment. The following information was developed
during the PA.
II. SITE DESCRIPTION
A. General
The Flaming Glory Airport is located approximately half-way between
Broken Ridge, Oklahoma, and Dusty Valley. Oklahoma, just south of
-------
Highway 160. The lake Is situated south and east of the airport and
west of County Line Road (T38N, R8E, SEC. 24, El/2, NE1/4). The
general site location is shown in Figure 1. The detailed map showing
the Flaming Glory Airport Lake is provided in Figure 2.
There are two bodies of water at the airport. The big lake covers
approximately 2-1/2 acres. There is a small pond (40 yds x 20 yds)
approximately .12 miles north of the big lake. There are numerous
marshy areas to the north and south of the lake. It appears that
when the water is high, these marshy areas could become filled with
water and become ponds. In addition to the pond, a marshy area .28
miles south of the lake has been used as a disposal area for drums
and containers. Spider Nasturtium indicated there were a "couple
hundred empty drums" in this area. These containers appear to have
contained pesticides at one time. Figure 2 is a principal site map
showing the location of the lake, pond, marshy area and mixing pad
used by the commercial sprayers for filling the aircraft with
pesticide. Both the lake and pond were found to have no surface
inlets or outlets.
The drainage ditch west of County Line road and east of the lake was
observed to be dry north of the lake. However, there was flowing
water from the south portion of the lake to Rock Creek. The flow was
estimated to be one cubic foot per second (cfs) or less. This
indicates a possible ground water connection between the lake and
this drainage ditch.
The airport is operated by the City of Broken Ridge. Mr. Lou Lenny.
Broken Ridge City Manager, signed a "Consent for Access to Property"
form so that FIT could enter the site for sampling.
B. Regional Geology
The Flaming Glory Airport lies in the western portion of the Flaming
Gorge, a broad structural depression that has been down faulted on
the eastern side and hinged along the west (Emery, 1969). The valley
is bordered by two mountain ranges; the Small Hills on the west and
-------
west and the Stubbed Toe Mountains on the east. Up to 30,000 feet of
Oligocene to Holocene Age valley fill material comprised of alluvium
and Interbedded volcanic flows and tuffs overlie Precambrian basement
rock in the valley. The alluvium is comprised of unconsolidated
clays, silt, sand, and gravel (Edgery, 1972).
C. Soils
Within the Flaming Glory Airport boundaries, three soil mapping units
and two land areas are delineated. The three soil mapping units are:
Mosca loamy sand series, 0-1% slope; the Flaming Glory sandy loam
series, 0-1% slope; and the Villa Grove sandy clay loam series,
saline, 0-1% slope. The two land areas delineated are marsh and
gravel pit (Pannell et al, 1980).
All three soil series are found on old flood plains and alluvial
fans. The Mosca series is a deep, well drained soil formed in
moderately coarse to coarse textured alluvium. The parent material
for this series weathered from volcanic rocks. The Flaming Glory
series is a moderately deep, somewhat poorly drained soil formed in
fine to medium textured alluvium that overlies sandy alluvium. The
parent material for this series weathered from volcanic rocks
containing high concentrations of sodium. The Villa Grove series is
a deep, well drained soil formed in medium textured calcareous
alluvium. The parent material for this series weathered primarily
from quartz latite and rhyolite. Gypsum found in some of these soils
was derived from the sulfides and sulfates found in these volcanic
materials (Pannell et al, 1980).
Permeability is moderately slow (0.2-0.6 in/hr) in the Flaming Glory
and Villa Grove series but is moderately rapid (2.0-6.0 in/hr) in the
Mosca series. Available water capacity is low to moderate (0.04-0.16
in/in of soil) for all three soil series. Reaction (pH) for the
Mosca series is moderate to very strongly alkaline (7.9-9.0+); the pH
for the San Luis series is strongly to very strongly alkaline
-------
(8,5-9.0+); the pH for the Villa Grove series is mildly to moderately
alkaline (7.4-8.4). Salinity is low to moderate (0-8 Mmhos/cm) in
the Mosca and Villa Grove series and is moderate to very high (4-30
Mmhos/cra) in the Flaming Glory series. Runoff is slow and the water
erosion hazard is slight for all three soil series. The soil blowing
hazard is high for the Mosca series (Pannell et al, 1980).
The above soil series descriptions describe a range of soil
characteristics expected to be found in this area. The marsh and
gravel pit land areas are a small percentage of the total area under
consideration and are too varied to make any useful determinations as
to their properties.
D. Hydrology
Ground Water - Within the valley fill material there is an unconfined
aquifer and an underlying confined aquifer. Throughout the major
portion of the valley a ten to eighty-foot thick blue clay layer acts
as the confining layer separating these aquifers. Volcanic material
extending from the San Pedro acts as the confining layer in the
southwest portion of the valley (Edgery, 1973).
The crystalline basement rock bears essentially no water. The
unconfined aquifer receives recharge primarily through infiltration
by precipitation. The depth to water in several observation wells
near the National Wildlife Refuge to the south ranges from one-half
to nine feet below ground surface (Curtis, 1983). Depth to the top
of the blue clay layer ranges from 40 to 60 feet in the vicinity of
the airport lake (Edgery, 1973), and the direction of flow in the
region is to the southeast. There is a high salinity hazard
(750-2250 umhos/cm) in the unconfined aquifer in the area of the
airport lake (Edgery, 1973).
Surface Water - There are several surface drainages in the vicinity
of the airport lake. The Leyden Lateral, an irrigation ditch,
parallels U.S. highway 160 to the north of the site and flows in an
easterly direction. At County Line Road, the Loveland Lateral forks
-------
in an easterly direction. At County Line Road, the Loveland Lateral
forks from the Leyden Lateral. It parallels the road, flowing in a
southerly direction, and passes within approximately sixty feet of
the site. Near the airport lake this lateral crosses under County
Line Road and flows in an easterly direction. (See Figure 2.) A
borrow ditch, serving also as a drainage ditch parallels the Loveland
Lateral along County Line Road. The borrow ditch is about ten feet
west of the Lateral placing it in a position to intercept any runoff
from the airport area. This ditch continues past the airport and
joins Spring Creek in the National Wildlife Refuge. At this
confluence both water courses pass under County Line Road and become
Rock Creek, an easterly flowing stream.
At the time of sampling, the south flowing drainage ditch was
dry north of the airport lake. South of the airport lake it
contained an intermittent flow and south of the marsh it contained a
constant flow. The Loveland Lateral was dry. There were no observed
surface flows contributing to the south flowing drainage ditch
indicating that infiltration from ground water is contributing to the
increased flow to the south.
This south flowing drainage ditch flows into Rock Creek one mile
south of the Broken Ridge National Wildlife Refuge boundary. The
Parma drain also contributes some flow near here. Flow in the creek
is moderate. The FIT has not identified water use for these
ditches.
E. Ground Water Use
There are 122 water use wells, serving approximately 1,500
people, within a three mile radius of the lake that are registered at
the State Engineer's Office. An additional three wells, serving
approximately 1,530 people, are located 3.5 miles to the southeast.
These have been identified from the master list of wells maintained
by the State Engineer's office. Additional information was obtained
from the well permit for each well. The permits for nine wells could
not be located and these wells have not been included in the summary
of water use. None of these wells have been field checked to deter-
mine if they are presently in use. A summary of water use within a
three mile radius of the site is presented in Table 2.
-------
The State used well completion information and drilling logs to
determine the aquifer in which each well was screened. Wells which
are screened above the blue clay layer were determined to be pumping
from the unconfined aquifer, while those screened below the blue clay
layer were determined to be pumping from the confined aquifer. When
this information was not available, the aquifer of use was reported
as undetermined.
-------
T
a* *(izpen.-r
-------
Dump I Mcrlh I
''
PRIVATE PROPERTY
"R i«WC_ NATION A L
. fipfiflQ Croak t
WILDLIFE REFUGE
ecology and environment, inc.
4106 EAST FLORIDA AVENUE. SUITE 3SQ.
DENVER, COLORADO 80777
FIGURED Principal Locations
Map
-------
TABLE 1
FLAMING GLORY AIRPORT LAKE PESTICIDE ANALYSES,1
(SAMPLES COLLECTED BY MR. SPIDER NASTURTIUM
STATE DEPT. OF AGRICULTURE, JUNE 13, 1983)
SAMPLE
DIELDRIN
Pest
Pest
Pest
Pest
Pest
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
16
16
2.8
4.1
ppm
-
ppm
ppm
ppra
DPP
8 ppm
10 ppm
41 ppm
4 ppm
MALATHION
4 ppm
1 Results in ppm
-------
^ _,_ _ POTENTIAL Hi
WFPA PRELIMIN
•~ - ^™ PART 1 - SITE INFO
II. SITE NAME AND LOCATION
01 SITE NAME t.e« eeflw o, C^.TM,., i
Flaming Glory Airport Lake
03 CITY
Broken Ridge
09 COORDINATES LATITUDE LONGITUDE
iZARDOUS WASTE SITE
ARY ASSESSMENT
RMATION AND ASSESSMEN
1. IDENTIFICATION
01 STATE 02 S|TE NoVe: =
OK D999999999
02 STREET ROUTE NO OR SPECIFIC LOCATION IDENTIFIER
Hwy 1092, 5.2 East of Broken Ridge
04 STATE 06 ZIP CODE 06
OK 00000 F
2
:OUNTY 07COJ'.-.1 :=;?•..-
latte ^fo= ^b
i 0 DIRECTIONS TO SITE s>» — >e "°™ *#»••*• p«e*c '<*e
Take Hwy 1092, 5.2 miles east from Broken Ridge, entrance
to airport on right. Lake is 0.4 miles 'further east, then right on County Road 2
for 3.2 Miles. Lake is located on right" about 150 yards from road.
III. RESPONSIBLE PARTIES
01 OWNER * r~om*
-Broken Ridge
03 CITY
Broken Ridge
C' OPERATOR IT >no.r ««<»>»••••» »0« o-w
Sam Stoddard
OS CITY
Broken Ridge
1 3 TYPE Of OWNERSHIP c».c. o~.
r A PRIVATE " B FEDERAL
R f DTHFR
rSoaff -
14 OWNER OPERATOR NOTIFICATION ON FIL£ Ct*c« uitnutoei,.
r A proA'vx" [>ATF RFCF'vFn / ' ~ ** nnrnt.
MONT- DA' *EA»
02 STREET f&,u*l,c««. «* <«v< *MOT« c/x:.w cowi. »»n » »«.. «<«««». «» >VT J Oncwo. «^^o
Q A MtGM 3d B MEDIUM D C. LOW _ O D NONE
»•« Conaou «• ~-«"">
JCMU imj i v uwrvtj«»tt<
VI. INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROM
01 CONTACT 02 Of '«••"<
Virginia Vance Coun
04 PERSON RESPONSIBLE FO« ASSESSMENT OJ AGf NCY
Art Argyle USEPj
T Orpftnucaon!
ty Commissioner
V FIT
,999, 222-2222
,,.,., ,,, ,rrr 10 ,27 80
J '4H"' JJ 1 — ^T" :" '"•"• —
:ess
EPA FOm 1070.12(7 «1|
-------
£EPA
POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE
PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
PART 2 • WASTE INFORMATION
1. IDENTIFICATION
01 STATE
OK
02 SITE NUMBER ' "
D999999999
II. WASTE STATES. QUANTITIES. AND CHARACTERISTICS
01 PHYSICAL STATES C/-.0 r in«' wr
3 A SOLID CM SLURRY
UB POWDER FINES K f LIQUID
3 C SLUDGE LI G 'GAS
D OTHf H
'SMfr
III. WASTE TYPE
CATEGORY
SLU
OLW
SOL
PSD
OCC
IOC
ACD
BAS
MES
02 WASTE QUANTITY AT SITE
ftHrl: M «0»p»«««l.
TONS
WO OF DRUM*
03 WASTE CHARACTERISTICS cC».c' * "»' «e»^'
IJ1A TOXIC CE SOLUBLE C I HCHL" VOL»T|L£
C B CORROSIVE w F INFECTIOUS f> J EXPLOSIVE
3C RADIOACTIVE Ci G FLAMMABLE C'K REACTIVE
l3fO PERSISTENT X' H ONITABLE 3 L INCOMPATIBLE
O M NOT APPLICABLE
"-*„ _ *
SUBSTANCE NAME
SLUDGE
OILY WASTE
SOLVENTS
PESTICIDES
OTHER ORGANIC CHEMICALS
INORGANIC CHEMICALS
ACIDS
BASES
HEAVY METALS
IV. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES s««
01 CATEGORY
PSD
PSD
PSD
01 GROSS AMOUNT
unk
unk
02 UNIT OF MEASURE 03 COMMENTS
-
: gals
gals/lbs couple hundred drums
»#**on /o> moii 'r#flv**r r :"*f C*3 ***!&*• t'
02 SUBSTANCE NAME
Dielbrin
DDP
Ilalathion
03CASNUMBEP
OA STORAGE DISPOSAL METHOD
05 CONCENTRATION
/ . 0-10
A-41
"
CONGES5' Rl'T.rs
ppra
ppm
ppm
V. FEEDSTOCKS s~*»~., •»<:«*«....
CATEGORY 01 FEEDSTOCK NAME
FOS
FDS
FDS
FDS
VI. SOURCES OF INFORMATION -"
02 CAS NUMBER
CATEGORY oi FEEDSTOCK NAME
FDS
FDS
FDS
FDS
^« ^^... ., ^«. «^.^,-^B1,
OJCASNUMBiC
County Commission Meeting Minutes, State on-site visit and sample analyses,
conversations with State and County officials, pannell Report, 1980.
9AFCDUI2070 12 |7-I1|
-------
POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE
PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
PART 3 • DESCRIPTION OF HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS
I. IDENTIFICATION
D999999999
I HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS
01 iJ A GBOUNOAATER CONTAMINATION . -~02 D OftSERVED ,DATF I S POTENTIAL O Au_£G£-
03 POPULATION POTENT,AU.V AFFECTED 1UUU 04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
Groundwater levels are quite shallow and contamination could migrate into
aquifers.
01 ?B SURFACE VkATEBCON'AMINATlONft02 .S OaSFgVFn .DATE O/i-3/oO , Q POTENTIAL Cj ALLEGE:
03 POPULATION POTES-.ALLT AFFECTED 04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
Concentrations of dieldrin, DDP, and Malathion found in samples from pond
and canal. Although these waters are not used for drinking within 3 miles,
there could be contamination of the Wildlife Preserve
Oi Li C CON'AMisi-iON OF AIR ,nn o? DOeSEB.'EO'DATE i QCPOTENTiAL C' ALLEGE -
03 POPu.ATlONPD'E>»TiA__v AFFECTED JUU CX NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
Soils of the area are easily wind blown especially during dry summer/fall periods.
01 _j D FIRE EiP.OS'VE CONDITIONS 02 ti OBSEOVED .DATE _ | 2 POTENTIAL
03 POPULATION POTEN1'A.L» AFFECTED _ 04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
None reported nor anticipated.
01 '^ E DIRECT CONTACT O^UOBSga^g- iDATg , C POTENTIAL IT ALLEGES
03 POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED _ 04 NARRATlvt DESCRIPTION
Site is fenced, no reports were located indicating direct contact.
01 S f CONTAMINAT.ON Of SOIL 0! PQBSFRi/FP 3ATE b/3U/BU i -, POTENTIAL C ALLEGED
03 ARE* POTENTIALLY AFFECTED *^ 1 _ O4 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
rACr«l
County Commissioner notified EPA of problem including apparent soil contamination
around fill stand areas.
Ol a & DRINKING _, ,,,« OJC OBSERVED (DATE _ ) C POTENTIAL L AUJ=G£C
03 POPULATON POTENTIALLY AFFECTED -}UU 04 NA«R>TIVE OCSCWPTlClN
None reported. Potential for airbom transport (see Section C)
-------
6EPA
POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS WASTE SITE
PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
PART 3 • DESCRIPTION OF HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS
I. CENTIFICATION
01 STAT
OK
C2 SKI NUMBS c
D999999999
I. HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND INCIDENTS
01 Q J DAMAGE TO FLORA 02 C OBSERVED (DATE ) B POTENTIAL C ALLEGED
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
None reported; however, vegetation in National Wildlife Refuge may be affected by
discharge of pesticide into ditch which runs into Refuge.
01 D K DAMAGE TO FAUNA 02 Z OBSERVES (DATE ) £ POTENTIAL D ALLEGE;
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION -cw>.~<-.> o let.-.i
None reported; however, National Wildlife Refuge is immediately south of site
and watered by streams from site. Refuge is the nesting ground for the whooping
crane.
01 O L CONIAMINA-IOKOF FOODCHAis 02 Ci OBSERVED (DATE ) fc POTENTIAL 3 ALLEGE:
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
None reported; however, pesticides are known to bio-accumulate.
01 »M UNSTABLE CONTAINMENT OF WASTES Q3 i"l (ItLtFRvCn IPATF O/i-)/OU , C POTENTIAL 3 ALLEGED
tip*! •*•*€" t •**-; *o*«i •«••"( e-w^i « p.
03 POPJl>TK>. POTENTIALLY AFFECTED *"* iu 04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
Contamination of the pond and canal, plus the improper disposal of drums
around the pond and marsh
01 D N DAMAGE TO OFFSITE PROPERTY 02 D OBSERVED IDATE I C POTENTIAL C ALLEGED
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
01 BO CONTAMINATION OF SEWERS STORM DRAINS WWTPi 02 C OBSERVED (DATE 6/13/80 i D POTENTIAL C ALLEGED
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
Canal is contaminated by pesticides
01 0 P ILLEGAL UNAUTHORIZED DUMPING 02 O OBSERVED (DATE t>/ 1 J/ BU, D POTENTIAL DALLEGED
04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION
Photos provided by County Commissioner shows unauthorized dump at extreme SE
corner adjacent to Wildlife Refuge
05 DESCRIPTION OF ANY OTHER KNOWN POTENTIAL OP. ALLEGED HAZARDS
NONE
II TOTAL POPULATION POTENTIALLY AFFECTED. *• *->UU
IV COMMENTS
NONE
V SOimCES OF MFOAMATION ~~
Same as Part 2 Section VI.
-------
|